Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisEstablishes the foundations of Cloud computing, building a diverse understanding of the technologies behind Cloud computing. This book begins with an introduction to Cloud computing, presenting fundamental concepts such as analysing Cloud definitions, Cloud evolution, Cloud services, Cloud deployment types, and highlights the main challenges.Table of ContentsPreface ixReferences xii1 Introduction 11.1 Overview 11.2 Cloud definition 21.3 Cloud evolution 31.4 Cloud services 51.5 Cloud deployment types 61.6 Main challenges of Clouds 71.7 Summary 101.8 Exercises 10References 11Part One Cloud management 132 Cloud structure 152.1 Introduction 152.2 Infrastructure components 152.3 Cloud Layers 172.4 Cloud relations 232.5 Cloud dynamics 272.6 Data types 272.7 Summary 302.8 Exercises 30References 303 Fundamentals of Cloud management 313.1 Introduction 313.2 Clouds management services 323.3 Virtual control center 373.4 Prerequisite input-data for the management services 373.5 Management of user requirements 403.6 Summary 463.7 Exercises 47References 474 Cloud properties 494.1 Introduction 494.2 Adaptability property 504.3 Resilience property 514.4 Scalability property 524.5 Availability property 534.6 Reliability property 534.7 Security and privacy property 544.8 Business model 554.9 Summary 564.10 Exercises 57References 575 Automated management services 595.1 Introduction 595.2 Virtual layer self-managed services 605.3 Virtual services interdependency 655.4 Application layer self-managed services 675.5 Application services interdependency 705.6 Security and privacy by design 715.7 Multi-tier application deployment in the Cloud 735.8 Main challenges and requirements 795.9 Summary 825.10 Exercises 82References 83Part Two Clouds security fundamentals 856 Background 876.1 Topics flow 876.2 Trusted Computing 896.3 Summary 97References 977 Challenges for establishing trust in Clouds 997.1 Introduction 997.2 Effects of Cloud dynamism on trust relationships 1007.3 Challenges 1037.4 Summary 1057.5 Exercises 105References 1058 Establishing trust in Clouds 1078.1 Introduction 1078.2 Organization requirements 1078.3 Framework requirements 1088.4 Device properties 1118.5 Framework architecture 1128.6 Required software agents 1168.7 Framework workflow 1198.8 Discussion and analysis 1258.9 Summary 1268.10 Exercises 127References 1279 Clouds chains of trust 1299.1 Introduction 1299.2 Software agents revision 1309.3 Roots of and chains of trust definition 1309.4 Intra-layer chains of trust 1329.5 Trust across layers 1409.6 Summary 1439.7 Exercises 143References 14310 Provenance in Clouds 14510.1 Introduction 14510.2 Motivating scenarios 14810.3 Log records management and requirements 15010.4 Framework domain architecture 15510.5 Framework software agents 15710.6 Framework workflow 16010.7 Threat analysis 17110.8 Discussion and future directions 17310.9 Exercises 175References 17511 Insiders 17711.1 Introduction 17711.2 Insiders definition 17811.3 Conceptual models 18211.4 Summary 18511.5 Exercises 185References 186Part Three Practical examples 18712 Real life examples 18912.1 Open Stack 18912.2 Amazon web services 19512.3 Component architecture 19712.4 Prototype 20312.5 Summary 209Reference 20913 Case study 21113.1 Scenario 21113.2 Home healthcare architecture in the Cloud 21213.3 Insiders analysis for home healthcare 21213.4 Cloud threats 220References 226

Read more less

Book SynopsisModern Power System Protection guides the reader through all of the principles of modern protection systems and schemes in the smart grid era. The authors provide a comprehensive guide to protection principles, before examining digital systems and equipment used for modern protection schemes.Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xv List of Abbreviations xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Review of Principles of Protection 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Historical Development 1 1.3 Faults, Fault Currents, Voltages, and Protection 2 1.3.1 Types of Faults 2 1.3.2 Currents and Voltages under Fault Situations and Protection 2 1.4 Fault Current Contribution from Generators 5 1.5 Philosophy of Protection Relaying 5 1.5.1 Selectivity 5 1.5.2 Speed of Operation 5 1.5.3 Sensitivity 5 1.5.4 Reliability, Dependability, and Security 6 1.5.5 Primary and Backup Protection 6 1.5.6 Unit and Non-Unit Protection 6 1.6 Review Questions 6 1.7 Problems 6 2 Instrument Transformers 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Basic Principles of Operation 10 2.2.1 Shunt Mode 10 2.2.2 Series Mode 10 2.3 Current Transformers (CTS) 11 2.3.1 Steady-state Theory 11 2.3.2 Excitation Current 12 2.3.3 Excitation Characteristic 13 2.3.4 Terminal Marking and Polarity 13 2.3.5 CT Burden 14 2.3.6 CT Errors 14 2.3.7 Accuracy Classes 15 2.3.8 Accuracy Limit Factor 16 2.3.9 Rated Currents 16 2.4 Transient Response of CTs 17 2.4.1 Power System Fault Current 17 2.4.2 Flux Required to Transform the Primary Current 18 2.4.3 Transient Factor 19 2.4.4 Peak Transient Factor 20 2.4.5 Maximum Peak Transient Factor (Ktfp,max ) 21 2.4.6Transient Dimensioning Factor Ktd for Specific Time t'al 21 2.4.7 Rated Equivalent Limiting Secondary Voltage (Eal) 22 2.4.8 Primary Time Constant (TP) with Multiple Infeeds 23 2.4.9 Over-dimensioning Factor (Kh) Due Remanence 23 2.4.10 Duty Cycle 23 2.4.11 Auto-reclosing 23 2.4.12 Errors 24 2.4.13 CT Classes for Transient Performance 25 2.5 Selection of a CT 26 2.5.1 Rated Primary Current 26 2.5.2 Rated Secondary Current 26 2.5.3 Class, Burden, and ALF of the CTs 27 2.6 Voltage Transformers 32 2.6.1 Inductive Voltage Transformers 32 2.6.2 Inductive Voltage Transformer Errors 33 2.6.3 Inductive Voltage Transformer Classes 33 2.6.4 Inductive Voltage Transformer Selection 34 2.6.5 Terminal Marking 35 2.6.6 Inductive Voltage Transformer Transient Behaviour 35 2.6.7 Voltage Transformer Connections 35 2.7 Capacitor Voltage Transformer 36 2.7.1 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Errors 37 2.7.2 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Classes 37 2.7.3 Transient Behaviour 38 2.8 Non-Conventional Current and Voltage Transformers 39 2.8.1 Introduction 39 2.8.2 Non-Conventional CTs 40 2.8.3 Optical Voltage Transformers 45 2.9 Review Questions 45 2.10 Problems 46 3 Review of Principles of Protection 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Excess Current Protection 49 3.2.1 Discrimination by Current 50 3.2.2 Discrimination by Time 51 3.2.3 Discrimination by Time and Current 52 3.2.4 Inverse Characteristics 52 3.2.5 Grading of Relays 54 3.2.6 Co-ordination with Fuses 55 3.2.7 Plug Setting and Plug Setting Multiplier 56 3.2.8 Time Multiplier Setting 56 3.2.9 Discrimination When There Is a Delta-star Transformer 56 3.2.10 Earth Fault Protection 61 3.2.11 Directional Relaying 61 3.3 Differential Protection 62 3.3.1 Transformer Differential Protection 63 3.3.2 Protection Against Inter Turn Faults and Earth Faults 65 3.3.3 Feeder Differential Protection 70 3.4 Distance Protection 73 3.4.1 General Principles 73 3.4.2 Zones 74 3.4.3 Characteristic Presentation 75 3.4.4 Distance Relay Inputs for Three-Phase Faults and Phase-to-Phase Faults 75 3.4.5 Relationship Between Relay Voltage and ZS / ZL Ratio 76 3.4.6 Distance Measurement 77 3.4.7 Distance Relay Tele-protection Schemes 77 3.5 Overload Protection 79 3.5.1 Overhead Lines 80 3.5.2 Transformers 80 3.5.3 Generators 81 3.6 Load Shedding 81 3.7 Over-Flux Protection 84 3.8 Review Questions 84 3.9 Problems 85 4 Protection of Distributed Generation 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Fault Current Contribution from Different Generators 92 4.2.1 Synchronous Generators 92 4.2.2 Single-fed Induction Generators 93 4.2.3 Doubly-fed Induction Generators 94 4.2.4 Full Power Converter Generators 95 4.3 Protection of Distributed Generation 96 4.3.1 Protection of Faults within a DG 96 4.3.2 Protection Requirements for DGs Connected to a Distribution Network 97 4.3.3 Distribution System Earth Fault Protection 99 4.3.4 Mains Failure Protection 100 4.4 Effect of DG on Distribution Network Protection 101 4.4.1 Blinding of Protection 101 4.4.2 False Tripping 105 4.4.3 Issues with Recloser Operations 108 4.4.4 Impact on Distance Protection 110 4.5 Review Questions 111 4.6 Problems 111 5 Protection of Wind Farms 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Wind Turbine Configurations 115 5.2.1 Fixed Speed Wind Turbines 115 5.2.2 Doubly Fed Induction Generator Wind Turbines 116 5.2.3 Fully Rated Wind Turbines 116 5.3 Wind Turbine Fault Protection 117 5.4 Protection of On-shore Wind Farms 121 5.4.1 Protection Associated with Grid Interface 121 5.4.2 Protection Associated with Collector Network 124 5.4.3 Lightning and Surge Protection for Wind Farms 128 5.5 Protection of Offshore Wind Farms 129 5.5.1 Protection of LCC-HVDC 131 5.5.2 Protection of VSC-HVDC 131 5.6 Review Questions 133 5.7 Problems 134 6 Protection of PV Plants 137 6.1 Introduction 137 6.2 Components of a Solar PV Plant 137 6.2.1 PV Cells, Modules, or Arrays 137 6.2.2 Power Conversion and Conditioning Equipment 141 6.2.3 Controller 143 6.3 Protection of Rooftop Solar PV Systems 143 6.4 Protection of Ground Mounted Solar PV Systems 145 6.5 Review Questions 151 6.6 Problems 151 7 Signal Acquisition and Processing for Intelligent Electronic Devices 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Signal Parameters for an Intelligent Electronic Device 153 7.2.1 Signals under Normal and Abnormal Conditions 153 7.2.2 Spectral Content of CT/VT Measurements 154 7.3 Nyquist Sampling Theorem and Aliasing 155 7.4 A to D Conversion 158 7.4.1 Sampling 158 7.4.2 Quantisation and Encoding 159 7.4.3 Issues with A to d 160 7.4.4 A to D Conversion Techniques: Successive Approximation Method 163 7.5 Discrete-Time Signal Analysis 164 7.5.1 Discrete Fourier Transform 165 7.6 Sine and Cosine Filter 168 7.7 Review Questions 172 7.8 Problems 172 8 Numerical Relays 175 8.1 Introduction 175 8.2 Components of a Numerical Relay 175 8.2.1 I/V Converter 176 8.2.2 Anti-aliasing Filter 176 8.2.3 Sample and Hold Circuit, Multiplexer, and A to D Converter (ADC) 178 8.2.4 Microprocessor 179 8.3 Numerical Overcurrent Relay 180 8.4 Numerical Distance Relay 180 8.5 Numerical Differential Protection 186 8.6 Review Questions 188 8.7 Problems 188 9 Substation Automation and IEC 61850 191 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Substation Automation 192 9.2.1 Input/Output Devices 192 9.2.2 Relaying and Controlling Equipment 192 9.2.3 Remote Terminal Units 193 9.2.4 Station Computer 193 9.2.5 Human-machine Interface 193 9.2.6 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System 194 9.3 Communication between Substation Equipment 194 9.3.1 Physical Media for Communication 194 9.3.2 Serial Communication 196 9.4 Connection of Substation Equipment 198 9.5 IEC 61850 200 9.5.1 The IEC 61850 Data Model 200 9.5.2 Time-critical Information Exchange 206 9.5.3 Sampled Values 209 9.5.4 SA Design 210 9.6 Review Questions 211 9.7 Problems 212 10 Wide Area Monitoring, Protection, and Control Fundamentals 215 10.1 System Needs for Wide Area Monitoring, Protection, and Control 215 10.2 Synchronised Measurement Technology 216 10.2.1 Definition of Synchrophasors 217 10.2.2 Synchrophasor Measurement Errors 218 10.2.3 Timing Sources 219 10.2.4 Phasor Measurement Unit 220 10.2.5 PMU Measurement Latency 221 10.2.6 Phasor Data Concentrators 222 10.2.7 Communication Infrastructure 223 10.2.8 Architecture of Synchrophasor Measurement Systems 224 10.2.9 Communication Networks for WAMPAC System 225 10.3 Wide Area Monitoring, Protection, and Control Applications 226 10.3.1 Post-disturbance Analysis and Model Validation 228 10.3.2 Characterisation of Load Centres 229 10.3.3 Monitoring of Parameters of Synchronous Generators 232 10.3.4 PMU-based State Estimation 233 10.3.5 PMU-based Monitoring of Inter-area Oscillations 239 10.3.6 PMU-based Coordinated Power Oscillations Damping 240 10.3.7 PMU-based Adaptive Underfrequency Load-shedding and Smart Frequency Control 242 10.3.8 Adaptive PMU Based Fault Location Method 245 10.3.9 Transmission Line Fault Location Based on Time Synchronised Samples 248 10.4 Practical WAMPAC Examples and Installations 252 10.4.1 Future Intelligent Transmission Network Substation (FITNESS) Project 253 10.4.2 Visualisation of Real Time System Dynamics Using Enhanced Monitoring (VISOR) Project 254 10.4.3 The Enhanced Frequency Control Capability (EFCC) Project 258 10.5 Review Questions 260 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Encyclopedia of Cloud Computing provides IT professionals, educators, researchers and students with a compendium of cloud computing knowledge. Authored by a spectrum of subject matter experts in industry and academia, this unique publication, in a single volume, covers a wide range of cloud computing topics, including technological trends and developments, research opportunities, best practices, standards, and cloud adoption. Providing multiple perspectives, it also addresses questions that stakeholders might have in the context of development, operation, management, and use of clouds. Furthermore, it examines cloud computing's impact now and in the future. The encyclopedia presents 56 chapters logically organized into 10 sections. Each chapter covers a major topic/area with cross-references to other chapters and contains tables, illustrations, side-bars as appropriate. Furthermore, each chapter presents its summary at the beginning and backend material, references and additional resources for further information.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xii About the Authors xiv Reviewers xxxvi Foreword xxxviii Preface xxxix Acknowledgments xlv Part I Introduction to Cloud Computing 1 1 Cloud Computing: An Overview 3San Murugesan and Irena Bojanova Part II Cloud Services 15 2 Cloud Services and Service Providers 17K. Chandrasekaran and Alaka Ananth 3 Mobile Cloud Computing 29Saeid Abolfazli, Zohreh Sanaei, Mohammad Hadi Sanaei, Mohammad Shojafar, and Abdullah Gani 4 Community Clouds 41Amin M. Khan, Felix Freitag, and Leandro Navarro 5 Government Clouds 52Sean Rhody and Dan Dunn 6 Cloud]Based Development Environments: PaaS 62Mehmet N. Aydin, Nazim Ziya Perdahci, and Bahadir Odevci Part III Cloud Frameworks and Technologies 71 7 Cloud Reference Frameworks 73Kapil Bakshi and Larry Beser 8 Virtualization: An Overview 89Jim Sweeney 9 Cloud Network and I/O Virtualization 102Kapil Bakshi and Craig Hill 10 Cloud Networks 115Saurav Kanti Chandra and Krishnananda Shenoy 11 Wireless Datacenter Networks 128Yong Cui and Ivan Stojmenovic 12 Open]Source Cloud Software Solutions 139G. R. Gangadharan, Deepnarayan Tiwari, Lalit Sanagavarapu, Shakti Mishra, Abraham Williams, and Srimanyu Timmaraju 13 Developing Software for Cloud: Opportunities and Challenges for Developers 150K. Chandrasekaran and C. Marimuthu Part IV Cloud Integration and Standards 163 14 Cloud Portability and Interoperability 165Beniamino Di Martino, Giuseppina Cretella, and Antonio Esposito 15 Cloud Federation and Geo]Distribution 178William Culhane, Patrick Eugster, Chamikara Jayalath, Kirill Kogan, and Julian Stephen 16 Cloud Standards 191Andy Edmonds, Thijs Metsch, Alexis Richardson, Piyush Harsh, Wolfgang Ziegler, Philip Kershaw, Alan Sill, Mark A. Carlson, Alex Heneveld, Alexandru]Florian Antonescu, and Thomas Michael Bohnert Part V Cloud Security, Privacy, and Compliance 205 17 Cloud Security: Issues and Concerns 207Pierangela Samarati and Sabrina De Capitani di Vimercati 18 Securing the Clouds: Methodologies and Practices 220Simon Liu 19 Cloud Forensics 233Shams Zawoad and Ragib Hasan 20 Privacy, Law, and Cloud Services 245Carol M. Hayes and Jay P. Kesan 21 Ensuring Privacy in Clouds 255Travis Breaux and Siani Pearson 22 Compliance in Clouds 267Thorsten Humberg and Jan Jürjens Part VI Cloud Performance, Reliability, and Availability 275 23 Cloud Capacity Planning and Management 277Yousri Kouki, Frederico Alvares, and Thomas Ledoux 24 Fault Tolerance in the Cloud 291Kashif Bilal, Osman Khalid, Saif Ur Rehman Malik, Muhammad Usman Shahid Khan, Samee U. Khan, and Albert Y. Zomaya 25 Cloud Energy Consumption 301Dan C. Marinescu 26 Cloud Modeling and Simulation 315Peter Altevogt, Wolfgang Denzel, and Tibor Kiss 27 Cloud Testing: An Overview 327Ganesh Neelakanta Iyer 28 Testing the Cloud and Testing as a Service 338Nitin Dangwal, Neha Mehrotra Dewan, and Sonal Sachdeva 29 Cloud Service Evaluation 349Zheng Li, Liam O’Brien, and Rajiv Ranjan Part VII Cloud Migration and Management 361 30 Enterprise Cloud Computing Strategy and Policy 363Eric Carlson 31 Cloud Brokers 372Ganesh Neelakanta Iyer and Bharadwaj Veeravalli 32 Migrating Applications to Clouds 383Jyhjong Lin 33 Identity and Access Management 396Edwin Sturrus and Olga Kulikova 34 OAuth Standard for User Authorization of Cloud Services 406Piotr Tysowski 35 Distributed Access Control in Cloud Computing Systems 417K. Chandrasekaran and Manoj V. Thomas 36 Cloud Service Level Agreement 433Salman A. Baset 37 Automatic Provisioning of Intercloud Resources driven by Nonfunctional Requirements of Applications 446Jungmin Son, Diana Barreto, Rodrigo N. Calheiros, and Rajkumar Buyya 38 Legal Aspects of Cloud Computing 462David G. Gordon 39 Cloud Economics 476Sowmya Karunakaran Part VIII Cloud Applications and Case Studies 489 40 Engineering Applications of the Cloud 491Kincho H. Law, Jack C. P. Cheng, Renate Fruchter, and Ram D. Sriram 41 Educational Applications of the Cloud 505V. K. Cody Bumgardner, Victor Marek, and Doyle Friskney 42 Personal Applications of Clouds 517Cameron Seay, Montressa Washington, and Rudy J. Watson 43 Cloud Gaming 524Wei Cai, Fangyuan Chi, and Victor C. M. Leung Part IX Big Data and Analytics in Clouds 537 44 An Introduction to Big Data 539Mark Smiley 45 Big Data in a Cloud 551Mark Smiley 46 Cloud]Hosted Databases 562Sherif Sakr 47 Cloud Data Management 572Lingfang Zeng, Bharadwaj Veeravalli, and Yang Wang 48 Large]Scale Analytics in Clouds 582Vladimir Dimitrov 49 Cloud Programming Models (MapReduce) 596Vladimir Dimitrov 50 Developing Elastic Software for the Cloud 609Shigeru Imai, Pratik Patel, and Carlos A. Varela 51 Cloud Services for Distributed Knowledge Discovery 628Fabrizio Marozzo, Domenico Talia, and Paolo Trunfio 52 Cloud Knowledge Modeling and Management 640Pierfrancesco Bellini, Daniele Cenni, and Paolo Nesi Part X Cloud Prospects 653 53 Impact of the Cloud on IT Professionals and the IT Industry 655Cameron Seay, Montressa Washington, and Rudy J. Watson 54 Cloud Computing in Emerging Markets 664Nir Kshetri and Lailani L. Alcantara 55 Research Topics in Cloud Computing 676Anand Kumar, B. Vijayakumar, and R. K. Mittal 56 Cloud Outlook: The Future of the Clouds 682San Murugesan and Irena Bojanova Index 687

Read more less

Book SynopsisMost existing robust design books address design for static systems, or achieve robust design from experimental data via the Taguchi method. Little work considers model information for robust design particularly for the dynamic system. This book covers robust design for both static and dynamic systems using the nominal model information or the hybrid model/data information, and also integrates design with control under a large operating region. This design can handle strong nonlinearity and more uncertainties from model and parameters.Table of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii I BACKGROUND AND FUNDAMENTALS 1 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 Background and Motivation 3 1.1.1 Robust Design for Static Systems 5 1.1.2 Robust Design for Dynamic Systems 8 1.1.3 Integration of Design and Control 10 1.2 Objectives of the Book 14 1.3 Contribution and Organization of the Book 15 2 OVERVIEW AND CLASSIFICATION 19 2.1 Classification of Uncertainty 19 2.2 Robust Performance Analysis 20 2.2.1 Interval Analysis 20 2.2.2 Fuzzy Analysis 21 2.2.3 Probabilistic Analysis 21 2.3 Robust Design 27 2.3.1 Robust Design for Static Systems 28 2.3.2 Robust Design for Dynamic Systems 37 2.4 Integration of Design and Control 41 2.4.1 Control Structure Design 41 2.4.2 Control Method 42 2.4.3 Optimization Method 43 2.5 Problems and Research Opportunities 43 II ROBUST DESIGN FOR STATIC SYSTEMS 3 VARIABLE SENSITIVITY BASED ROBUST DESIGN FOR NONLINEAR SYSTEM 47 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Design Problem for Nonlinear Systems 48 3.2.1 Problem in Deterministic Design 49 3.2.2 Problem in Probabilistic Design 49 3.3 Concept of Variable Sensitivity 51 3.4 Variable Sensitivity Based Deterministic Robust Design 52 3.4.1 Robust Design for Single Performance Single Variable 52 3.4.2 Robust Design for Multiperformances Multivariables 54 3.4.3 Design Procedure 58 3.5 Variable Sensitivity Based Probabilistic Robust Design 58 3.5.1 Single Performance Function Under Single Variables 59 3.5.2 Single Performance Function Under Multivariables 60 3.5.3 Multiperformance Functions Under Multivariables 61 3.6 Case Study 62 3.6.1 Deterministic Design Cases 62 3.6.2 Probabilistic Design Case 66 3.7 Summary 70 4 MULTI-DOMAIN MODELING-BASED ROBUST DESIGN 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Multi-Domain Modeling-Based Robust Design Methodology 73 4.2.1 Multi-Domain Modeling Approach 74 4.2.2 Variation Separation-Based Robust Design Method 75 4.2.3 Design Procedure 78 4.3 Case Study 80 4.3.1 Robust Design of a Belt 80 4.3.2 Robust Design of Hydraulic Press Machine 81 4.4 Summary 86 5 HYBRID MODEL DATA-BASED ROBUST DESIGN UNDER MODEL UNCERTAINTY 87 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Design Problem for Partially Unknown Systems 88 5.2.1 Probabilistic Robust Design Problem 88 5.2.2 Deterministic Robust Design Problem 90 5.3 Hybrid Model Data-Based Robust Design Methodology 92 5.3.1 Probabilistic Robust Design 93 5.3.2 Deterministic Robust Design 99 5.4 Case Study 104 5.4.1 Probabilistic Robust Design 104 5.4.2 Deterministic Robust Design 109 5.5 Summary 114 III ROBUST DESIGN FOR DYNAMIC SYSTEMS 6 ROBUST EIGENVALUE DESIGN UNDER PARAMETER VARIATION—A LINEARIZATION APPROACH 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Dynamic Design Problem Under Parameter Variation 120 6.2.1 Stability Design Problem 120 6.2.2 Dynamic Robust Design Problem 121 6.3 Linearization-Based Robust Eigenvalue Design 122 6.3.1 Stability Design 122 6.3.2 Robust Eigenvalue Design 124 6.3.3 Tolerance Design 127 6.3.4 Design Procedure 128 6.4 Multi-Model-Based Robust Design Method for Stability and Robustness 128 6.4.1 Multi-Model Approach 129 6.4.2 Stability Design 130 6.4.3 Dynamic Robust Design 132 6.4.4 Summary 134 6.5 Case Studies 134 6.5.1 Linearization-Based Robust Eigenvalue Design 134 6.5.2 Multi-Model-Based Robust Design Method 138 6.6 Summary 145 7 ROBUST EIGENVALUE DESIGN UNDER PARAMETER VARIATION—A NONLINEAR APPROACH 147 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Design Problem 148 7.3 SN-Based Dynamic Design 150 7.3.1 Stability Design 152 7.3.2 Dynamic Robust Design 153 7.4 Case Study 160 7.4.1 Stability Design 160 7.4.2 Dynamic Robust Design 162 7.5 Summary 165 8 ROBUST EIGENVALUE DESIGN UNDER MODEL UNCERTAINTY 167 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Design Problem for Partially Unknown Dynamic Systems 168 8.3 Stability Design 169 8.3.1 Stability Design for Nominal Model 169 8.3.2 Stability Design Under Model Uncertainty 169 8.3.3 Stability Bound of Design Variables 171 8.4 Robust Eigenvalue Design and Tolerance Design 172 8.4.1 Robust Eigenvalue Design 172 8.4.2 Tolerance Design 173 8.4.3 Design Procedure 174 8.5 Case Study 175 8.5.1 Design of the Nominal Stability Space 175 8.5.2 Design of the Stability Space 176 8.5.3 Design of the Robust Stability Space 176 8.5.4 Robust Eigenvalue Design 176 8.5.5 Tolerance Design 177 8.5.6 Design Verification 177 8.6 Summary 180 IV INTEGRATION OF DESIGN AND CONTROL 9 DESIGN-FOR-CONTROL-BASED INTEGRATION 183 9.1 Introduction 183 9.2 Integration Problem 184 9.3 Design-for-Control-Based Integration Methodology 186 9.3.1 Design for Control 186 9.3.2 Control Development 188 9.3.3 Integration Optimization for Robust Pole Assignment 188 9.3.4 Integration Procedure 191 9.4 Case Study 192 9.4.1 Design for Control 192 9.4.2 Robust Pole Assignment 193 9.4.3 Design Verification 193 9.4.4 Design for Control 202 9.4.5 Robust Dynamic Design and Verification 202 9.5 Summary 204 10 INTELLIGENCE-BASED HYBRID INTEGRATION 205 10.1 Introduction 205 10.2 Problem in Hybrid System in Manufacturing 207 10.3 Intelligence-Based Hybrid Integration 208 10.3.1 Intelligent Process Control 208 10.3.2 Hybrid Integration Design 214 10.3.3 Hierarchical Optimization of Integration 215 10.4 Case Study 218 10.4.1 Objective 219 10.4.2 Integration Method for the Curing Process 220 10.4.3 Verification and Comparison 222 10.5 Summary 227 11 CONCLUSIONS 229 11.1 Summary and Conclusions 229 11.2 Challenge 231 REFERENCES 233 INDEX 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book examines signal processing techniques for cognitive radios. The book is divided into three parts: Part I, is an introduction to cognitive radios and presents a history of the cognitive radio (CR), and introduce their architecture, functionalities, ideal aspects, hardware platforms, and state-of-the-art developments. Dr.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part I Introduction to Cognitive Radios 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Signal Processing and Cognitive Radios 4 1.3 Software-Defined Radios 6 1.3.1 Software-Defined Radio Platforms 14 1.3.2 Software-Defined Radio Systems 15 1.4 From Software-Defined Radios to Cognitive Radios 19 1.4.1 The Spectrum Scarcity Problem 19 1.4.2 Emergence of CRs 21 1.5 What this Book is About 22 1.6 Summary 26 2 The Cognitive Radio 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 A Functional Model of a Cognitive Radio 30 2.2.1 Spectrum Knowledge Acquisition (Spectrum Awareness) 30 2.2.2 Communications Decision-Making 33 2.2.3 Learning in Cognitive Radios 33 2.3 The Cognitive Radio Architecture 35 2.3.1 Spectrum Sensing Region of a Cognitive Engine 36 2.3.2 Radio Reconfiguration Region of a Cognitive Engine 36 2.3.3 Learning Region of a Cognitive Engine 37 2.3.4 Memory Region of a Cognitive Engine 37 2.4 The Ideal Cognitive Radio 38 2.5 Signal Processing Challenges in Cognitive Radios 39 2.6 Summary 40 3 Cognitive Radios and Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 42 3.1 Introduction 42 3.2 Interference and Spectrum Opportunities 46 3.3 Dynamic Spectrum Access 50 3.4 Dynamic Spectrum Leasing 54 3.5 Challenges in DSS Cognitive Radios 55 3.6 Cognitive Radios and Future of Wireless Communications 60 3.7 Summary 61 Part II theoretical foundations 65 4 Introduction to Detection Theory 67 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Optimality Criteria: Bayesian versus Non-Bayesian 71 4.2.1 The Bayesian Approach 72 4.2.2 A Non-Bayesian Approach: Neyman–Pearson Optimality Criterion 73 4.3 Parametric Signal Detection Theory 75 4.3.1 Bayesian Optimal Detection 76 4.3.2 Neyman–Pearson Optimal Detection 82 4.3.3 Another Non-Bayesian Alternative: The Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test 99 4.3.4 Parametric Signal Detection in Additive Noise 103 4.4 Nonparametric Signal Detection Theory 122 4.4.1 Signal Detection in Additive Zero-Median Noise: The Sign Test 124 4.4.2 Signal Detection in Additive Symmetric Noise: The Rank Test 125 4.4.3 Signal Detection in Additive Zero Median, Zero Mean, Finite-Variance Noise: The t-Test 126 4.5 Summary 127 5 Introduction to Estimation Theory 132 5.1 Introduction 132 5.2 Random Parameter Estimation: Bayesian Estimation 134 5.2.1 Minimum Mean-Squared Error Estimation 134 5.2.2 MMSE Estimation of Vector Parameters 135 5.2.3 Linear Minimum Mean-Squared Error Estimation 138 5.2.4 Maximum A Posteriori Probability Estimation 139 5.3 Nonrandom Parameter Estimation 140 5.3.1 Theory of Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimation 142 5.3.2 Best Linear Unbiased Estimator 147 5.3.3 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 152 5.3.4 Performance Bounds: Cramer-Rao Lower Bound 154 5.4 Summary 158 6 Power Spectrum Estimation 164 6.1 Introduction 164 6.2 PSD Estimation of a Stationary Discrete-Time Signal 168 6.2.1 Correlogram Method 168 6.2.2 Periodogram Method 170 6.2.3 Performance of the Periodogram PSD Estimate 172 6.3 Blackman–Tukey Estimator of the Power Spectrum 177 6.4 Other PSD Estimators Based on Modified Periodograms 181 6.4.1 Bartlett PSD Estimator 181 6.4.2 Welch PSD Estimator 183 6.5 PSD Estimation of Nonstationary Discrete-Time Signals 186 6.5.1 Temporally Windowed Observations 188 6.5.2 Temporal and Spectral Smoothing of PSD Estimates of Nonstationary Discrete-Time Signals 189 6.5.3 DFT-Based PSD Computation 191 6.6 Spectral Correlation of Cyclostationary Signals 192 6.6.1 Spectral Correlation and Spectral Autocoherence 196 6.6.2 Time-Averaged Spectral Correlation 197 6.6.3 Estimation of Spectral Correlation 198 6.7 Summary 200 7 Markov Decision Processes 207 7.1 Introduction 207 7.2 Markov Decission Processes 209 7.3 Finite-Horizon MDPs 212 7.3.1 Definitions 212 7.3.2 Optimal Policies for MDPs 216 7.4 Infinite-Horizon MDPs 222 7.4.1 Stationary Optimal Policies for Infinite-Horizon MDPs 224 7.4.2 Bellman-Optimality Equations 227 7.5 Partially Observable Markov Decision Processes 232 7.5.1 Definitions 233 7.5.2 Policy Evaluation for a Finite-Horizon POMDP 238 7.5.3 Optimality Equations for a Finite-Horizon POMDP 241 7.5.4 Optimal Policy Computation for a Finite-Horizon POMDP 242 7.5.5 Infinite-Horizon POMDPs 257 7.6 Summary 259 8 Bayesian Nonparametric Classification 269 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 K-Means Classification Algorithm 274 8.3 X-Means Classification Algorithm 276 8.4 Dirichlet Process Mixture Model 278 8.4.1 Dirichlet Process 278 8.4.2 Construction of the Dirichlet Process 279 8.4.3 DPMM 282 8.5 Bayesian Nonparametric Classification Based on the DPMM and the Gibbs Sampling 283 8.5.1 DPMM-Based Classification of Scalar Observations 287 8.5.2 DPMM-Based Classification of Multidimensional Gaussian Observations 298 8.5.3 DPMM-Based Classification of Possibly Non-Gaussian Multidimensional Observations 308 8.6 Summary 315 Part III signal processing in cognitive radios 321 9 Wideband Spectrum Sensing 323 9.1 Introduction 323 9.2 Wideband Spectrum Sensing Problem 325 9.3 Wideband Spectrum Scanning Problem 326 9.4 Spectrum Segmentation and Subbanding 328 9.5 Wideband Spectrum Sensing Receiver 330 9.5.1 Homodyne Receiver Configuration 332 9.5.2 Super Heterodyne Digital Receiver Configuration 334 9.5.3 A/D Conversion and the Discrete-Time Received Signal Model 335 9.6 Subband Selection Problem in Wideband Spectrum Sensing 336 9.6.1 Subband Dynamics 338 9.6.2 A POMDP Model for Subband Selection 340 9.6.3 An Optimal Subband Selection Policy for Spectrum Sensing 347 9.6.4 A Reduced-Complexity Optimal Sensing Decision-Making Algorithm with Independent Channels 350 9.6.5 A Reduced Complexity Optimal Sensing Decision-Making Algorithm with Independent Subbands 354 9.6.6 Optimal Myopic Sensing Decision Policies 354 9.7 A Reduced Complexity Optimal Subband Selection Framework with an Alternative Reward Function 355 9.7.1 A New Model for Subband Dynamics 357 9.7.2 A Simplified Reward Function and a Reduced-Complexity Optimal Policy 359 9.7.3 A Reduced Complexity Optimal Policy for Independent Subbands 362 9.7.4 Optimal Myopic Policies with Reduced Dimensional Subband State Vectors 363 9.8 Machine-Learning Aided Subband Selection Policies 364 9.8.1 Q-Learning 365 9.8.2 Q-Learning in a POMDP: A Q-Learning Algorithm for Subband Selection 368 9.9 Summary 372 10 Spectral Activity Detection in Wideband Cognitive Radios 377 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Optimal Wideband Spectral Activity Detection 379 10.3 Wideband Spectral Activity Detection 386 10.4 Wavelet Transform-Based Wideband Spectral Activity Detection 392 10.4.1 Wavelet Transform 394 10.4.2 Edge Detection with Wavelet Transform 395 10.4.3 Spectral Activity Detection Based on Edge Detection 397 10.5 Wideband Spectral Activity Detection in Non-Gaussian Noise 398 10.5.1 Arbitrary but Known Noise Distribution 399 10.5.2 Robust Spectral Activity Detection 406 10.6 Wideband Spectral Activity Detection with Compressive Sampling 413 10.6.1 Compressive Sampling 415 10.6.2 Compressive Sensing of Wideband Spectrum 419 10.7 Summary 421 11 Signal Classification in Wideband Cognitive Radios 429 11.1 Introduction 429 11.2 Signal Classification Problem in a Wideband Cognitive Radio 431 11.3 Feature Extraction for Signal Classification 435 11.3.1 Carrier/Center Frequency 435 11.3.2 Cyclostationary Features 436 11.3.3 Modulation Type and Order Features 441 11.4 A Signal Classification Architecture for a Wideband Cognitive Radio 445 11.5 Bayesian Nonparametric Signal Classification 447 11.6 Sequential Bayesian Nonparametric Signal Classification 462 11.7 Summary 469 12 Primary Signal Detection in DSA Cognitive Networks 472 12.1 Introduction 472 12.2 Spectrum Sensing Problem in Dynamic Spectrum Sharing CR Networks 475 12.3 Autonomous Spectrum Sensing for Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 479 12.3.1 Secondary User Sensing Observations 480 12.3.2 Channel-State (Idle/Busy) Decisions 481 12.4 Limitations of Autonomous Spectrum Sensing 489 12.5 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing for Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 492 12.6 Cooperative Channel-State Detection 495 12.6.1 Local Processing and Sensing Reports from Secondary Users 498 12.6.2 Final Channel-State Decisions at the SSDC: Decision Fusion 502 12.7 Summary 516 13 Spectrum Decision-Making in DSA Cognitive Networks 519 13.1 Introduction 519 13.2 Primary Channel Dynamic Model 520 13.3 Sensing Decisions in DSS Networks with Autonomous Cognitive Radios 522 13.3.1 Optimal Sensing Policy Determination 525 13.3.2 Optimal Myopic Sensing Policy Determination 530 13.4 Sensing Decisions in Cooperative DSS Networks 533 13.4.1 Optimal SSDC Decisions for Independent Channel Dynamics 537 13.4.2 Optimal Myopic Sensing Decisions at the SSDC with Independent Channel Dynamics 541 13.5 Summary 550 14 Dynamic Spectrum Leasing in Cognitive Radio Networks 553 14.1 Introduction 553 14.2 DSL with Direct Rewards to Primary Users 555 14.2.1 Interference at the Primary Receiver 560 14.2.2 A Game Model for Dynamic Spectrum Leasing 565 14.2.3 Nash Equilibria in Noncooperative Games 570 14.2.4 Existence of a Nash Equilibrium in the DSL Game 573 14.3 DSL Based on Asymmetric Cooperation with Primary Users 587 14.3.1 A Primary–Secondary Coexistence Model 588 14.3.2 Asymmetric Cooperative Communications-Based DSL between Primary Users and a Centralized Secondary Network 591 14.3.3 Asymmetric Cooperative Communications-Based DSL between Primary Users and Autonomous Cognitive Secondary Users 604 14.4 Summary 609 15 Cooperative Cognitive Communications 613 15.1 Introduction 613 15.2 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing 619 15.3 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing and Channel-Access Decisions 621 15.4 Cooperative Communications Strategies in Cognitive Radio Networks 624 15.5 Asymmetric Cooperative Relaying in DSA Cognitive Radios 627 15.5.1 Secondary User Optimal Power Allocation for Asymmetric Cooperative Relaying 629 15.5.2 Centralized Assignment of Cognitive Radios for Cooperation with Primary Users: An Ideal Approach 635 15.5.3 Centralized Assignment of Cognitive Radios for Cooperation with Primary Users: A Realistic Approach 640 15.6 Summary 644 16 Machine Learning in Cognitive Radios 647 16.1 Introduction 647 16.2 Artificial Neural Networks 650 16.2.1 Learning Algorithms for LTUs 651 16.2.2 Layered Neural Networks 655 16.2.3 Learning in Layered Feed-Forward Networks: Back-Propagation Algorithm 656 16.2.4 Neural Networks in Cognitive Radios 662 16.3 Support Vector Machines 664 16.3.1 Statistical Learning Theory 665 16.3.2 Structural Risk Minimization with Support Vector Machines 669 16.3.3 Linear Support Vector Machines 670 16.3.4 Nonlinear Support Vector Machines 674 16.3.5 Kernel Function Implementation of Support Vector Machines 677 16.3.6 SVMs in Cognitive Radios 679 16.4 Reinforcement Learning 681 16.4.1 Temporal Difference Learning 683 16.4.2 Q-Learning in a POMDP: Replicated Q-Learning 684 16.4.3 Reinforcement Learning in Cognitive Radios 686 16.5 Multiagent Learning 688 16.5.1 Game-Theoretic Multiagent Learning 691 16.5.2 Cooperative Multiagent Learning 694 16.5.3 Multiagent Learning in Cognitive Radio Networks 696 16.6 Summary 698 Appendix A Nyquist Sampling Theorem 704 Appendix B A Collection of Useful Probability Distributions 711 B.1 Univariate Distributions 711 B.2 Multivariate Distributions 713 Appendix C Conjugate Priors 716 References 721 Index 740

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe aim of the book is to educate government agencies, operators, vendors and other regulatory institutions how LTE can be deployed to serve public safety market and offer regulatory / public safety features.Table of ContentsForeword xi About the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Introduction xix Terminology xxi 1 Introduction to LTE/SAE 1 1.1 Role of 3GPP 1 1.2 History of LTE 3 1.3 Drivers for LTE 5 1.4 EPS compared to GPRS and UMTS 6 1.5 Spectrum Considerations 7 1.6 Network Architecture 9 1.6.1 Radio Access Network and Core Network 9 1.6.2 Architecture Principles 9 1.6.3 Non-roaming Architecture 10 1.6.4 Roaming Architectures 11 1.6.5 Description of Functional Entities 12 1.6.6 Session Management 17 1.6.7 Policy and Charging Control 19 1.6.8 Interfaces and Protocols in EPS 21 1.6.9 Mobility Management 26 1.6.10 Intra E-UTRAN Handover 30 1.6.11 Security 31 1.6.12 Charging 34 1.7 IP Multimedia Subsystem 38 1.7.1 Summary of Reference Points and Protocols 40 1.8 Voice and SMS in LTE 41 1.8.1 Voice 41 1.8.2 Short Message Service 42 1.9 Interworking with 2G/3G Networks 43 1.9.1 Overview 43 1.9.2 Interworking with Legacy Networks 43 1.9.3 Functional Description 43 1.10 Interworking with Non-3GPP Access Networks 44 1.10.1 Summary of Reference Points and Protocols 47 1.11 Network Sharing 48 1.11.1 UE-Based Network Selection 49 1.11.2 RAN-Based Network Selection 49 1.12 Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service 50 1.12.1 Principles 50 1.12.2 Description of Functional Entities 51 1.12.3 MBMS Enhancements 52 1.12.4 MBSFN and MBMS Radio Channels 53 1.13 Terms and Definitions 54 1.13.1 Roaming 54 1.13.2 Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched Networks 55 1.13.3 Access Stratum and Non-Access Stratum 55 References 56 2 Regulatory Features 59 2.1 Emergency Calls 59 2.1.1 Overview 59 2.1.2 Requirements 59 2.1.3 Emergency Call Architecture 60 2.1.4 PSAP Callback 68 2.1.5 Emergency Numbers 68 2.1.6 Non Voice Emergency Services 69 2.1.7 Automated Emergency Calls 69 2.2 Public Warning System 71 2.3 Lawful Interception 72 2.3.1 Principles 72 2.3.2 Lawful Interception for EPS 74 2.4 Enhanced Multimedia Priority Services 74 References 76 3 LTE for Public Safety Networks 77 3.1 Why LTE for Public Safety Networks? 77 3.2 What are Public Safety Networks? 78 3.3 LTE meets Demands of Public Safety Networks 79 3.4 Wide Range of LTE Devices for Public Safety 80 3.5 Standalone versus Shared Deployments 81 3.6 Interworking 83 3.6.1 Device Aspects 83 3.6.2 Network Aspects 83 References 83 4 Proximity Services 85 4.1 Introduction to Proximity Services 85 4.1.1 Proximity Services Overview 85 4.1.2 ProSe Communication 86 4.1.3 ProSe Discovery 88 4.1.4 ProSe for Public Safety 88 4.2 Proximity Services Architectures 90 4.2.1 Non-roaming Architecture 90 4.2.2 Inter-PLMN Architecture 91 4.2.3 Roaming Architecture 91 4.2.4 Description of Functional Entities 93 4.2.5 Interfaces and Protocols 97 4.3 Synchronization 104 4.3.1 LTE Primary and Secondary Synchronization Signals 106 4.3.2 LTE D2D Synchronization 107 4.4 Service Authorization 108 4.5 ProSe Direct Discovery 109 4.5.1 ProSe Direct Discovery Models 110 4.5.2 ProSe Direct Discovery Modes 110 4.5.3 Direct Discovery Procedure for Model A 111 4.5.4 Radio Aspects and Physical Layer Design 112 4.5.5 Radio Resource Allocation for Direct Discovery 112 4.5.6 Inter-frequency ProSe Discovery 113 4.5.7 Announce Procedure (non-roaming) 114 4.5.8 Announce Procedure (roaming) 115 4.5.9 Monitor Procedure (non-roaming) 117 4.5.10 Monitor Procedure (roaming) 118 4.5.11 Match Procedure (non-roaming) 120 4.5.12 Match Procedure (roaming) 121 4.5.13 Direct Discovery Procedure for Model B 123 4.6 ProSe Direct Communication 123 4.6.1 Radio Aspects and Physical Layer Design 124 4.6.2 Radio Resource Allocation for Direct Communication 125 4.6.3 Inter-frequency ProSe Communication 127 4.6.4 IP Address Allocation 128 4.6.5 One-to-Many Communication (Transmission) 128 4.6.6 One-to-Many Communication (Reception) 130 4.6.7 Direct Communication via ProSe Relay 130 4.7 EPC-Level ProSe Discovery 131 4.7.1 EPC-Level ProSe Discovery Procedure 132 4.7.2 User Equipment Registration 133 4.7.3 Application Registration 134 4.8 Other Essential Functions for Proximity Services 135 4.8.1 Provisioning 135 4.8.2 Subscription Data 136 4.8.3 Security 136 4.8.4 Charging 138 4.8.5 ProSe-Related Identifiers 140 4.8.6 Illustration for Match Event 144 4.9 Deployment Scenarios 146 4.9.1 ProSe Direct Discovery 146 4.9.2 ProSe Direct Communication 147 4.10 Public Safety Use Cases 147 4.10.1 Use Cases for ProSe Communication 148 4.10.2 Use Cases for Network to UE Relay 149 4.10.3 Performance Characteristics 149 4.11 Outlook to Enhanced Proximity Services 150 4.12 Terms and Definitions 151 4.12.1 Home PLMN 151 4.12.2 Equivalent Home PLMN 151 4.12.3 Visited PLMN 151 4.12.4 Registered (Serving) PLMN 152 4.12.5 Local PLMN 152 4.12.6 Hybrid Adaptive Repeat and Request 152 4.12.7 Radio Link Control 152 4.12.8 Logical Channel Prioritization 153 4.12.9 System Information 153 4.12.10 OFDM Symbol 154 4.12.11 Dual-Rx UE 154 References 154 5 Group Communication Over LTE 157 5.1 Introduction to Group Communication Services 157 5.2 Group Communication System Enablers for LTE 158 5.3 Principles of Group Communication over LTE 159 5.4 Functional Entities 162 5.4.1 User Equipment 162 5.4.2 GCS AS 162 5.4.3 BM-SC 163 5.4.4 eNB, MME, S-GW, P-GW, PCRF 163 5.5 Interfaces and Protocols 163 5.5.1 MB2 Interface 163 5.5.2 Rx and SGi Interfaces 167 5.6 GCSE Functions 169 5.6.1 Unicast Delivery 169 5.6.2 MBMS Delivery 171 5.6.3 Service Continuity 172 5.6.4 Priority and Preemption 173 5.6.5 MBMS Delivery Status Notification 175 5.7 Establishment of MBMS Delivery 175 5.7.1 Pre-establishment 175 5.7.2 Dynamic Establishment 176 5.8 MBMS Delivery Procedures 179 5.8.1 MBMS Delivery Modification 179 5.8.2 MBMS Delivery Deactivation 181 5.8.3 TMGI Management 182 5.9 Access Control 183 5.10 Mission Critical Push To Talk 185 5.10.1 MCPTT Service Description 186 5.10.2 MCPTT Call Types 187 5.10.3 MCPTT Priorities 187 5.10.4 Shareable MCPTT Devices 188 5.10.5 On and Off Network Mode of Operation 188 5.10.6 Interworking with legacy PTT Systems 189 References 189 6 Summary and Outlook 191 6.1 Role of LTE 191 6.2 Public Safety Features 192 6.3 LTE for Public Safety 193 6.4 Outlook 196 References 196 Appendix A 197 A.1 Call Flows 197 A.1.1 Attach 197 A.1.2 Detach 200 A.1.3 Tracking Area Update 201 A.1.4 Paging 202 A.1.5 Service Request 203 A.1.6 X2-Based Handover 205 A.1.7 S1-Based Handover 206 A.1.8 MBMS Session Start 210 A.1.9 MBMS Session Stop 212 A.1.10 MBMS Session Update 213 A.1.11 UE-requested PDN Connectivity 214 A.1.12 Dedicated Bearer Context Activation 216 A.2 3GPP Reference Points 217 References 221 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisTechnical ideas may be solid or even groundbreaking, but if these ideas cannot be clearly communicated, reviewers of technical documents are likely to reject the argument for advancing these ideas. This book presents a scientific approach to writing that mirrors the sensibilities of scientists and engineers.Table of ContentsA Note from the Series Editor, xiii Acknowledgments, xv Foreword, xvii Preface, xxi 1 Introduction to the Approach 1 PART I Sentences 9 2 Qualifiers Used in Sentences 11 3 Subordinate Clauses Used as Qualifiers 21 4 Explanatory Phrases, Participle Phrases, and Major Prepositional Phrases 31 5 Infinitive Phrases, and the General Rule for Punctuating Qualifiers 45 6 Sentences with Two Qualifiers 55 7 Higher Orders of Punctuation 69 8 Strategies to Improve Sentences with Qualifiers 77 PART II Lists 89 9 Two-Item Lists 91 10 Multiple-Item Lists 103 11 Strategies for Writing Better Lists 111 PART III Word Choice and Placement 119 12 Adjectives and Adverbs 121 13 Precision in Word Usage 135 PART IV Beyond Sentences 149 14 Paragraphs 151 15 Arguments 163 16 Justification of Arguments 173 17 Organization and Presentation 181 References, 193 About the Author, 207 Index, 209

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Table xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Acronyms xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 State of a Dynamic System 1 1.2 State Estimation 1 1.3 Construals of Computing 2 1.4 Statistical Modeling 3 1.5 Vision for the Book 4 2 Observability 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 State-Space Model 7 2.3 The Concept of Observability 9 2.4 Observability of Linear Time-Invariant Systems 10 2.4.1 Continuous-Time LTI Systems 10 2.4.2 Discrete-Time LTI Systems 12 2.4.3 Discretization of LTI Systems 14 2.5 Observability of Linear Time-Varying Systems 14 2.5.1 Continuous-Time LTV Systems 14 2.5.2 Discrete-Time LTV Systems 16 2.5.3 Discretization of LTV Systems 17 2.6 Observability of Nonlinear Systems 17 2.6.1 Continuous-Time Nonlinear Systems 18 2.6.2 Discrete-Time Nonlinear Systems 21 2.6.3 Discretization of Nonlinear Systems 22 2.7 Observability of Stochastic Systems 23 2.8 Degree of Observability 25 2.9 Invertibility 26 2.10 Concluding Remarks 27 3 Observers 29 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Luenberger Observer 30 3.3 Extended Luenberger-Type Observer 31 3.4 Sliding-Mode Observer 33 3.5 Unknown-Input Observer 35 3.6 Concluding Remarks 39 4 Bayesian Paradigm and Optimal Nonlinear Filtering 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Bayes’ Rule 42 4.3 Optimal Nonlinear Filtering 42 4.4 Fisher Information 45 4.5 Posterior Cramér–Rao Lower Bound 46 4.6 Concluding Remarks 47 5 Kalman Filter 49 5.1 Introduction 49 5.2 Kalman Filter 50 5.3 Kalman Smoother 53 5.4 Information Filter 54 5.5 Extended Kalman Filter 54 5.6 Extended Information Filter 54 5.7 Divided-Difference Filter 54 5.8 Unscented Kalman Filter 60 5.9 Cubature Kalman Filter 60 5.10 Generalized PID Filter 64 5.11 Gaussian-Sum Filter 65 5.12 Applications 67 5.12.1 Information Fusion 67 5.12.2 Augmented Reality 67 5.12.3 Urban Traffic Network 67 5.12.4 Cybersecurity of Power Systems 67 5.12.5 Incidence of Influenza 68 5.12.6 COVID-19 Pandemic 68 5.13 Concluding Remarks 70 6 Particle Filter 71 6.1 Introduction 71 6.2 Monte Carlo Method 72 6.3 Importance Sampling 72 6.4 Sequential Importance Sampling 73 6.5 Resampling 75 6.6 Sample Impoverishment 76 6.7 Choosing the Proposal Distribution 77 6.8 Generic Particle Filter 78 6.9 Applications 81 6.9.1 Simultaneous Localization and Mapping 81 6.10 Concluding Remarks 82 7 Smooth Variable-Structure Filter 85 7.1 Introduction 85 7.2 The Switching Gain 86 7.3 Stability Analysis 90 7.4 Smoothing Subspace 93 7.5 Filter Corrective Term for Linear Systems 96 7.6 Filter Corrective Term for Nonlinear Systems 102 7.7 Bias Compensation 105 7.8 The Secondary Performance Indicator 107 7.9 Second-Order Smooth Variable Structure Filter 108 7.10 Optimal Smoothing Boundary Design 108 7.11 Combination of SVSF with Other Filters 110 7.12 Applications 110 7.12.1 Multiple Target Tracking 111 7.12.2 Battery State-of-Charge Estimation 111 7.12.3 Robotics 111 7.13 Concluding Remarks 111 8 Deep Learning 113 8.1 Introduction 113 8.2 Gradient Descent 114 8.3 Stochastic Gradient Descent 115 8.4 Natural Gradient Descent 119 8.5 Neural Networks 120 8.6 Backpropagation 122 8.7 Backpropagation Through Time 122 8.8 Regularization 122 8.9 Initialization 125 8.10 Convolutional Neural Network 125 8.11 Long Short-Term Memory 127 8.12 Hebbian Learning 129 8.13 Gibbs Sampling 131 8.14 Boltzmann Machine 131 8.15 Autoencoder 135 8.16 Generative Adversarial Network 136 8.17 Transformer 137 8.18 Concluding Remarks 139 9 Deep Learning-Based Filters 141 9.1 Introduction 141 9.2 Variational Inference 142 9.3 Amortized Variational Inference 144 9.4 Deep Kalman Filter 144 9.5 Backpropagation Kalman Filter 146 9.6 Differentiable Particle Filter 148 9.7 Deep Rao–Blackwellized Particle Filter 152 9.8 Deep Variational Bayes Filter 158 9.9 Kalman Variational Autoencoder 167 9.10 Deep Variational Information Bottleneck 172 9.11 Wasserstein Distributionally Robust Kalman Filter 176 9.12 Hierarchical Invertible Neural Transport 178 9.13 Applications 182 9.13.1 Prediction of Drug Effect 182 9.13.2 Autonomous Driving 183 9.14 Concluding Remarks 183 10 Expectation Maximization 185 10.1 Introduction 185 10.2 Expectation Maximization Algorithm 185 10.3 Particle Expectation Maximization 188 10.4 Expectation Maximization for Gaussian Mixture Models 190 10.5 Neural Expectation Maximization 191 10.6 Relational Neural Expectation Maximization 194 10.7 Variational Filtering Expectation Maximization 196 10.8 Amortized Variational Filtering Expectation Maximization 198 10.9 Applications 199 10.9.1 Stochastic Volatility 199 10.9.2 Physical Reasoning 200 10.9.3 Speech, Music, and Video Modeling 200 10.10 Concluding Remarks 201 11 Reinforcement Learning-Based Filter 203 11.1 Introduction 203 11.2 Reinforcement Learning 204 11.3 Variational Inference as Reinforcement Learning 207 11.4 Application 210 11.4.1 Battery State-of-Charge Estimation 210 11.5 Concluding Remarks 210 12 Nonparametric Bayesian Models 213 12.1 Introduction 213 12.2 Parametric vs Nonparametric Models 213 12.3 Measure-Theoretic Probability 214 12.4 Exchangeability 219 12.5 Kolmogorov Extension Theorem 221 12.6 Extension of Bayesian Models 223 12.7 Conjugacy 224 12.8 Construction of Nonparametric Bayesian Models 226 12.9 Posterior Computability 227 12.10 Algorithmic Sufficiency 228 12.11 Applications 232 12.11.1 Multiple Object Tracking 233 12.11.2 Data-Driven Probabilistic Optimal Power Flow 233 12.11.3 Analyzing Single-Molecule Tracks 233 12.12 Concluding Remarks 233 References 235 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisUses real world case studies to present the key technologies of design and application of the synchronous generator excitation system This book systematically introduces the important technologies of design and application of the synchronous generator excitation system, including the three-phase bridge rectifier circuit, diode rectifier for separate excitation, brushless excitation system and the static self-stimulation excitation system. It fuses discussions on specific topics and basic theories, providing a detailed description of the theories essential for synchronous generators in the analysis of excitation systems. Design and Application of Modern Synchronous Generator Excitation Systemsprovides a cutting-edge examination of excitation system, addressing conventional hydro-turbines, pumped storage units, steam turbines, and nuclear power units. It looks at the features and performance of the excitation system of the 700MW hydro-turbine deployed at the Three Gorges Hydropower PlTable of ContentsAbout the Author xxi Foreword xxiii Preface xxvii Introduction xxix Acknowledgement xxxi 1 Evolution and Development of Excitation Control 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Evolution of Excitation Control 1 1.3 Linear Multivariable Total Controller 11 1.4 Nonlinear Multivariable Excitation Controller 20 1.5 Power System Voltage Regulator (PSVR) 25 2 Characteristics of Synchronous Generator 35 2.1 Electromotive Force Phasor Diagram of Synchronous Generator 35 2.2 Electromagnetic Power and Power Angle Characteristic of Synchronous Generator 38 2.3 Operating Capacity Characteristic Curve of Synchronous Generator 41 2.4 Influence of External Reactance on Operating Capacity Characteristic Curve 45 2.5 Operating Characteristic Curves of Generator 50 2.6 Transient Characteristics of Synchronous Generator 54 3 Effect of Excitation Regulation on Power System Stability 67 3.1 Definition and Classification of Power System Stability 67 3.2 Criterion of Stability Level 68 3.3 Effects of Excitation Regulation on Power System Stability 68 4 Static and Transient State Characteristics of Excitation Systems 77 4.1 Static Characteristics of Excitation System 77 4.2 Ratio and Coefficient of Generator Voltage to Reactive Current of Generator 81 4.3 Transient State Characteristics of Excitation System 87 4.4 Stability Analysis of Excitation System 94 5 Control Law and Mathematical Model of Excitation System 97 5.1 Basic Control Law of Excitation System 97 5.2 Mathematical Model of the Excitation System 108 5.3 Mathematical Model of Excitation Control Unit 118 5.4 Parameter Setting of Excitation System 124 6 Basic Characteristics of Three-Phase Bridge Rectifier Circuit 137 6.1 Overview 137 6.2 Operating Principle of Three-Phase Bridge Rectifier 137 6.3 Type I Commutation State 139 6.4 Commutation Angle 144 6.5 Average Rectified Voltage 144 6.6 Instantaneous Rectified Voltage Value 147 6.7 Effective Element Current Value 147 6.8 Fundamental Wave and Harmonic Value for Alternating Current 152 6.9 Power Factor of Rectifying Device 156 6.10 Type III Commutation State 161 6.11 Type II Commutation State 167 6.12 External Characteristic Curve for Rectifier 168 6.13 Operating Principle of Three-Phase Bridge Inverter Circuit 170 7 Excitation System for Separately Excited Static Diode Rectifier 175 7.1 Harmonic Analysis for Alternating Current 175 7.2 Non-distortion Sinusoidal Potential and Equivalent Commutating Reactance 177 7.3 Expression for Commutation Angle γ, Load Resistance rf, and Commutating Reactance Xγ 182 7.4 Rectified Voltage Ratio 𝛽u and Rectified Current Ratio 𝛽i 184 7.5 Steady-State Calculations for AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 186 7.6 General External Characteristics of Exciter 189 7.7 Transient State Process of AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 191 7.8 Simplified Transient Mathematical Model of AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 193 7.9 Transient State Process of Excitation System in Case of Small Deviation Change in Generator Excitation Current 196 7.10 Influence of Diode Rectifier on Time Constant of Generator Excitation Loop 200 7.11 Excitation Voltage Response for AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 201 7.12 Short-Circuit Current Calculations for AC Exciter 205 7.13 Calculations for AC Rated Parameters and Forced Excitation Parameters 211 8 Brushless Excitation System 215 8.1 Evolution of Brushless Excitation System 215 8.2 Technical Specifications for Brushless Excitation System 219 8.3 Composition of Brushless Excitation System 221 8.4 Voltage Response Characteristics of AC Exciter 224 8.5 Control Characteristics of Brushless Excitation System 227 8.6 Mathematical Models for Brushless Excitation System 232 8.7 AC2 Model 243 8.8 Generator Excitation Parameter Detection and Fault Alarm 246 9 Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 255 9.1 Overview 255 9.2 Characteristics of Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 255 9.3 Influence of Harmonic Current Load on Electromagnetic Characteristics of Auxiliary Generator 260 9.4 Parameterization of Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 268 9.5 Separately Excited SCR Excitation System with High-/Low-Voltage Bridge Rectifier 272 9.6 Parameterization of High-/Low-Voltage Bridge Rectifier 276 9.7 Transient Process of Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 281 10 Static Self-Excitation System 285 10.1 Overview 285 10.2 Characteristics of Static Self-Excitation System 288 10.3 Shaft Voltage of Static Self-Excitation System 307 10.4 Coordination between Low Excitation Restriction and Loss-of-Excitation Protection 311 10.5 Electric Braking of Steam Turbine 321 10.6 Electric Braking Application Example at Pumped-Storage Power Station 326 11 Automatic Excitation Regulator 329 11.1 Overview 329 11.2 Theoretical Basis of Digital Control 330 11.3 Digital Sampling and Signal Conversion 337 11.4 Control Operation 340 11.5 Per-Unit Value Setting 345 11.6 Digital Phase Shift Trigger 346 11.7 External Characteristics of Three-Phase Fully Controlled Bridge Rectifier Circuit 348 11.8 Characteristics of Digital Excitation Systems 351 12 Excitation Transformer 365 12.1 Overview 365 12.2 Structural Characteristics of Resin Cast Dry-Type Excitation Transformer 367 12.3 Application Characteristics of Resin Cast Dry-Type Excitation Transformer 369 12.4 Specification for Resin Cast Dry-Type Excitation Transformer 369 12.5 Harmonic Current Analysis 389 13 Power Rectifier 395 13.1 Specification and Essential Parameters for Thyristor Rectifier Elements 395 13.2 Parameterization of Power Rectifier 400 13.3 Cooling of Large-Capacity Power Rectifier 407 13.4 Current Sharing of Power Rectifier 413 13.5 Protection of Power Rectifier 416 13.6 Thyristor Damage and Failure 429 13.7 Capacity of Power Rectifiers Operating in Parallel 433 13.8 Uncertainty of Parallel Operation of Double-Bridge Power Rectifiers 437 13.9 Five-Pole Disconnector of Power Rectifier 439 14 De-excitation and Rotor Overvoltage Protection of Synchronous Generator 441 14.1 Overview 441 14.2 Evaluation of Performance of De-excitation System 443 14.3 De-excitation System Classification 447 14.4 Influence of Saturation on De-excitation 463 14.5 Influence of Damping Winding Circuit on De-excitation 465 14.6 Field Circuit Breaker 467 14.7 Performance Characteristics of Nonlinear De-excitation Resistor 477 15 Excitation System Performance Characteristics of Hydropower Generator Set 485 15.1 Overview 485 15.2 Static Self-Excitation System of Xiangjiaba Hydro Power Station 485 16 Functional Characteristics of Excitation Control and Starting System of Reversible Pumped Storage Unit 521 16.1 Overview 521 16.2 Operation Mode and Excitation Control of Pumped Storage Unit 521 16.3 Application Example of Excitation System of Pumped Storage Unit 525 16.4 Working Principle of SFC 542 16.5 SFC Current and Speed Dual Closed-Loop Control System 560 16.6 Influence of SFC Start Current Harmonic Components on Power Station and Power System 562 16.7 Local Control Unit (LCU) Control Procedure for Pumped Storage Unit 566 16.8 Pumped Storage Unit Operating as Synchronous Condenser 568 16.9 De-excitation System of Pumped Storage Unit 569 16.10 Electric Braking of Pumped Storage Unit 572 16.11 Shaft Current Protection of Pumped Storage Unit 574 16.12 Application Characteristics of PSS of Pumped Storage Unit 577 17 Performance Characteristics of Excitation System of 1000 MW Turbine Generator Unit 579 17.1 Introduction of Excitation System of Turbine Generator of Malaysian Manjung 4 Thermal Power Station 579 17.2 Key Parameters of Turbine Generator Unit and Excitation System 581 17.3 Parameter Calculation of Main Components of Excitation System 585 17.4 Block Diagram of Automatically Regulated Excitation System 592 18 Performance Characteristics of 1000 MW Nuclear Power Steam Turbine Excitation System 601 18.1 Performance Characteristics of Steam Turbine Generator Brushless Excitation System of Fuqing Nuclear Power Station 601 18.2 Structural Characteristics of Brushless Excitation System 608 18.3 Analysis of Working State of Multi-Phase Brushless Exciter 612 18.4 Calculation of Excitation System Parameters of Fuqing Nuclear Power Station 618 18.5 Static Excitation System of Sanmen Nuclear Power Station 624 References 639 Index 643

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis second edition of the highly acclaimed RF Power Amplifiers has been thoroughly revised and expanded to reflect the latest challenges associated with power transmitters used in communications systems. With more rigorous treatment of many concepts, the new edition includes a unique combination of class-tested analysis and industry-proven design techniques. Radio frequency (RF) power amplifiers are the fundamental building blocks used in a vast variety of wireless communication circuits, radio and TV broadcasting transmitters, radars, wireless energy transfer, and industrial processes. Through a combination of theory and practice, RF Power Amplifiers, Second Edition provides a solid understanding of the key concepts, the principle of operation, synthesis, analysis, and design of RF power amplifiers. This extensive update boasts: up to date end of chapter summaries; review questions and problems; an expansion on key concepts; new examples related to real-world Table of ContentsPreface xvi About the Author xix List of Symbols xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Radio Transmitters 1 1.2 Batteries for Portable Electronics 2 1.3 Block Diagram of RF Power Amplifiers 3 1.4 Classes of Operation of RF Power Amplifiers 6 1.5 Waveforms of RF Power Amplifiers 8 1.6 Parameters of RF Power Amplifiers 9 1.7 Transmitter Noise 15 1.8 Conditions for 100% Efficiency of Power Amplifiers 16 1.9 Conditions for Nonzero Output Power at 100% Efficiency of Power Amplifiers 20 1.10 Output Power of Class E ZVS Amplifiers 23 1.11 Class E ZCS Amplifiers 26 1.12 Antennas 28 1.13 Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves 31 1.14 Frequency Spectrum 33 1.15 Duplexing 35 1.16 Multiple-Access Techniques 36 1.17 Nonlinear Distortion in Transmitters 38 1.18 Harmonics of Carrier Frequency 39 1.19 Intermodulation Distortion 42 1.20 AM/AM Compression and AM/PM Conversion 48 1.21 Dynamic Range of Power Amplifiers 48 1.22 Analog Modulation 50 1.23 Digital Modulation 70 1.24 Radars 73 1.25 Radio-Frequency Identification 75 1.26 Summary 76 1.27 References 79 1.28 Review Questions 81 1.29 Problems 83 2 Class A RF Power Amplifier 85 2.1 Introduction 85 2.2 Power MOSFET Characteristics 85 2.3 Short-Channel Effects 91 2.4 Circuit of Class A RF Power Amplifier 102 2.5 Waveforms in Class A RF Amplifier 105 2.6 Energy Parameters of Class A RF Power Amplifier 115 2.7 Parallel-Resonant Circuit 126 2.8 Power Losses and Efficiency of Parallel Resonant Circuit 129 2.9 Class A RF Power Amplifier with Current Mirror 132 2.10 Impedance Matching Circuits 138 2.11 Class A RF Linear Amplifier 142 2.12 Summary 146 2.13 References 148 2.14 Review Questions 149 2.15 Problems 150 3 Class AB, B, and C RF Power Amplifiers 153 3.1 Introduction 153 3.2 Class B RF Power Amplifier 153 3.3 Class AB and C RF Power Amplifiers 172 3.4 Push-Pull Complementary Class AB, B, and C RF Power Amplifiers 190 3.5 Transformer-Coupled Class B Push-Pull RF Power Amplifier 199 3.6 Class AB, B, and C RF Power Amplifiers with Variable-Envelope Signals 205 3.7 Summary 208 3.8 References 210 3.9 Review Questions 211 3.10 Problems 212 4 Class D RF Power Amplifiers 213 4.1 Introduction 213 4.2 MOSFET as a Switch 214 4.3 Circuit Description of Class D RF Power Amplifier 216 4.4 Principle of Operation of Class D RF Power Amplifier 220 4.5 Topologies of Class D Voltage-Source RF Power Amplifiers 228 4.6 Analysis 230 4.7 Bandwidth of Class D RF Power Amplifier 240 4.8 Operation of Class D RF Power Amplifier at Resonance 243 4.9 Class D RF Power Amplifier with Amplitude Modulation 250 4.10 Operation of Class D RF Power Amplifier Outside Resonance 252 4.11 Efficiency of Half-Bridge Class D Power Amplifier 260 4.12 Design Example 269 4.13 Transformer-Coupled Push-Pull Class D Voltage-Switching RF Power Amplifier 272 4.14 Class D Full-Bridge RF Power Amplifier 278 4.15 Phase Control of Full-Bridge Class D Power Amplifier 284 4.16 Class D Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 287 4.17 Transformer-Coupled Push-pull Class D Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 292 4.18 Bridge Class D Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 300 4.19 Summary 305 4.20 References 307 4.21 Review Questions 309 4.22 Problems 310 5 Class E Zero-Voltage-Switching RF Power Amplifiers 313 5.1 Introduction 313 5.2 Circuit Description 314 5.3 Circuit Operation 316 5.4 ZVS and ZDS Operation of Class E Amplifier 319 5.5 Suboptimum Operation 320 5.6 Analysis 321 5.7 Drain Efficiency of Ideal Class E Amplifier 329 5.8 RF Choke Inductance 329 5.9 Maximum Operating Frequency of Class-E Amplifier 330 5.10 Summary of Parameters at D = 0.5 331 5.11 Efficiency 332 5.12 Design of Basic Class E Amplifier 336 5.13 Impedance Matching Resonant Circuits 340 5.14 Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier with Only Nonlinear Shunt Capacitance360 5.15 Push-Pull Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier 365 5.16 Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier with Finite DC-Feed Inductance 367 5.17 Class E ZVS Amplifier with Parallel-Series Resonant Circuit 371 5.18 Class E ZVS Amplifier with Nonsinusoidal Output Voltage 374 5.19 Class E ZVS Power Amplifier with Parallel Resonant Circuit 380 5.20 Amplitude Modulation of Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier 386 5.21 Summary 389 5.22 References 390 5.23 Review Questions 400 5.24 Problems 401 6 Class E Zero-Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 403 6.1 Introduction 403 6.2 Circuit Description 403 6.3 Principle of Operation 404 6.4 Analysis 408 6.5 Power Relationships 413 6.6 Element Values of Load Network 413 6.7 Design Example 414 6.8 Summary 416 6.9 References 416 6.10 Review Questions 417 6.11 Problems 418 7 Class DE RF Power Amplifier 419 7.1 Introduction 419 7.2 Analysis of Class DE RF Power Amplifier 419 7.3 Components 427 7.4 Device Stresses 431 7.5 Design Equations 431 7.6 Maximum Operating Frequency 431 7.7 Class DE Amplifier with Only One Shunt Capacitor 433 7.8 Output Power 438 7.9 Cancellation of Nonlinearities of Transistor Output Capacitances 438 7.10 Amplitude Modulation of Class DE RF Power Amplifier 439 7.11 Summary 439 7.12 References 440 7.13 Review Questions 442 7.14 Problems 443 8 Class F RF Power Amplifiers 445 8.1 Introduction 445 8.2 Class F RF Power Amplifier with Third Harmonic 449 8.3 Class F35 RF Power Amplifier with Third and Fifth Harmonics 471 8.4 Class F357 RF Power Amplifier with Third, Fifth, and Seventh Harmonics 483 8.5 Class FT RF Power Amplifier with Parallel-Resonant Circuit and Quarter-Wavelength Transmission Line 484 8.6 Class F2 RF Power Amplifier with Second Harmonic 492 8.7 Class F24 RF Power Amplifier with Second and Fourth Harmonics 508 8.8 Class F246 RF Power Amplifier with Second, Fourth, and Sixth Harmonics 519 8.9 Class FK RF Power Amplifier with Series-Resonant Circuit and Quarter-Wavelength Transmission Line 520 8.10 Summary 526 8.11 References 527 8.12 Review Questions 529 8.13 Problems 9 Linearization and Efficiency Improvements of RF Power Amplifiers 533 9.1 Introduction 533 9.2 Predistortion 535 9.3 Feedforward Linearization Technique 537 9.4 Negative Feedback Linearization Technique 540 9.5 Envelope Elimination and Restoration 545 9.6 Envelope Tracking 547 9.7 The Doherty Amplifier 550 9.8 Outphasing Power Amplifier 557 9.9 Summary 561 9.10 References 562 9.11 Review Questions 571 9.12 Problems 572 10 Integrated Inductors 573 10.1 Introduction 573 10.2 Skin Effect 574 10.3 Resistance of Rectangular Trace 576 10.4 Inductance of Straight Rectangular Trace 579 10.5 Meander Inductors 581 10.6 Inductance of Straight Round Conductor 585 10.7 Inductance of Circular Round Wire Loop 588 10.8 Inductance of Two-Parallel Wire Loop 588 10.9 Inductance of Rectangle of Round Wire 589 10.10 Inductance of Polygon Round Wire Loop 589 10.11 Bondwire Inductors 590 10.12 Single-Turn Planar Inductor 592 10.13 Inductance of Planar Square Loop 595 10.14 Planar Spiral Inductors 595 10.15 Multi-Metal Spiral Inductors 613 10.16 Planar Transformers 614 10.17 MEMS Inductors 616 10.18 Inductance of Coaxial Cable 618 10.19 Inductance ofTwo-Wire Transmission Line 618 10.20 Eddy Currents in Integrated Inductors 618 10.21 Model of RF Integrated Inductors 620 10.22 PCB Inductors 622 10.23 Summary 625 10.24 References 626 10.25 Review Questions 632 10.26 Problems 633 11 RF Power Amplifiers with Dynamic Power Supply 635 11.1 Introduction 635 11.2 Dynamic Power Supply 635 11.3 Amplitude Modulator 636 11.4 DC Analysis of PWM Buck Converter Operating in CCM 637 11.5 Synchronous Buck Converter as Amplitude Modulator 679 11.6 Multiphase Buck Converter 686 11.7 Layout 688 11.8 Summary 690 11.9 References 693 11.10 Review Questions 699 11.11 Problems 700 12 Oscillators 701 12.1 Introduction 701 12.2 Classification of Oscillators 702 12.3 General Conditions for Oscillations 703 12.4 Topologies of LC Oscillators with Inverting Amplifier 718 12.5 Op-Amp Colpitts Oscillator 722 12.6 Single-Transistor Colpitts Oscillator 724 12.7 Common-Source Colpitts Oscillator 726 12.8 Common-Gate Colpitts Oscillator 737 12.9 Common-Drain Colpitts Oscillator 751 12.10 Clapp Oscillator 761 12.11 Crystal Oscillators 763 12.12 CMOS Oscillator 770 12.13 Hartley Oscillator 771 12.14 Armstrong Oscillator 774 12.15 LC Oscillators with Noninverting Amplifier 777 12.16 Cross-Coupled LC Oscillators 783 12.17 Wien-Bridge RC Oscillator 790 12.18 Oscillators with Negative Resistance 796 12.19 Voltage-Controlled Oscillators 801 12.20 Noise in Oscillators 802 12.21 Summary 813 12.22 References 815 12.23 Review Questions 821 12.24 Problems 822 13 Appendices 823 13.1 Appendix A SPICE Model of Power MOSFETs 823 13.2 Appendix B Introduction to SPICE 827 13.3 Appendix C Introduction to MATLAB R 830 13.4 Appendix D Trigonometric Fourier Series 834 13.5 Appendix E Circuit Theorems 838 13.6 Appendix F SABER Circuit Simulator 842 Answers to Problems 69

Read more less

Book SynopsisCloud Services, Networking and Management provides a comprehensive overview of the cloud infrastructure and services, as well as their underlying management mechanisms, including data center virtualization and networking, cloud security and reliability, big data analytics, scientific and commercial applications.Trade ReviewEach chapter of the book is a separate self-contained part. The length of each chapter is adequately selected, while the balance between an introduction for beginners and details for advanced readers is excellently preserved. For a majority of the covered topics, a comprehensive survey and thoughtful taxonomy are provided. The presented issues are followed by the exemplary solutions, which are not only conceptual, but very often describe practical deployments. Furthermore, the reference lists are complete, while indicated directions for further studies are relevant and valuable.......Summarizing, I recommend this book as a source of very relevant and valuable information about popular and emerging cloud-related topics. An additional advantage is that security and energy efficiency are also addressed. - (IEEE Communication Magazine- Nov 2016)Table of ContentsPreface xiii Contributors xvii Part I Basic Concepts and Enabling Technologies 1 1 Cloud Architectures, Networks, Services, and Management 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Part I: Introduction to Cloud Computing 4 1.3 Part II: Research Challenges—The Chapters in This Book 14 1.4 Conclusion 21 References 21 2 Virtualization in the Cloud 23 2.1 The Need for Virtualization Management in the Cloud 23 2.2 Basic Concepts 25 2.3 Virtualized Elements 26 2.4 Virtualization Operations 29 2.5 Interfaces for Virtualization Management 30 2.6 Tools and Systems 34 2.7 Challenges 40 References 44 3 Virtual Machine Migration 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 VM Migration 51 3.3 Virtual Network Migration without Packet Loss 59 3.4 Security of Virtual Environments 61 3.5 Future Directions 66 3.6 Conclusion 68 References 68 Part II Cloud Networking and Communications 73 4 Datacenter Networks and Relevant Standards 75 4.1 Overview 75 4.2 Topologies 76 4.3 Network Expansion 82 4.4 Traffic 85 4.5 Routing 89 4.6 Addressing 93 4.7 Research Challenges 96 4.8 Summary 98 References 99 5 Inter-Data-Center Networks with Minimum Operational Costs 105 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Inter-Data-Center Network Virtualization 108 5.3 IDC Network Design with Minimum Electric Bills 115 5.4 Inter-Data-Center Network Design with Minimum Downtime Penalties 120 5.5 Overcoming Energy versus Resilience Trade-Off 123 5.6 Summary and Discussions 124 References 126 6 Openflow and SDN for Clouds 129 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 SDN, Cloud Computing, and Virtualization Challenges 130 6.3 Software-Defined Networking 132 6.4 Overview of Cloud Computing and OpenStack 138 6.5 SDN for Cloud Computing 142 6.6 Combining OpenFlow and OpenStack with OpenDaylight 145 6.7 Software-Defined Infrastructures 149 6.8 Research Trends and Challenges 150 6.9 Concluding Remarks 151 References 151 7 Mobile Cloud Computing 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Mobile Cloud Computing 155 7.3 Risks in MCC 163 7.4 Risk Management for MCC 177 7.5 Conclusions 184 References 186 Part III Cloud Management 191 8 Energy Consumption Optimization in Cloud Data Centers 193 8.1 Introduction 193 8.2 Energy Consumption in Data Centers: Components and Models 195 8.3 Energy Efficient System-Level Optimization of Data Centers 198 8.4 Conclusions and Open Challenges 210 References 211 9 Performance Management and Monitoring 217 9.1 Introduction 217 9.2 Background Concepts 219 9.3 Related Work 221 9.4 X-Cloud Application Management Platform 222 9.5 Implementation 229 9.6 Experiments and a Case Study 232 9.7 Challenges in Management on Heterogeneous Clouds 238 9.8 Conclusion 239 References 240 10 Resource Management and Scheduling 243 10.1 Introduction 243 10.2 Basic Concepts 244 10.3 Applications 248 10.4 Problem Definition 249 10.5 Resource Management and Scheduling in Clouds 254 10.6 Challenges and Perspectives 262 10.7 Conclusion 264 References 264 11 Cloud Security 269 11.1 Introduction 270 11.2 Technical Background 273 11.3 Existing Solutions 274 11.4 Transforming to the New IDPS Cloud Security Solutions 278 11.5 FlowIPS: Design and Implementation 279 11.6 FlowIPS vs Snort/Iptables IPS 282 11.7 Network Reconfiguration 284 11.8 Performance Comparison 288 11.9 Open Issues and Future Work 290 11.10 Conclusion 291 References 291 12 Survivability and Fault Tolerance in the Cloud 295 12.1 Introduction 295 12.2 Background 296 12.3 Failure Characterization in Cloud Environments 298 12.4 Availability-Aware Resource Allocation Schemes 299 12.5 Conclusion 307 References 307 Part IV Cloud Applications and Services 309 13 Scientific Applications on Clouds 311 13.1 Introduction 311 13.2 Background Information 313 13.3 Related Work 313 13.4 IWIR Workflow Model 314 13.5 Amazon SWF Background 315 13.6 RainCloud Workflow 317 13.7 IWIR-to-SWF Conversion 319 13.8 Experiments 324 13.9 Open Challenges 328 13.10 Conclusion 329 References 330 14 Interactive Multimedia Applications on Clouds 333 14.1 Introduction 333 14.2 Delivery Models for Interactive Multimedia Services 335 14.3 Cloud Gaming 339 14.4 UGC Live Streaming 345 14.5 Time-Shifting Video Streaming 351 14.6 Open Challenges 353 14.7 Conclusion 354 References 355 15 Big Data on Clouds (BDOC) 361 15.1 Introduction 361 15.2 Historical Perspective and State of the Art 362 15.3 Clouds—Supply and Demand of Big Data 364 15.4 Emerging Business Applications 365 15.5 Cloud and Service Availability 368 15.6 BDOC Security Issues 372 15.7 BDOC Legal Issues 379 15.8 Enabling Future Success—Stem Cultivation and Outreach 384 15.9 Open Challenges and Future Directions 385 15.10 Conclusions 388 References 388 Index 393

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis comprehensive reference guides the reader through all HVDC technologies, including LCC (Line Commutated Converter), 2-level VSC and VSC HVDC based on modular multilevel converters (MMC) for an in-depth understanding of converters, system level design, operating principles and modeling. Written in a tutorial style, the book also describes the key principles of design, control, protection and operation of DC transmission grids, which will be substantially different from the practice with AC transmission grids. The first dedicated reference to the latest HVDC technologies and DC grid developments; this is an essential resource for graduate students and researchers as well as engineers and professionals working on the design, modeling and operation of DC grids and HVDC. Key features: Provides comprehensive coverage of LCC, VSC and (half and full bridge) MMC-based VSC technologies and DC transmission grids. Presents phasor and dynamic analytical models fTable of ContentsContents Preface xi Part I HVDC with Current Source Converters 1 1 Introduction to Line-Commutated HVDC 3 1.1 HVDC Applications 3 1.2 Line-Commutated HVDC Components 5 1.3 DC Cables and Overhead Lines 6 1.4 LCC HVDC Topologies 7 1.5 Losses in LCC HVDC Systems 9 1.6 Conversion of AC Lines to DC 10 1.7 Ultra-High Voltage HVDC 10 2 Thyristors 12 2.1 Operating Characteristics 12 2.2 Switching Characteristic 13 2.3 Losses in HVDC Thyristors 17 2.4 Valve Structure and Thyristor Snubbers 20 2.5 Thyristor Rating Selection and Overload Capability 22 3 Six-Pulse Diode and Thyristor Converter 23 3.1 Three-Phase Uncontrolled Bridge 23 3.2 Three-Phase Thyristor Rectifier 25 3.3 Analysis of Commutation Overlap in a Thyristor Converter 26 3.4 Active and Reactive Power in a Three-Phase Thyristor Converter 30 3.5 Inverter Operation 31 4 HVDC Rectifier Station Modelling, Control and Synchronization with AC Systems 35 4.1 HVDC Rectifier Controller 35 4.2 Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) 36 5 HVDC Inverter Station Modelling and Control 40 5.1 Inverter Controller 40 5.2 Commutation Failure 42 6 HVDC System V-I Diagrams and Operating Modes 45 6.1 HVDC-Equivalent Circuit 45 6.2 HVDC V-I Operating Diagram 45 6.3 HVDC Power Reversal 48 7 HVDC Analytical Modelling and Stability 53 7.1 Introduction to Converters and HVDC Modelling 53 7.2 HVDC Analytical Model 54 7.3 CIGRE HVDC Benchmark Model 56 7.4 Converter Modelling, Linearization and Gain Scheduling 56 7.5 AC System Modelling for HVDC Stability Studies 58 7.6 LCC Converter Transformer Model 62 7.7 DC System Model 63 7.8 HVDC-HVAC System Model 65 7.9 Analytical Dynamic Model Verification 65 7.10 Basic HVDC Dynamic Analysis 66 7.11 HVDC Second Harmonic Instability 70 7.12 Oscillations of 100 Hz on the DC Side 71 8 HVDC Phasor Modelling and Interactions with AC System 72 8.1 Converter and DC System Phasor Model 72 8.2 Phasor AC System Model and Interaction with the DC System 73 8.3 Inverter AC Voltage and Power Profile as DC Current is Increasing 75 8.4 Influence of Converter Extinction Angle 76 8.5 Influence of Shunt Reactive Power Compensation 78 8.6 Influence of Load at the Converter Terminals 78 8.7 Influence of Operating Mode (DC Voltage Control Mode) 78 8.8 Rectifier Operating Mode 80 9 HVDC Operation with Weak AC Systems 82 9.1 Introduction 82 9.2 Short-Circuit Ratio and Equivalent Short-Circuit Ratio 82 9.3 Power Transfer between Two AC Systems 85 9.4 Phasor Study of Converter Interactions with Weak AC Systems 89 9.5 System Dynamics (Small Signal Stability) with Low SCR 90 9.6 Control and Main Circuit Solutions for Weak AC Grids 90 9.7 LCC HVDC with SVC (Static VAR Compensator) 91 9.8 Capacitor-Commutated Converters for HVDC 93 9.9 AC System with Low Inertia 93 10 Fault Management and HVDC System Protection 98 10.1 Introduction 98 10.2 DC Line Faults 98 10.3 AC System Faults 101 10.4 System Reconfiguration for Permanent DC Faults 103 10.5 Overvoltage Protection 106 11 LCC HVDC System Harmonics 107 11.1 Harmonic Performance Criteria 107 11.2 Harmonic Limits 108 11.3 Thyristor Converter Harmonics 109 11.4 Harmonic Filters 110 11.5 Noncharacteristic Harmonic Reduction Using HVDC Controls 118 Bibliography Part I Line Commutated Converter HVDC 119 Part II HVDC with Voltage Source Converters 121 12 VSC HVDC Applications and Topologies, Performance and Cost Comparison with LCC HVDC 123 12.1 Voltage Source Converters (VSC) 123 12.2 Comparison with Line-Commutated Converter (LCC) HVDC 125 12.3 Overhead and Subsea/Underground VSC HVDC Transmission 126 12.4 DC Cable Types with VSC HVDC 129 12.5 Monopolar and Bipolar VSC HVDC Systems 129 12.6 VSC HVDC Converter Topologies 130 12.7 VSC HVDC Station Components 135 12.8 AC Reactors 139 12.9 DC Reactors 139 13 IGBT Switches and VSC Converter Losses 141 13.1 Introduction to IGBT and IGCT 141 13.2 General VSC Converter Switch Requirements 142 13.3 IGBT Technology 142 13.4 Development of High Power IGBT Devices 147 13.5 IEGT Technology 148 13.6 Losses Calculation 148 13.7 Balancing Challenges in Series IGBT Chains 154 13.8 Snubbers Circuits 155 14 Single-Phase and Three-Phase Two-Level VSC Converters 156 14.1 Introduction 156 14.2 Single-Phase Voltage Source Converter 156 14.3 Three-Phase Voltage Source Converter 159 14.4 Square-Wave, Six-Pulse Operation 159 15 Two-Level PWM VSC Converters 167 15.1 Introduction 167 15.2 PWM Modulation 167 15.3 Sinusoidal Pulse-Width Modulation (SPWM) 168 15.4 Third Harmonic Injection (THI) 171 15.5 Selective Harmonic Elimination Modulation (SHE) 172 15.6 Converter Losses for Two-Level SPWM VSC 173 15.7 Harmonics with Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) 175 15.8 Comparison of PWM Modulation Techniques 178 16 Multilevel VSC Converters 180 16.1 Introduction 180 16.2 Modulation Techniques for Multilevel Converters 182 16.3 Neutral Point Clamped Multilevel Converter 183 16.4 Flying Capacitor Multilevel Converter 185 16.5 H-Bridge Cascaded Converter 186 16.6 Half Bridge Modular Multilevel Converter (MMC) 187 16.7 MMC Based on Full Bridge Topology 200 16.8 Comparison of Multilevel Topologies 208 17 Two-Level PWM VSC HVDC Modelling, Control and Dynamics 209 17.1 PWM Two-Level Converter Average Model 209 17.2 Two-Level PWM Converter Model in DQ Frame 210 17.3 VSC Converter Transformer Model 212 17.4 Two-Level VSC Converter and AC Grid Model in ABC Frame 213 17.5 Two-Level VSC Converter and AC Grid Model in DQ Rotating Coordinate Frame 213 17.6 VSC Converter Control Principles 214 17.7 The Inner Current Controller Design 215 17.8 Outer Controller Design 218 17.9 Complete VSC Converter Controller 221 17.10 Small-Signal Linearized VSC HVDC Model 224 17.11 Small-Signal Dynamic Studies 224 18 Two-Level VSC HVDC Phasor-Domain Interaction with AC Systems and PQ Operating Diagrams 226 18.1 Power Exchange between Two AC Voltage Sources 226 18.2 Converter Phasor Model and Power Exchange with an AC System 230 18.3 Phasor Study of VSC Converter Interaction with AC System 232 18.4 Operating Limits 234 18.5 Design Point Selection 236 18.6 Influence of AC System Strength 239 18.7 Influence of Transformer Reactance 243 18.8 Operation with Very Weak AC Systems 247 19 Half Bridge MMC Converter: Modelling, Control and Operating PQ Diagrams 254 19.1 Half Bridge MMC Converter Average Model in ABC Frame 254 19.2 Half-Bridge MMC Converter-Static DQ Frame and Phasor Model 257 19.3 Differential Current at Second Harmonic 262 19.4 Complete MMC Converter DQ Model in Matrix Form 263 19.5 Second Harmonic Circulating Current Suppression Controller 264 19.6 DQ Frame Model of MMC with Circulating Current Controller 267 19.7 Phasor Model of MMC with Circulating Current Suppression Controller 269 19.8 Dynamic MMC Model Using Equivalent Series Capacitor CMMC 270 19.9 Full Dynamic Analytical MMC Model 273 19.10 MMC Converter Controller 275 19.11 MMC Total Series Reactance in the Phasor Model 275 19.12 MMC VSC Interaction with AC System and PQ Operating Diagrams 277 20 VSC HVDC under AC and DC Fault Conditions 280 20.1 Introduction 280 20.2 Faults on the AC System 280 20.3 DC Faults with Two-Level VSC 281 20.4 Influence of DC Capacitors 286 20.5 VSC Converter Modelling under DC Faults and VSC Diode Bridge 287 20.6 Converter-Mode Transitions as DC Voltage Reduces 294 20.7 DC Faults with Half-Bridge Modular Multilevel Converter 294 20.8 DC Faults with Full-Bridge Modular Multilevel Converter 298 21 VSC HVDC Application for AC Grid Support and Operation with Passive AC Systems 302 21.1 VSC HVDC High-Level Controls and AC Grid Support 302 21.2 HVDC Embedded inside an AC Grid 303 21.3 HVDC Connecting Two Separate AC Grids 304 21.4 HVDC in Parallel with AC 304 21.5 Operation with a Passive AC System and Black Start Capability 305 21.6 VSC HVDC Operation with Offshore Wind Farms 305 21.7 VSC HVDC Supplying Power Offshore and Driving a MW-Size Variable-Speed Motor 307 Bibliography Part II Voltage Source Converter HVDC 309 Part III DC Transmission Grids 311 22 Introduction to DC Grids 313 22.1 DC versus AC Transmission 313 22.2 Terminology 314 22.3 DC Grid Planning, Topology and Power-Transfer Security 314 22.4 Technical Challenges 315 22.5 DC Grid Building by Multiple Manufacturers 316 22.6 Economic Aspects 316 23 DC Grids with Line-Commutated Converters 317 23.1 Multiterminal HVDC 317 23.2 Italy–Corsica–Sardinia Multiterminal HVDC Link 318 23.3 Connecting LCC Converter to a DC Grid 319 23.4 Control of LCC Converters in DC Grids 321 23.5 Control of LCC DC Grids through DC Voltage Droop Feedback 321 23.6 Managing LCC DC Grid Faults 323 23.7 Reactive Power Issues 325 23.8 Large LCC Rectifier Stations in DC Grids 325 24 DC Grids with Voltage Source Converters and Power-Flow Model 326 24.1 Connecting a VSC Converter to a DC Grid 326 24.2 DC Grid Power Flow Model 327 24.3 DC Grid Power Flow under DC Faults 331 25 DC Grid Control 334 25.1 Introduction 334 25.2 Fast Local VSC Converter Control in DC Grids 334 25.3 DC Grid Dispatcher with Remote Communication 336 25.4 Primary, Secondary and Tertiary DC Grid Control 337 25.5 DC Voltage Droop Control for VSC Converters in DC Grids 338 25.6 Three-Level Control for VSC Converters with Dispatcher Droop 339 25.7 Power Flow Algorithm When DC Powers are Regulated 340 25.8 Power Flow and Control Study of CIGRE DC Grid-Test System 344 26 DC Grid Fault Management and DC Circuit Breakers 349 26.1 Introduction 349 26.2 Fault Current Components in DC Grids 350 26.3 DC System Protection Coordination with AC System Protection 352 26.4 Mechanical DC Circuit Breaker 352 26.5 Semiconductor Based DC Circuit Breaker 355 26.6 Hybrid DC Circuit Breaker 359 26.7 DC Grid-Protection System Development 361 26.8 DC Grid Selective Protection System Based on Current Derivative or Travelling Wave Identification 362 26.9 Differential DC Grid Protection Strategy 363 26.10 DC Grid Selective Protection System Based on Local Signals 364 26.11 DC Grids with DC Fault-Tolerant VSC Converters 365 27 High Power DC/DC Converters and DC Power-Flow Controlling Devices 372 27.1 Introduction 372 27.2 Power Flow Control Using Series Resistors 373 27.3 Low Stepping-Ratio DC/DC Converters 376 27.4 High Stepping Ratio Isolated DC/DC Converter 383 27.5 High Stepping Ratio LCL DC/DC Converter 383 27.6 Building DC Grids with DC/DC Converters 385 27.7 DC Hubs 387 27.8 Developing DC Grids Using DC Hubs 390 27.9 North Sea DC Grid Topologies 390 Bibliography Part III DC Transmission Grids 394 Appendix A Variable Notations 396 Appendix B Analytical Background for Rotating DQ Frame 398 Appendix C System Modelling Using Complex Numbers and Phasors 409 Appendix D Simulink Examples 411 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction to Reflectarray Antennas 1 1.1 Reflectarray Concept 1 1.2 Reflectarray Developments 2 1.3 Overview of this Book 5 References 7 2 Analysis and Design of Reflectarray Elements 9 2.1 Phase‐Shift Distribution on the Reflectarray Aperture 9 2.2 Phase Tuning Approaches for Reflectarray Elements 13 2.2.1 Elements with Phase/Time‐Delay Lines 14 2.2.2 Elements with Variable Sizes 15 2.2.3 Elements with Variable Rotation Angles 16 2.3 Element Analysis Methods 18 2.3.1 Periodic Boundary Conditions and Floquet Port Excitation 19 2.3.2 Metallic Waveguide Simulators 19 2.3.3 Analytical Circuit Models 21 2.3.4 Comparison of Element Analysis Techniques 22 2.3.4.1 Comparison between PBC and Metallic Waveguides 23 2.3.4.2 Comparison between PBC and the Circuit Model 24 2.4 Examples of Classic Reflectarray Elements 26 2.4.1 Rectangular Patch with Phase‐Delay Lines 26 2.4.2 Variable Size Square Patch 30 2.4.3 Single Slot Ring Elements 33 2.5 Reflectarray Element Characteristics and Design Considerations 37 2.5.1 Frequency Behavior of Element Reflection Coefficients 37 2.5.2 Effects of Oblique Incidence Angles on Element Reflection Coefficients 37 2.5.3 Sources of Phase Error in Reflectarray Element Design 41 2.6 Reflectarray Element Measurements 43 References 46 3 System Design and Aperture Efficiency Analysis 49 3.1 A General Feed Model 49 3.1.1 Models of Linearly Polarized and Circularly Polarized Feeds 50 3.1.2 Balanced Feed Models 51 3.2 Aperture Efficiency 53 3.2.1 Spillover Efficiency 53 3.2.2 Illumination Efficiency 54 3.2.3 Effects of Aperture Shape on Efficiency 55 3.2.4 Effects of Feed Location on Efficiency 59 3.3 Aperture Blockage and Edge Diffraction 60 3.3.1 Aperture Blockage and Offset Systems 60 3.3.2 Edge Taper and Edge Diffraction 63 3.4 The Analogy between a Reflectarray and a Parabolic Reflector 70 3.4.1 The Offset System Configurations 71 3.4.2 Analogous Offset Reflector 72 3.4.2.1 Transformation from Reflector to Reflectarray System 72 3.4.2.2 Transformation from Reflectarray to Reflector System 75 3.4.3 Example of Analogous Offset Systems 76 References 77 4 Radiation Analysis Techniques 79 4.1 Array Theory Approach: The Robust Analysis Technique 80 4.1.1 Idealized Feed and Element Patterns 80 4.1.2 Element Excitations and Reflectarray Radiation Pattern 81 4.2 Aperture Field Approach: The Classical Analysis Technique 82 4.2.1 Complex Feed Patterns 82 4.2.2 Field Transformations from Feed to Aperture and Equivalent Surface Current 83 4.2.3 Near‐Field to Far‐Field Transforms and Reflectarray Radiation Pattern 85 4.3 Important Topics in Reflectarray Radiation Analysis 87 4.3.1 Principal Radiation Planes 87 4.3.2 Co‐ and Cross‐Polarized Patterns 89 4.3.3 Antenna Directivity 90 4.3.4 Antenna Efficiency and Gain 91 4.3.5 Spectral Transforms and Computational Speedup 94 4.4 Full‐Wave Simulation Approaches 96 4.4.1 Constructed Aperture Currents Under Local‐Periodicity Approximation 96 4.4.2 Complete Reflectarray Models 96 4.5 Numerical Examples 98 4.5.1 Comparison of the Array Theory and Aperture Field Analysis Techniques 98 4.5.1.1 Example 1: Reflectarray Antenna with a Broadside Beam 99 4.5.1.2 Example 2: Reflectarray Antenna with an Off‐Broadside Beam 100 4.5.1.3 Comparison of Calculated Directivity versus Frequency 103 4.5.2 Consideration in the Array Theory Technique: Element Pattern Effect 105 4.5.3 Consideration in the Aperture Field Technique: Variations of Equivalence Principle 106 4.5.4 Comparisons with Full‐Wave Technique 107 References 110 5 Bandwidth of Reflectarray Antennas 113 5.1 Bandwidth Constraints in Reflectarray Antennas 113 5.1.1 Frequency Behavior of Element Phase Error 113 5.1.2 Frequency Behavior of Spatial Phase Delay 115 5.1.3 Aperture Phase Error and Reflectarray Bandwidth Limitations 118 5.2 Reflectarray Element Bandwidth 121 5.2.1 Physics of Element Bandwidth Constraints 121 5.2.2 Parametric Studies on Element Bandwidth 122 5.3 Reflectarray System Bandwidth 135 5.3.1 Effect of Aperture Size on Reflectarray Bandwidth 135 5.3.2 Effects of Element on Reflectarray Bandwidth 140 References 144 6 Reflectarray Design Examples 147 6.1 A Ku‐band Reflectarray Antenna: A Step‐by‐Step Design Example 147 6.1.1 Feed Antenna Characteristics 147 6.1.2 Reflectarray System Design 150 6.1.3 Reflectarray Element Design 153 6.1.4 Radiation Analysis 156 6.1.5 Fabrication and Measurements 159 6.2 A Circularly Polarized Reflectarray Antenna using an Element Rotation Technique 165 6.3 Bandwidth Comparison of Reflectarray Designs using Different Elements 169 References 176 7 Broadband and Multiband Reflectarray Antennas 179 7.1 Broadband Reflectarray Design Topologies 179 7.1.1 Multilayer Multi‐Resonance Elements 179 7.1.2 Single‐Layer Multi‐Resonance Elements 181 7.1.3 Sub‐Wavelength Elements 184 7.1.4 Reflectarrays Employing Single‐Layer and Double‐Layer Sub‐Wavelength Elements 188 7.1.5 Broadband Design Methods for Large Reflectarrays 197 7.2 Phase Synthesis for Broadband Operation 197 7.2.1 A Phase Synthesized Broadband Reflectarray 200 7.2.2 A Dual‐Frequency Broadband Reflectarray 203 7.3 Multiband Reflectarray Designs 206 7.3.1 A Single‐Layer Dual‐Band Circularly Polarized Reflectarray 210 7.3.2 A Single-Layer Tri-Band Reflectarray 213 References 221 8 Terahertz, Infrared, and Optical Reflectarray Antennas 227 8.1 Above Microwave Frequencies 227 8.2 Material Characteristics at Terahertz and Infrared Frequencies 228 8.2.1 Optical Measurements and Electromagnetic Parameters 228 8.2.2 Measured Properties of Conductors and Dielectric Materials 229 8.2.3 Calculating Drude Model Parameters for Conductors 229 8.3 Element Losses at Infrared Frequencies 234 8.3.1 Conductor Losses 234 8.3.1.1 Effect of Conductor Thickness 234 8.3.1.2 Effect of Complex Conductivity 237 8.3.2 Dielectric Losses 240 8.3.3 Effect of Losses on Reflection Properties of Elements 241 8.3.4 Circuit‐Model Analysis 242 8.3.4.1 Circuit Theory and Loss Study 242 8.3.4.2 Zero‐Pole Analysis of Element Performance 243 8.4 Reflectarray Design Methodologies and Enabling Technologies 245 8.4.1 Reflectarrays with Patch Elements 245 8.4.2 Dielectric Resonator Reflectarrays 248 8.4.3 Dielectric Reflectarrays 251 8.4.3.1 Dielectric Property and 3D Printing Technique 251 8.4.3.2 Dielectric Reflectarray Design 253 8.4.3.3 Dielectric Reflectarray Prototypes and Measurements 259 8.5 Future Trends 261 References 264 9 Multi‐Beam and Shaped‐Beam Reflectarray Antennas 267 9.1 Direct Design Approaches for Multi‐Beam Reflectarrays 268 9.1.1 Geometrical Aperture Division 268 9.1.2 Superposition of Aperture Fields 271 9.1.3 Comparison of Direct Design Approaches 272 9.2 Synthesis Design Approaches for Shaped‐ and Multi‐Beam Reflectarrays 275 9.2.1 Basics of Synthesis Techniques 275 9.2.2 Local‐Search Techniques 276 9.2.3 Global‐Search Techniques 279 9.2.4 Full‐Wave Optimization Design Approaches 280 9.3 Practical Reflectarray Designs 281 9.3.1 Single‐Feed Reflectarray with Multiple Symmetric Beams 281 9.3.2 Feed Reflectarrays with Multiple Asymmetric Beams 286 9.3.3 Shaped‐Beam Reflectarrays 294 9.3.4 Multi‐Feed Multi‐Beam Reflectarrays 297 References 300 10 Beam‐Scanning Reflectarray Antennas 303 10.1 Beam‐Scanning Approaches for Reflectarray Antennas 304 10.1.1 Design Methodologies 304 10.1.2 Classifications Based on Reflector Type 306 10.2 Feed‐Tuning Techniques 307 10.2.1 Fully Illuminated Single‐Reflector Configurations 307 10.2.1.1 Parabolic‐Phase Apertures 307 10.2.1.2 Non‐Parabolic‐Phase Apertures 313 10.2.2 Partially Illuminated Single‐Reflector Configurations 324 10.2.2.1 Parabolic Cylindrical‐Phase Reflectarray Antennas (pcpra) 324 10.2.2.2 Parabolic Torus‐Phase Reflectarray Antennas (PTPRA) 329 10.2.2.3 Spherical‐Phase Reflectarray Antennas (SPRA) 331 10.2.3 Dual‐Reflector Configurations 334 10.2.3.1 Parabolic Reflector/Reflectarray Antennas 334 10.2.3.2 Non‐Parabolic Reflector/Reflectarray Antennas 336 10.2.4 Summary of Feed‐Tuning Techniques 337 10.3 Aperture Phase‐Tuning Techniques 339 10.3.1 Basics of Aperture Phase Tuning 339 10.3.2 Enabling Technologies 341 10.3.2.1 Mechanical Actuators/Motors 341 10.3.2.2 Electronic Devices 343 10.3.2.3 Functional Materials 352 10.4 Frontiers in Beam‐Scanning Reflectarray Research 355 10.4.1 Active Reflectarrays 355 10.4.2 Comparison Between Analog and Digital Phase Control 355 10.4.3 Sub‐Array Techniques 358 10.4.4 Hybrid Configurations 359 References 359 11 Reflectarray Engineering and Emerging Applications 367 11.1 Advanced Reflectarray Geometries 367 11.1.1 Conformal Reflectarrays 367 11.1.1.1 Analysis of Conformal Reflectarrays 367 11.1.1.2 Radiation Characteristics of Conformal Reflectarrays on Cylindrical Surfaces 369 11.1.2 Dual‐Reflectarrays 375 11.2 Reflectarrays for Satellite Applications 379 11.2.1 An L‐Band Reflectarray for the Beidou Satellite System 381 11.2.2 Reflectarrays Integrated with Solar Cells 384 11.3 Power Combining and Amplifying Reflectarrays 388 11.4 A Perspective on Reflectarray Antennas 393 11.4.1 Large‐Aperture Planar Reflectarray Antennas 393 11.4.2 Reflectarray Antennas with Broad Bandwidth, Beam‐Scanning Capability, and Low Cost 396 11.4.3 From Reflectarray Antennas to Transmitarray Antennas 396 References 397 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisDesign, Control and Application of Modular Multilevel Converters for HVDC Transmission Systemsis a comprehensive guide to semiconductor technologies applicable for MMC design, component sizing control, modulation, and application of the MMC technology for HVDC transmission. Separated into three distinct parts, the first offers an overview of MMC technology, including information on converter component sizing, Control and Communication, Protection and Fault Management, and Generic Modelling and Simulation. The second covers the applications of MMC in offshore WPP, including planning, technical and economic requirements and optimization options, fault management, dynamic and transient stability. Finally, the third chapter explores the applications of MMC in HVDC transmission and Multi Terminal configurations, including Supergrids. Key features: Unique coverage of the offshore application and optimization of MMC-HVDC schemes for the export of offshore Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv About the Companion Website xvii Nomenclature xix Introduction 1 1 Introduction to Modular Multilevel Converters 7 1.1 Introduction 7 1.2 The Two-Level Voltage Source Converter 9 1.2.1 Topology and Basic Function 9 1.2.2 Steady-State Operation 12 1.3 Benefits of Multilevel Converters 15 1.4 Early Multilevel Converters 17 1.4.1 Diode Clamped Converters 17 1.4.2 Flying Capacitor Converters 20 1.5 Cascaded Multilevel Converters 23 1.5.1 Submodules and Submodule Strings 23 1.5.2 Modular Multilevel Converter with Half-Bridge Submodules 28 1.5.3 Other Cascaded Converter Topologies 43 1.6 Summary 57 2 Main-Circuit Design 60 2.1 Introduction 60 2.2 Properties and Design Choices of Power Semiconductor Devices for High-Power Applications 61 2.2.1 Historical Overview of the Development Toward Modern Power Semiconductors 61 2.2.2 Basic Conduction Properties of Power Semiconductor Devices 64 2.2.3 P–N Junctions for Blocking 65 2.2.4 Conduction Properties and the Need for Carrier Injection 67 2.2.5 Switching Properties 72 2.2.6 Packaging 73 2.2.7 Reliability of Power Semiconductor Devices 80 2.2.8 Silicon Carbide Power Devices 84 2.3 Medium-Voltage Capacitors for Submodules 92 2.3.1 Design and Fabrication 93 2.3.2 Self-Healing and Reliability 95 2.4 Arm Inductors 96 2.5 Submodule Configurations 98 2.5.1 Existing Half-Bridge Submodule Realizations 99 2.5.2 Clamped Single-Submodule 104 2.5.3 Clamped Double-Submodule 105 2.5.4 Unipolar-Voltage Full-Bridge Submodule 106 2.5.5 Five-Level Cross-Connected Submodule 107 2.5.6 Three-Level Cross-Connected Submodule 107 2.5.7 Double Submodule 108 2.5.8 Semi-Full-Bridge Submodule 109 2.5.9 Soft-Switching Submodules 110 2.6 Choice of Main-Circuit Parameters 112 2.6.1 Main Input Data 112 2.6.2 Choice of Power Semiconductor Devices 114 2.6.3 Choice of the Number of Submodules 115 2.6.4 Choice of Submodule Capacitance 117 2.6.5 Choice of Arm Inductance 117 2.7 Handling of Redundant and Faulty Submodules 118 2.7.1 Method 1 118 2.7.2 Method 2 119 2.7.3 Comparison of Method 1 and Method 2 120 2.7.4 Handling of Redundancy Using IGBT Stacks 121 2.8 Auxiliary Power Supplies for Submodules 121 2.8.1 Using the Submodule Capacitor as Power Source 121 2.8.2 Power Supplies with High-Voltage Inputs 123 2.8.3 The Tapped-Inductor Buck Converter 125 2.9 Start-Up Procedures 126 2.10 Summary 126 3 Dynamics and Control 133 3.1 Introduction 133 3.2 Fundamentals 134 3.2.1 Arms 135 3.2.2 Submodules 135 3.2.3 AC Bus 136 3.2.4 DC Bus 136 3.2.5 Currents 136 3.3 Converter Operating Principle and Averaged Dynamic Model 137 3.3.1 Dynamic Relations for the Currents 137 3.3.2 Selection of the Mean Sum Capacitor Voltages 137 3.3.3 Averaging Principle 138 3.3.4 Ideal Selection of the Insertion Indices 140 3.3.5 Sum-Capacitor-Voltage Ripples 141 3.3.6 Maximum Output Voltage 144 3.3.7 DC-Bus Dynamics 146 3.3.8 Time Delays 148 3.4 Per-Phase Output-Current Control 148 3.4.1 Tracking of a Sinusoidal Reference Using a PI Controller 149 3.4.2 Resonant Filters and Generalized Integrators 150 3.4.3 Tracking of a Sinusoidal Reference Using a PR Controller 152 3.4.4 Parameter Selection for a PR Current Controller 153 3.4.5 Output-Current Controller Design 157 3.5 Arm-Balancing (Internal) Control 161 3.5.1 Circulating-Current Control 163 3.5.2 Direct Voltage Control 163 3.5.3 Closed-Loop Voltage Control 166 3.5.4 Open-Loop Voltage Control 168 3.5.5 Hybrid Voltage Control 172 3.6 Three-Phase Systems 175 3.6.1 Balanced Three-Phase Systems 175 3.6.2 Imbalanced Three-Phase Systems 175 3.6.3 Instantaneous Active Power 176 3.6.4 Wye (Y) and Delta (Δ) Connections 177 3.6.5 Harmonics 177 3.6.6 Space Vectors 178 3.6.7 Instantaneous Power 182 3.6.8 Selection of the Space-Vector Scaling Constant 184 3.7 Vector Output-Current Control 184 3.7.1 PR (PI) Controller 186 3.7.2 Reference-Vector Saturation 188 3.7.3 Transformations 188 3.7.4 Zero-Sequence Injection 190 3.8 Higher-Level Control 192 3.8.1 Phase-Locked Loop 193 3.8.2 Open-Loop Active- and Reactive-Power Control 197 3.8.3 DC-Bus-Voltage Control 198 3.8.4 Power-Synchronization Control 200 3.9 Control Architectures 207 3.9.1 Communication Network 209 3.9.2 Fault-Tolerant Communication Networks 211 3.10 Summary 212 4 Control under Unbalanced Grid Conditions 214 4.1 Introduction 214 4.2 Grid Requirements 214 4.3 Shortcomings of Conventional Vector Control 215 4.3.1 PLL with Notch Filter 216 4.4 Positive/Negative-Sequence Extraction 219 4.4.1 DDSRF-PNSE 219 4.4.2 DSOGI-PNSE 221 4.5 Injection Reference Strategy 223 4.5.1 PSI with PSI-LVRT Compliance 225 4.5.2 MSI-LVRT Mixed Positive- and Negative-Sequence Injection with both PSI-LVRT and NSI-LVRT Compliance 226 4.6 Component-Based Vector Output-Current Control 226 4.6.1 DDSRF-PNSE-Based Control 226 4.6.2 DSOGI-PNSE-Based Control 227 4.7 Summary 228 5 Modulation and Submodule Energy Balancing 232 5.1 Introduction 232 5.2 Fundamentals of Pulse-Width Modulation 233 5.2.1 Basic Concepts 233 5.2.2 Performance of Modulation Methods 234 5.2.3 Reference Third-Harmonic Injection in Three-Phase Systems 235 5.3 Carrier-Based Modulation Methods 236 5.3.1 Two-Level Carrier-Based Modulation 236 5.3.2 Analysis by Fourier Series Expansion 237 5.3.3 Polyphase Systems 242 5.4 Multilevel Carrier-Based Modulation 243 5.4.1 Phase-Shifted Carriers 243 5.4.2 Level-Shifted Carriers 250 5.5 Nearest-Level Control 252 5.6 Submodule Energy Balancing Methods 256 5.6.1 Submodule Sorting 256 5.6.2 Predictive Sorting 259 5.6.3 Tolerance Band Methods 263 5.6.4 Individual Submodule-Capacitor-Voltage Control 269 5.7 Summary 270 6 Modeling and Simulation 272 6.1 Introduction 272 6.2 Leg-Level Averaged (LLA) Model 274 6.3 Arm-Level Averaged (ALA) Model 275 6.3.1 Arm-Level Averaged Model with Blocking Capability (ALA-BLK) 276 6.4 Submodule-Level Averaged (SLA) Model 278 6.4.1 Vectorized Simulation Models 279 6.5 Submodule-Level Switched (SLS) Model 280 6.5.1 Multiple Phase-Shifted Carrier (PSC) Simulation 281 6.6 Summary 281 7 Design and Optimization of MMC-HVDC Schemes for Offshore Wind-Power Plant Application 283 7.1 Introduction 283 7.2 The Influence of Regulatory Frameworks on the Development Strategies for Offshore HVDC Schemes 284 7.2.1 UK's Regulatory Framework for Offshore Transmission Assets 285 7.2.2 Germany’s Regulatory Framework for Offshore Transmission Assets 286 7.3 Impact of Regulatory Frameworks on the Functional Requirements and Design of Offshore HVDC Terminals 286 7.4 Components of an Offshore MMC-HVDC Converter 287 7.4.1 Offshore HVDC Converter Transformer 289 7.4.2 Phase Reactors and DC Pole Reactors 290 7.4.3 Converter Valve Hall 292 7.4.4 Control and Protection Systems 293 7.4.5 AC and DC Switchyards 293 7.4.6 Auxiliary Systems 293 7.5 Offshore Platform Concepts 294 7.5.1 Accommodation Offshore 295 7.6 Onshore HVDC Converter 295 7.6.1 Onshore DC Choppers/Dynamic Brakers 296 7.6.2 Inrush Current Limiter Resistors 297 7.7 Recommended System Studies for the Development and Integration of an Offshore HVDC Link to a WPP 298 7.7.1 Conceptual and Feasibility Studies with Steady-State Load Flow 299 7.7.2 Short-Circuit Analysis 301 7.7.3 Dynamic System Performance Analysis 301 7.7.4 Transient Stability Analysis 301 7.7.5 Harmonic Analysis 302 7.7.6 Ferroresonance 302 7.8 Summary 303 8 MMC-HVDC Standards and Commissioning Procedures 305 8.1 Introduction 305 8.2 CIGRE and IEC Activities for the Standardization of MMC-HVDC Technology 306 8.2.1 Hierarchy of Available and Applicable Codes, Standards and Best Practice Recommendations for MMC-HVDC Projects 309 8.3 MMC-HVDC Commissioning and Factory and Site Acceptance Tests 309 8.3.1 Pre-Commissioning 311 8.3.2 Offsite Commissioning Tests or Factory Acceptance Tests 312 8.3.3 Onsite Testing and Site Acceptance Tests 313 8.3.4 Onsite Energizing Tests 314 8.4 Summary 317 9 Control and Protection of MMC-HVDC under AC and DC Network Fault Contingencies 318 9.1 Introduction 318 9.2 Two-Level VSC-HVDC Fault Characteristics under Unbalanced AC Network Contingency 319 9.2.1 Two-Level VSC-HVDC Fault Characteristics under DC Fault Contingency 321 9.3 MMC-HVDC Fault Characteristics under Unbalanced AC Network Contingency 322 9.3.1 Internal AC Bus Fault Conditions at the Secondary Side of the Converter Transformer 323 9.4 DC Pole-to-Ground Short-Circuit Fault Characteristics of the Half-Bridge MMC-HVDC 325 9.4.1 DC Pole-to-Pole Short-Circuit Fault Characteristics of the Half-Bridge MMC-HVDC 325 9.5 MMC-HVDC Component Failures 327 9.5.1 Submodule Semiconductor Failures 327 9.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Failure 328 9.5.3 Phase Reactor Failure 329 9.5.4 Converter Transformer Failure 329 9.6 MMC-HVDC Protection Systems 329 9.6.1 AC-Side Protections 331 9.6.2 DC-Side Protections 331 9.6.3 DC-Bus Undervoltage, Overvoltage Protection 331 9.6.4 DC-Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection 332 9.6.5 DC-Bus Overcurrent Protection 332 9.6.6 DC Bus Differential Protection 332 9.6.7 Valve and Submodule Protection 332 9.6.8 Transformer Protection 333 9.6.9 Primary Converter AC Breaker Failure Protection 333 9.7 Summary 333 10 MMC-HVDC Transmission Technology and MTDC Networks 336 10.1 Introduction 336 10.2 LCC-HVDC Transmission Technology 336 10.3 Two-Level VSC-HVDC Transmission Technology 338 10.3.1 Comparison of VSC-HVDC vs. LCC-HVDC Technology 338 10.4 Modular Multilevel HVDC Transmission Technology 339 10.4.1 Monopolar Asymmetric MMC-HVDC Scheme Configuration 340 10.4.2 Symmetrical Monopole MMC-HVDC Scheme Configuration 340 10.4.3 Bipolar HVDC Scheme Configuration 341 10.4.4 Homopolar HVDC Scheme Configuration 342 10.4.5 Back-to-Back HVDC Scheme Configuration 342 10.5 The European HVDC Projects and MTDC Network Perspectives 343 10.5.1 The North Sea Countries Offshore Grid Initiative (NSCOGI) 343 10.5.2 Large Integration of Offshore Wind Farms and Creation of the Offshore DC Grid 344 10.6 Multi-Terminal HVDC Configurations 345 10.6.1 Series-Connected MTDC Network 346 10.6.2 Parallel-Connected MTDC Network 346 10.6.3 Meshed MTDC Networks 347 10.7 DC Load Flow Control in MTDC Networks 348 10.8 DC Grid Control Strategies 349 10.8.1 Dynamic Voltage Control and Power Balancing in MTDC Networks 350 10.8.2 Power and Voltage Droop Control Strategy 351 10.8.3 Voltage Margin Control Method 352 10.8.4 Dead-Band Droop Control 352 10.8.5 Centralized and Distributed Voltage Control Strategies 354 10.9 DC Fault Detection and Protection in MTDC Networks 355 10.10 Fault-Detection Methods in MTDC 357 10.10.1 Overcurrent and Voltage Detection Methods 357 10.10.2 Distance Relay Protection 359 10.10.3 Differential Line Protection 359 10.10.4 Voltage Derivative Detection 359 10.10.5 Traveling Wave Based Detection 360 10.10.6 Frequency Domain Based Detection 361 10.10.7 Wavelet Based Fault Detection 361 10.11 DC Circuit Breaker Technologies 362 10.11.1 DC Circuit Breaker with MOVs in Series with the DC Line 364 10.11.2 DC Breakers with MOVs in Parallel with the DC Line 366 10.12 Fault-Current Limiters 367 10.12.1 Fault Current Limiting Reactors 367 10.12.2 Solid-State Fault-Current Limiters 368 10.12.3 Superconducting Fault-Current Limiters 369 10.13 The Influence of Grounding Strategy on Fault Currents 369 10.14 DC Supergrids of the Future 370 10.15 Summary 371 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents cocreational perspectives on current international practices and theories relevant to strategic communication The Handbook of Strategic Communication brings together work from leading scholars and practitioners in the field to explore the many practical, national and cultural differences in modern approaches to strategic communication. Designed to provide a coherent understanding of strategic communication across various subfields, this authoritative volume familiarizes practitioners, researchers, and advanced students with an inclusive range of international practices, current theories, and contemporary debates and issues in this dynamic, multidisciplinary field. This Handbook covers an expansive range of strategic communication models, theories, and applications, comprising two dozen in-depth chapters written by international scholars and practitioners. In-depth essays discuss the three core areas of strategic communicationpublic relatioTable of ContentsIntroduction and Authors 1 1 Strategic Communication: Field, Concepts, and the Cocreational Model 6Carl H. Botan Part I Strategic Communication Around the World 15 2 Dialogic Strategic Communication: A Key for Effective, Sustainable, and Ethical Social Conflict Management in Guatemala 17Karina J. Garcia-Ruano 3 Strategic Rhetoric, Dialogue, and the Long Now: A Case Study of Long-Term Thinking 31Michael L. Kent and Petra Theunissen 4 Strategic Communication in Turkish Public Sector: Through the Lens of Public Relations 45B. Pınar Özdemir and Melike Aktaş Other chapters addressing strategic communication around the world: Chapters 6 & 8 (Part II), Chapter 12 (Part III), Chapter 18 (Part V), Chapter 21 (Part VI) Part II Cocreational Perspective in Strategic Communication 59 5 A Cocreational Approach to Social-Mediated Crisis Communication: Communicating Health Crises Strategically on Social Media 61Yan Jin and Lucinda Austin 6 The Cocreational View of Character Assassination 76Sergei A. Samoilenko 7 Cocreational Perspectives on Strategic Communication in Counterterrorism 91Damion Waymer 8 Communicating Safety in Norwegian Road Tunnels: A Cocreational Perspective of Strategic Communication 102Sverre Kjetil Rød and Daniel Nilsson Other chapters addressing the cocreational perspective: Chapter 1, Chapter 2 (Part I), Chapter 9 (Part III), Chapter 17 (Part V), Chapter 21 (Part VI) Part III Strategic Communication in Business, Government, and Military 111 9 Strategic Communication in the Military: An Air Force Perspective 113Ronaldo Martinez Jr., Katrina J. Cheesman, Nicholas J. Mercurio, and Cara A. Bousie 10 Strategic Communication in the Defense Industry: Grand Strategy, Key Publics, and Tactics 129Michael F. Doble and David P. MacNeil 11 President Obama, the Affordable Care Act, and the Challenges of Strategic Political Communication 147Stephen J. Farnsworth 12 Strategic Communication for Civil Society and Nation Building: Communication for Societal Effectiveness 165Maureen Taylor and Erich J. Sommerfeldt Other chapters addressing business, government, or military: Chapter 4 (Part I), Chapters 6, 7, & 8 (Part II), Chapter 17 (Part V), Chapter 22 (Part VI) Part IV Crisis and Emergency Strategic Communication 179 13 Crisis Communication through the Lens of Strategic Communication 181W. Timothy Coombs 14 Emergency Preparation and Response for Human-Generated Disasters 194Emily Helsel, Timothy L. Sellnow, and Deanna D. Sellnow 15 Emergency Preparedness, Response, and Strategic Communication for Natural Disasters 208Matthew W. Seeger, Khairul Islam, and Henry S. Seeger Other chapters addressing crisis and emergency communication: Chapter 2 (Part I), Chapters 5 & 8 (Part II) Part V Social, Climate, and Environmental Strategic Communication 223 16 Overcome the Deficit Model by Applying the CAUSE Model to Climate Change Communication 225Katherine E. Rowan, Allison Engblom, Julia Hathaway, Rebecca Lloyd, Ian Vorster, Erin Z. Anderson, and Karen L. Akerlof 17 Organizations and Participation of Environmental Publics: A Cocreational Perspective Case Study 262Janey G. Trowbridge 18 Strategic Communication in Religious and Belief Communities: Lessons from Holocaust Re-education 273Denise Edwards-Neff 19 Gender in US Strategic Communication Research and Practice: Confronting the Master Narratives 292Linda Aldoory, Elizabeth L. Toth, and Liang Ma Other chapters addressing social and environmental issues: Chapter 2 (Part I), Chapter 7 (Part II), Chapter 22 (Part VI) Part VI Strategic Communication and Health 307 20 Strategic Communication Campaigns in Health 309Satveer Kaur-Gill and Mohan J. Dutta 21 Cocreating in the Wonderland: Communication and Patient-Oriented Healthcare in Russia 320Alexandra Endaltseva, Nelli Bachurina, and Maria Mordvinova 22 Bridging Tobacco Control Advocacy and Strategic Communication Scholarship: Tackling the Tobacco Industry’s Extrinsic Corporate Social Responsibility with Strategic Networking 336Jungmi Jun, Chang-Won Choi, and Joonkyoung Kim 23 Research and Evaluation in Strategic Communication 360Yi Grace Ji, Zifei Fay Chen, Zongchao Cathy Li, and Don W. Stacks Other chapters addressing strategic communication and health: Chapter 5 (Part II), Chapters 11 & 12 (Part III), Chapter 14 (Part IV) Index 374

Read more less

Book SynopsisOptimization of Power System Operation, 2nd Edition, offers a practical, hands-on guide to theoretical developments and to the application of advanced optimization methods to realistic electric power engineering problems. The book includes: New chapter on Application of Renewable Energy, and a new chapter on Operation of Smart Grid New topics include wheeling model, multi-area wheeling, and the total transfer capability computation in multiple areas Continues to provide engineers and academics with a complete picture of the optimization of techniques used in modern power system operation Table of ContentsPREFACE xvii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION xix ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xxi AUTHOR BIOGRAPHY xxiii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Power System Basics 2 1.2 Conventional Methods 7 1.3 Intelligent Search Methods 9 1.4 Application of The Fuzzy Set Theory 10 References 10 CHAPTER 2 POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 13 2.1 Mathematical Model of Power Flow 13 2.2 Newton-Raphson Method 15 2.3 Gauss-Seidel Method 31 2.4 P-Q Decoupling Method 33 2.5 DC Power Flow 43 2.6 State Estimation 44 Problems and Exercises 48 References 49 CHAPTER 3 SENSITIVITY CALCULATION 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Loss Sensitivity Calculation 52 3.3 Calculation of Constrained Shift Sensitivity Factors 56 3.4 Perturbation Method for Sensitivity Analysis 68 3.5 Voltage Sensitivity Analysis 71 3.6 Real-Time Application of the Sensitivity Factors 73 3.7 Simulation Results 74 3.8 Conclusion 86 Problems and Exercises 88 References 88 CHAPTER 4 CLASSIC ECONOMIC DISPATCH 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Input–Output Characteristics of Generator Units 91 4.3 Thermal System Economic Dispatch Neglecting Network Losses 97 4.4 Calculation of Incremental Power Losses 105 4.5 Thermal System Economic Dispatch with Network Losses 107 4.6 Hydrothermal System Economic Dispatch 109 4.7 Economic Dispatch by Gradient Method 116 4.8 Classic Economic Dispatch by Genetic Algorithm 123 4.9 Classic Economic Dispatch by Hopfield Neural Network 128 Appendix A: Optimization Methods Used in Economic Operation 132 A.1 Gradient Method 132 A.2 Line Search 135 A.3 Newton-Raphson Optimization 135 A.4 Trust-Region Optimization 136 A.5 Newton–Raphson Optimization with Line Search 137 A.6 Quasi-Newton Optimization 137 A.7 Double Dogleg Optimization 139 A.8 Conjugate Gradient Optimization 139 A.9 Lagrange Multipliers Method 140 A.10 Kuhn–Tucker Conditions 141 Problems and Exercises 142 References 143 CHAPTER 5 SECURITY-CONSTRAINED ECONOMIC DISPATCH 145 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Linear Programming Method 145 5.3 Quadratic Programming Method 157 5.4 Network Flow Programming Method 162 5.5 Nonlinear Convex Network Flow Programming Method 183 5.6 Two-Stage Economic Dispatch Approach 197 5.7 Security Constrained Economic Dispatch by Genetic Algorithms 201 Appendix A: Network Flow Programming 202 A.1 The Transportation Problem 203 A.2 Dijkstra Label-Setting Algorithm 209 Problems and Exercises 210 References 212 CHAPTER 6 MULTIAREAS SYSTEM ECONOMIC DISPATCH 215 6.1 Introduction 215 6.2 Economy of Multiareas Interconnection 215 6.3 Wheeling 220 6.4 Multiarea Wheeling 225 6.5 Maed Solved by Nonlinear Convex Network Flow Programming 226 6.6 Nonlinear Optimization Neural Network Approach 235 6.7 Total Transfer Capability Computation in Multiareas 244 Appendix A: Comparison of Two Optimization Neural Network Models 248 A.1 For Proposed Neural Network M-9 248 A.2 For Neural Network M-10 in Reference [27] 249 Problems and Exercises 250 References 251 CHAPTER 7 UNIT COMMITMENT 253 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 Priority Method 253 7.3 Dynamic Programming Method 256 7.4 Lagrange Relaxation Method 259 7.5 Evolutionary Programming-Based Tabu Search Method 263 7.6 Particle Swarm Optimization for Unit Commitment 269 7.7 Analytic Hierarchy Process 273 Problems and Exercises 293 References 295 CHAPTER 8 OPTIMAL POWER FLOW 297 8.1 Introduction 297 8.2 Newton Method 298 8.3 Gradient Method 307 8.4 Linear Programming OPF 312 8.5 Modified Interior Point OPF 314 8.6 OPF with Phase Shifter 328 8.7 Multiple Objectives OPF 337 8.8 Particle Swarm Optimization For OPF 346 Problems and Exercises 359 References 359 CHAPTER 9 STEADY-STATE SECURITY REGIONS 365 9.1 Introduction 365 9.2 Security Corridors 366 9.3 Traditional Expansion Method 371 9.4 Enhanced Expansion Method 374 9.5 Fuzzy Set and Linear Programming 385 Appendix A: Linear Programming 391 A.1 Standard Form of LP 391 A.2 Duality 394 A.3 The Simplex Method 397 Problems and Exercises 403 References 405 CHAPTER 10 APPLICATION OF RENEWABLE ENERGY 407 10.1 Introduction 407 10.2 Renewable Energy Resources 407 10.3 Operation of Grid-Connected PV System 409 10.4 Voltage Calculation of Distribution Network 414 10.5 Frequency Impact of PV Plant in Distribution Network 417 10.6 Operation of Wind Energy [1,10–16] 420 10.7 Voltage Analysis in Power System with Wind Energy 426 Problems and Exercises 432 References 434 CHAPTER 11 OPTIMAL LOAD SHEDDING 437 11.1 Introduction 437 11.2 Conventional Load Shedding 438 11.3 Intelligent Load Shedding 440 11.4 Formulation of Optimal Load Shedding 443 11.5 Optimal Load Shedding with Network Constraints 444 11.6 Optimal Load Shedding without Network Constraints 451 11.7 Distributed Interruptible Load Shedding (DILS) 460 11.8 Undervoltage Load Shedding 467 11.9 Congestion Management 473 Problems and Exercises 480 References 481 CHAPTER 12 OPTIMAL RECONFIGURATION OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORK 483 12.1 Introduction 483 12.2 Mathematical Model of DNRC 484 12.3 Heuristic Methods 486 12.4 Rule-Based Comprehensive Approach 488 12.5 Mixed-Integer Linear-Programming Approach 492 12.6 Application of GA to DNRC 504 12.7 Multiobjective Evolution Programming to DNRC 510 12.8 Genetic Algorithm Based on Matroid Theory 515 Appendix A: Evolutionary Algorithm of Multiobjective Optimization 521 Problems and Exercises 524 References 526 CHAPTER 13 UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS IN POWER SYSTEMS 529 13.1 Introduction 529 13.2 Definition of Uncertainty 530 13.3 Uncertainty Load Analysis 530 13.4 Uncertainty Power Flow Analysis 542 13.5 Economic Dispatch with Uncertainties 545 13.6 Hydrothermal System Operation with Uncertainty 555 13.7 Unit Commitment with Uncertainties 555 13.8 VAR Optimization with Uncertain Reactive Load 561 13.9 Probabilistic Optimal Power Flow 563 13.10 Comparison of Deterministic and Probabilistic Methods 574 Problems and Exercises 575 References 576 CHAPTER 14 OPERATION OF SMART GRID 579 14.1 Introduction 579 14.2 Definition of Smart Grid 580 14.3 Smart Grid Technologies 580 14.4 Smart Grid Operation 581 14.5 Two-Stage Approach for Smart Grid Dispatch 597 14.6 Operation of Virtual Power Plants 603 14.7 Smart Distribution Grid 605 14.8 Microgrid Operation 608 14.9 A New Phase Angle Measurement Algorithm 616 Problems and Exercises 623 References 626 INDEX 629

Read more less

Book SynopsisCollege teaches you to be a good engineer. But it''s likely that your college engineering courses didn''t have time to teach you how to effectively contribute your ideas or how to transition to management or leadership. This book provides you with those missing tools. Identify patterns of behavior that don''t serve you (or your organization) well and change them Create a plan of action that will allow for personal change that will impact your professional work Hone the ways that your technical work can be seen positively inside your organization Promote the talents and skills of the team players around you Become a flexible, supportive, and positive asset Table of ContentsForeword xi A Note from the Series Editor xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 What You Learned in College is Limiting Your Growth As a Technology Professional 1 This Book is Your Safety Net 3 2 Why Should You Read a Book by Me? Or…Why is This Book Important Now? 5 A Few Words in Praise of Steven T. Cerri’s Work 7 3 If You are an Engineering or Technical Manager, Read This 11 4 Is Free Will Truly “Free”? 13 Do You Choose What You Eat? 13 A Hypothetical Situation That is Very Real 14 Personal Behavioral Subroutines 16 Limiting Beliefs and Personal Behavioral Subroutines 17 Just for Managers 17 Personal Subroutines Can Help as Well as Hinder Functionality 17 Turning Limiting Beliefs into Successes Using Gems of Wisdom 18 5 The Way You Change 19 Engineering is Easy. It is the People That are Difficult 19 Humans are Just Satellites on Earth 20 The Model of Human Behavior: The Four Stages to Action 21 What Makes an Inspiring Speech? 26 Close the Loop 27 A Real-World Example 27 Changing Behavior Requires That You Push the Right “Button” 29 How Difficult is it to Loose Weight? 30 6 The Origin of the 15 Limiting Beliefs and the 15 Gems of Wisdom 33 7 How to Use This Book and the Structure of Chapters 9 Through 23 35 Example: Chapter 9 35 Add Gem of Wisdom #1 to Your Current Map of the World 37 8 How to Add Any Gem of Wisdom to Your Map of the World 41 Steps to Add a Gem of Wisdom to Your Current Map of the World 41 9 Ideas as Identity: Career-Limiting Belief #1 45 Add Gem of Wisdom #1 to Your Current Map of the World 49 10 Being Right: Career-Limiting Belief #2 55 Add Gem of Wisdom #2 to Your Current Map of the World 59 11 What versus How: Career-Limiting Belief #3 63 Add Gem of Wisdom #3 to Your Current Map of the World 66 References 70 12 Avoiding Shoptalk: Career-Limiting Belief #4 71 Add Gem of Wisdom #4 to Your Current Map of the World 74 13 I’ll Do My Own Work: Career-Limiting Belief #5 79 Add Gem of Wisdom #5 to Your Current Map of the World 83 14 Ducking Delegation: Career-Limiting Belief #6 87 Add Gem of Wisdom #6 to Your Current Map of the World 90 15 I’ll Do What I Like: Career-Limiting Belief #7 95 Add Gem of Wisdom #7 to Your Current Map of the World 98 16 Inconsiderate Communication: Career-Limiting Belief #8 103 Add Gem of Wisdom #8 to Your Current Map of the World 106 17 Limited Visionary: Career-Limiting Belief #9 111 Add Gem of Wisdom #9 to Your Current Map of the World 114 18 Being Persistently Consistent: Career-Limiting Belief #10 119 Add Gem of Wisdom #10 to Your Current Map of the World 122 19 Pursuing Perfection: Career-Limiting Belief #11 127 Add Gem of Wisdom #11 to Your Current Map of the World 130 20 You are Not the Teacher: Career-Limiting Belief #12 135 Add Gem of Wisdom #12 to Your Current Map of the World 139 21 Withholding Expertise: Career-Limiting Belief #13 145 Add Gem of Wisdom #13 to Your Current Map of the World 149 22 Bluntness as a Virtue: Career-Limiting Belief #14 155 Add Gem of Wisdom #14 to Your Current Map of the World 159 23 The Fixer: Career-Limiting Belief #15 165 Add Gem of Wisdom #15 to Your Current Map of the World 168 24 A Parting Letter From Steven 173 Further Reading 177 Biography of Steven T. Cerri 179 Index 181

Read more less

Book SynopsisFeatures inexpensive ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller development systems available from Texas Instruments and STMicroelectronics. This book presents a hands-on approach to teaching Digital Signal Processing (DSP) with real-time examples using the ARM Cortex-M4 32-bit microprocessor. Real-time examples using analog input and output signals are provided, giving visible (using an oscilloscope) and audible (using a speaker or headphones) results. Signal generators and/or audio sources, e.g. iPods, can be used to provide experimental input signals. The text also covers the fundamental concepts of digital signal processing such as analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion, FIR and IIR filtering, Fourier transforms, and adaptive filtering. Digital Signal Processing Using the ARM Cortex-M4: Uses a large number of simple example programs illustrating DSP concepts in real-time, in an electrical engineering laboratory setting Includes exTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 ARM® CORTEX® - M4 Development Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Audio Interfaces 2 1.1.2 Texas Instruments TM4C123 LaunchPad and STM32F407 Discovery Development Kits 2 1.1.3 Hardware and Software Tools 6 Reference 7 2 Analog Input and Output 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.1.1 Sampling, Reconstruction, and Aliasing 9 2.2 TLV320AIC3104 (AIC3104) Stereo Codec for Audio Input and Output 10 2.3 WM5102 Audio Hub Codec for Audio Input and Output 12 2.4 Programming Examples 12 2.5 Real-Time Input and Output Using Polling, Interrupts, and Direct Memory Access (DMA) 12 2.5.1 I2S Emulation on the TM4C123 15 2.5.2 Program Operation 15 2.5.3 Running the Program 16 2.5.4 Changing the Input Connection to LINE IN 16 2.5.5 Changing the Sampling Frequency 16 2.5.6 Using the Digital MEMS Microphone on the Wolfson Audio Card 20 2.5.7 Running the Program 21 2.5.8 Running the Program 23 2.5.9 DMA in the TM4C123 Processor 26 2.5.10 Running the Program 30 2.5.11 Monitoring Program Execution 30 2.5.12 Measuring the Delay Introduced by DMA-Based I/O 30 2.5.13 DMA in the STM32F407 Processor 34 2.5.14 Running the Program 35 2.5.15 Measuring the Delay Introduced by DMA-Based I/O 35 2.5.16 Running the Program 46 2.6 Real-Time Waveform Generation 46 2.6.1 Running the Program 49 2.6.2 Out-of-Band Noise in the Output of the AIC3104 Codec (tm4c123_sine48_intr.c). 49 2.6.3 Running the Program 53 2.6.4 Running the Program 62 2.6.5 Running the Program 69 2.7 Identifying the Frequency Response of the DAC Using Pseudorandom Noise 70 2.7.1 Programmable De-Emphasis in the AIC3104 Codec 72 2.7.2 Programmable Digital Effects Filters in the AIC3104 Codec 72 2.8 Aliasing 78 2.8.1 Running the Program 83 2.9 Identifying the Frequency Response of the DAC Using An Adaptive Filter 83 2.9.1 Running the Program 84 2.10 Analog Output Using the STM32F407’S 12-BIT DAC 91 References 96 3 Finite Impulse Response Filters 97 3.1 Introduction to Digital Filters 97 3.1.1 The FIR Filter 97 3.1.2 Introduction to the z-Transform 99 3.1.3 Definition of the z-Transform 100 3.1.4 Properties of the z-Transform 108 3.1.5 z-Transfer Functions 111 3.1.6 Mapping from the s-Plane to the z-Plane 111 3.1.7 Difference Equations 112 3.1.8 Frequency Response and the z-Transform 113 3.1.9 The Inverse z-Transform 114 3.2 Ideal Filter Response Classifications: LP, HP, BP, BS 114 3.2.1 Window Method of FIR Filter Design 114 3.2.2 Window Functions 116 3.2.3 Design of Ideal High-Pass Band-Pass and Band-Stop FIR Filters Using the Window Method 120 3.3 Programming Examples 123 3.3.1 Altering the Coefficients of the Moving Average Filter 132 3.3.2 Generating FIR Filter Coefficient Header Files Using MATLAB 137 4 Infinite Impulse Response Filters 163 4.1 Introduction 163 4.2 IIR Filter Structures 164 4.2.1 Direct Form I Structure 164 4.2.2 Direct Form II Structure 165 4.2.3 Direct Form II Transpose 166 4.2.4 Cascade Structure 168 4.2.5 Parallel Form Structure 169 4.3 Impulse Invariance 171 4.4 Bilinear Transformation 171 4.4.1 Bilinear Transform Design Procedure 172 4.5 Programming Examples 173 4.5.1 Design of a Simple IIR Low-Pass Filter 173 Reference 216 5 Fast Fourier Transform 217 5.1 Introduction 217 5.2 Development of the FFT Algorithm with RADIX-2 218 5.3 Decimation-in-Frequency FFT Algorithm with RADIX-2 219 5.4 Decimation-in-Time FFT Algorithm with RADIX-2 222 5.4.1 Reordered Sequences in the Radix-2 FFT and Bit-Reversed Addressing 224 5.5 Decimation-in-Frequency FFT Algorithm with RADIX-4 226 5.6 Inverse Fast Fourier Transform 227 5.7 Programming Examples 228 5.7.1 Twiddle Factors 233 5.8 Frame- or Block-Based Programming 239 5.8.1 Running the Program 242 5.8.2 Spectral Leakage 244 5.9 Fast Convolution 252 5.9.1 Running the Program 256 5.9.2 Execution Time of Fast Convolution Method of FIR Filter Implementation 256 Reference 261 6 Adaptive Filters 263 6.1 Introduction 263 6.2 Adaptive Filter Configurations 264 6.2.1 Adaptive Prediction 264 6.2.2 System Identification or Direct Modeling 265 6.2.3 Noise Cancellation 265 6.2.4 Equalization 266 6.3 Performance Function 267 6.3.1 Visualizing the Performance Function 269 6.4 Searching for the Minimum 270 6.5 Least Mean Squares Algorithm 270 6.5.1 LMS Variants 272 6.5.2 Normalized LMS Algorithm 272 6.6 Programming Examples 273 6.6.1 Using CMSIS DSP Function arm_lms_f32() 280 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs new technologies are created and advances are made with the ongoing research efforts, power system harmonics has become a subject of great interest. The author presents these nuances with real-life case studies, comprehensive models of power system components for harmonics, and EMTP simulations.Trade Review“Students and professionals will definitely find this book an essential resource that will be referenced for many years.” (IEEE Electrical Engineering magazine, 1 January 2016) Table of ContentsFOREWORD xv PREFACE xix ABOUT THE AUTHOR xxi CHAPTER 1 POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS 1 1.1 Nonlinear Loads 2 1.2 Increases in Nonlinear Loads 3 1.3 Effects of Harmonics 4 1.4 Distorted Waveforms 4 1.5 Harmonics and Sequence Components 7 1.6 Harmonic Indices 9 1.7 Power Factor, Distortion Factor, and Total Power Factor 11 1.8 Power Theories 13 1.9 Amplification and Attenuation of Harmonics 27 References 28 CHAPTER 2 FOURIER ANALYSIS 31 2.1 Periodic Functions 31 2.2 Orthogonal Functions 31 2.3 Fourier Series and Coefficients 33 2.4 Odd Symmetry 35 2.5 Even Symmetry 36 2.6 Half-Wave Symmetry 37 2.7 Harmonic Spectrum 41 2.8 Complex form of Fourier Series 41 2.9 Fourier Transform 43 2.10 Dirichlet Conditions 52 2.11 Power Spectrum of a Function 54 2.12 Convolution 56 2.13 Sampled Waveform: Discrete Fourier Transform 57 2.14 Fast Fourier Transform 64 References 69 CHAPTER 3 HARMONIC GENERATION-1 71 3.1 Harmonics in Transformers 71 3.2 Energization of a Transformer 79 3.3 Delta Windings of Three-Phase Transformers 82 3.4 Harmonics in Rotating Machine Windings 92 3.5 Cogging and Crawling of Induction Motors 97 3.6 Synchronous Generators 102 3.7 Saturation of Current Transformers 104 3.8 Ferroresonance 105 3.9 Power Capacitors 111 3.10 Transmission Lines 112 References 112 CHAPTER 4 HARMONIC GENERATION-II 115 4.1 Static Power Converters 115 4.2 Single-Phase Bridge Circuit 115 4.3 Reactive Power Requirements of Converters 122 4.4 Three-Phase Bridge Circuit 124 4.5 Harmonics on Output (DC) Side 133 4.6 Inverter Operation 135 4.7 Diode Bridge Converters 139 4.8 Switch-Mode Power (SMP) Supplies 142 4.9 Home Appliances 143 4.10 Arc Furnaces 144 4.11 Cycloconverters 147 4.12 Thyristor-Controlled Reactor 150 4.13 Pulse Width Modulation 154 4.14 Voltage Source Converters 158 4.15 Wind Power Generation 162 4.16 Fluorescent Lighting 165 4.17 Adjustable Speed Drives 167 4.18 Pulse Burst Modulation 174 4.19 Chopper Circuits and Electric Traction 175 4.20 Slip Frequency Recovery Schemes 177 4.21 Power Semiconductor Devices 178 References 181 CHAPTER 5 INTERHARMONICS AND FLICKER 183 5.1 Interharmonics 183 5.2 Sources of Interharmonics 183 5.3 Arc Furnaces 192 5.4 Effects of Interharmonics 196 5.5 Reduction of Interharmonics 198 5.6 Flicker 198 5.7 Flicker Testing 202 5.8 Control of Flicker 205 5.9 Tracing Methods of Flicker and Interharmonics 208 5.10 Torsional Analysis 210 5.11 Subsynchronous Resonance 217 References 225 CHAPTER 6 HARMONIC REDUCTION AT THE SOURCE 229 6.1 Phase Multiplication 230 6.2 Varying Topologies 230 6.3 Harmonic Cancellation: Commercial Loads 232 6.4 Input Reactors to the PWM ASDs 235 6.5 Active Filters 237 6.6 Active Current Shaping 248 6.7 Hybrid Connections of Active and Passive Filters 251 6.8 Impedance Source Inverters 255 6.9 Matrix Converters 259 6.10 Mutilevel Inverters 262 6.11 Switching Algorithms for Harmonic Control 270 6.12 Theory of Resultants of Polynomials 271 References 277 CHAPTER 7 ESTIMATION AND MEASUREMENTS OF HARMONICS 281 7.1 Waveform without Ripple Content 282 7.2 Waveform with Ripple Content 288 7.3 Phase Angle of Harmonics 298 7.4 Measurements of Harmonics 304 7.5 Measuring Equipment 309 7.6 Transducers for Harmonic Measurements 312 7.7 Characterizing Measured Data 314 7.8 Probabilistic Concepts 316 7.9 Summation of Harmonic Vectors with Random Angles 323 7.10 Central Limit Theorem 326 7.11 Kalman Filtering 326 References 329 CHAPTER 8 EFFECTS OF HARMONICS 331 8.1 Rotating Machines 332 8.2 Effect of Negative Sequence Currents on Synchronous Generators 335 8.3 Insulation Stresses 337 8.4 Transformers 345 8.5 Cables 359 8.6 Capacitors 361 8.7 Voltage Notching 362 8.8 EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) 363 8.9 Overloading of Neutral 367 8.10 Protective Relays and Meters 369 8.11 Circuit Breakers and Fuses 372 8.12 Telephone Influence Factor 372 References 377 CHAPTER 9 HARMONIC RESONANCE 379 9.1 Two-Port Networks 379 9.2 Resonance in Series and Parallel RLC Circuits 383 9.3 Practical LC Tank Circuit 391 9.4 Reactance Curves 396 9.5 Foster's Networks 397 9.6 Harmonic Resonance 400 9.7 Harmonic Resonance in a Distribution System 404 9.8 Elusiveness of Resonance Problems 405 9.9 Resonance Due to Single-Tuned Filters 408 9.10 Switched Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement 410 9.11 Secondary Resonance 411 9.12 Multiple Resonances in a Distribution Feeder 415 9.13 Part-Winding Resonance in Transformer Windings 416 9.14 Composite Resonance 419 9.15 Resonance in Transmission Lines 421 9.16 Zero Sequence Resonance 421 9.17 Factors Affecting Harmonic Resonance 423 References 424 CHAPTER 10 HARMONIC DISTORTION LIMITS ACCORDING TO STANDARDS 427 10.1 Standards for Limitation of Harmonics 427 10.2 IEEE 519 Harmonic Current and Voltage Limits 429 10.3 Point of Common Coupling (PCC) 432 10.4 Applying IEEE 519 Harmonic Distortion Limits 433 10.5 Time Varying Characteristics of Harmonics 435 10.6 IEC Harmonic Current Emission Limits 436 10.7 Voltage Quality 440 10.8 Commutation Notches 444 10.9 Applying Limits to Practical Power Systems 449 References 450 CHAPTER 11 APPLICATION OF SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS 453 11.1 Shunt Capacitor Banks 453 11.2 Location of Shunt Capacitors 458 11.3 Ratings of Capacitors 459 11.4 Shunt Capacitor Bank Arrangements 465 11.5 Fusing 468 11.6 Connections of Banks 476 11.7 Unbalance Detection 479 11.8 Destabilizing Effect of Capacitor Banks 481 11.9 Switching Transients of Capacitor Banks 483 11.10 Control of Switching Transients 486 11.11 Switching Capacitors with Motors 489 11.12 Switching Devices 490 11.13 Switching Controls 498 References 501 CHAPTER 12 MODELING OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR HARMONIC ANALYSIS 503 12.1 Transmission Lines 503 12.2 Cables 532 12.3 Zero Sequence Impedance of OH Lines and Cables 538 12.4 Filter Reactors 539 12.5 Transformers 540 12.6 Induction Motors 554 12.7 Synchronous Generators 556 12.8 Load Models 557 12.9 System Impedance 559 12.10 Three-Phase Models 561 12.11 Uncharacteristic Harmonics 563 12.12 Converters 564 References 566 CHAPTER 13 HARMONIC MODELING OF SYSTEMS 569 13.1 Electrical Power Systems 569 13.2 Extent of Network Modeling 572 13.3 Impact of Loads and Generation 573 13.4 Short-Circuit and Fundamental Frequency Load Flow Calculations 574 13.5 Industrial Systems 578 13.6 Distribution Systems 582 13.7 Transmission Systems 589 13.8 Compensation of Transmission Lines 593 13.9 Commercial Buildings 598 13.10 Residential Loads 599 13.11 HVDC Transmission 599 References 605 CHAPTER 14 HARMONIC PROPAGATION 607 14.1 Harmonic Analysis Methods 608 14.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 608 14.3 Frequency Scan 610 14.4 Voltage Scan 611 14.5 Harmonic Analysis Methods 612 14.6 Time Domain Analysis 620 14.7 Sensitivity Methods 620 14.8 Unbalanced AC System and HVDC Link 622 14.9 Hybrid Frequency and Time Domain Concept 623 14.10 Probabilistic Concepts 626 14.11 Computer-Based Programs 631 14.12 Harmonic Analyses of a Large Industrial System 632 14.13 Long Transmission Line 653 14.14 34.5 kV UG Cable 673 14.15 5-Bus Transmission System 673 References 682 CHAPTER 15 PASSIVE FILTERS 685 15.1 Filter Types 685 15.2 Single-Tuned Filters 690 15.3 Harmonic Filter Detuning and Unbalance 699 15.4 Relations in an ST Filter 699 15.5 Selection of Q Factor 701 15.6 Double-Tuned Filter 702 15.7 Bandpass Filters 704 15.8 Damped Filters 705 15.9 Type C Filter 710 15.10 Zero Sequence Traps 716 15.11 Series-Type Low-Pass Filter 717 15.12 Transfer Function Approach for Filter Designs 718 15.13 Optimization Techniques of Filter Designs 723 15.14 Genetic Algorithms for Filter Designs 728 15.15 HVDC-DC Filters 731 15.16 Limitations of Passive Filters 734 15.17 Flowchart for Design of Filters 735 15.18 Filter Components 735 15.19 Failure of Harmonic Filters 741 References 741 CHAPTER 16 PRACTICAL PASSIVE FILTER DESIGNS 745 16.1 Study 1: Small Distribution System with Major Six-Pulse Loads 745 16.2 Study 2: Filters for Arc Furnance Loads 756 16.3 Study 3: Filters for Two 8000-Hp ID Fan Drives 770 16.4 Study 4: Double-Tuned filter on a Three-Winding Transformer 782 16.5 Study 5: PV Solar Generation Plant 785 16.6 Study 6: Impact of Harmonics at a Distance 799 16.7 Study 7: Wind Generation Farm 804 INDEX 829

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xvi 1 Body Sensor Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Background 1 1.3 Typical m‐Health System Architecture 4 1.4 Hardware Architecture of a Sensor Node 6 1.5 Communication Medium 7 1.6 Power Consumption Considerations 7 1.7 Communication Standards 8 1.8 Network Topologies 10 1.9 Commercial Sensor Node Platforms 13 1.10 Biophysiological Signals and Sensors 16 1.11 BSN Application Domains 17 1.12 Summary 20 References 20 2 BSN Programming Frameworks 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Developing BSN Applications 25 2.2.1 Application‐ and Platform‐Specific Programming 26 2.2.2 Automatic Code Generation 28 2.2.3 Middleware‐Based Programming 28 2.2.4 Programming Approaches Comparison 30 2.3 Programming Abstractions 31 2.4 Requirements for BSN Frameworks 34 2.5 BSN Programming Frameworks 37 2.5.1 Titan 38 2.5.2 CodeBlue 38 2.5.3 RehabSPOT 38 2.5.4 SPINE 39 2.5.5 SPINE2 39 2.5.6 C‐SPINE 39 2.5.7 MAPS 40 2.5.8 DexterNet 40 2.6 Summary 40 References 41 3 Signal Processing In‐Node Environment 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Background 46 3.3 Motivations and Challenges 46 3.4 The SPINE Framework 46 3.4.1 Architecture 47 3.4.2 Programming Perspective 51 3.4.3 Optional SPINE Modules 51 3.4.4 High‐Level Data Processing 52 3.4.5 Multiplatform Support 55 3.5 Summary 56 References 57 4 Task‐Oriented Programming in BSNs 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Background 60 4.3 Motivations and Challenges 60 4.3.1 Need for a Platform‐Independent Middleware 60 4.3.2 Challenges in Designing a Task‐Oriented Framework 61 4.4 SPINE2 Overview 62 4.5 Task‐Oriented Programming in SPINE2 63 4.6 SPINE2 Node‐Side Middleware 66 4.7 SPINE2 Coordinator 68 4.8 SPINE2 Communication Protocol 68 4.9 Developing Application in SPINE2 70 4.10 Summary 71 References 72 5 Autonomic Body Sensor Networks 73 5.1 Introduction 73 5.2 Background 73 5.3 Motivations and Challenges 74 5.4 State‐of‐the‐Art 75 5.5 SPINE‐*: Task‐Based Autonomic Architecture 76 5.6 Autonomic Physical Activity Recognition 81 5.7 Summary 84 References 85 6 Agent‐Oriented Body Sensor Networks 89 6.1 Introduction 89 6.2 Background 89 6.2.1 Agent‐Oriented Computing and Wireless Sensor Networks 89 6.2.2 Mobile Agent Platform for Sun SPOT (MAPS) 91 6.3 Motivations and Challenges 94 6.4 State‐of‐the‐Art: Description and Comparison 95 6.5 Agent‐Based Modeling and Implementation of BSNs 98 6.6 Engineering Agent‐Based BSN Applications: A Case Study 98 6.7 Summary 101 References 103 7 Collaborative Body Sensor Networks 107 7.1 Introduction 107 7.2 Background 108 7.3 Motivations and Challenges 109 7.4 State‐of‐the‐Art 110 7.5 A Reference Architecture for Collaborative BSNs 111 7.6 C‐SPINE: A CBSN Architecture 114 7.6.1 Inter‐BSN Communication 116 7.6.2 BSN Proximity Detection 117 7.6.3 BSN Service Discovery 118 7.6.4 BSN Service Selection and Activation 118 7.7 Summary 119 References 119 8 Integration of Body Sensor Networks and Building Networks 121 8.1 Introduction 121 8.2 Background 121 8.2.1 Building Sensor Networks and Systems 121 8.2.2 Building Management Framework 124 8.3 Motivations and Challenges 125 8.4 Integration Layers 127 8.5 State‐of‐the‐Art: Description and Comparison 129 8.6 An Agent‐Oriented Integration Gateway 130 8.7 Application Scenarios 133 8.7.1 In‐Building Physical Activity Monitoring 133 8.8 Summary 135 References 135 9 Integration of Wearable and Cloud Computing 139 9.1 Introduction 139 9.2 Background 140 9.2.1 Cloud Computing 140 9.2.2 Architectures for Sensor Stream Management 140 9.3 Motivations and Challenges 142 9.3.1 BSN Challenges 143 9.3.2 BSN/Cloud Computing Integration Challenges 144 9.4 Reference Architecture for Cloud‐Assisted BSNs 145 9.4.1 Sensor Data Collection 145 9.4.2 Sensor Data Management 147 9.4.3 Scalable Processing Framework 147 9.4.4 Persistent Storage 148 9.4.5 Decision‐Making Process 149 9.4.6 Open Standards and Advanced Visualization 149 9.4.7 Security 150 9.5 State‐of‐the‐Art: Description and Comparison 151 9.5.1 Integration of WSNs and Cloud Computing 151 9.5.2 Integration of BSNs and Cloud Computing 152 9.5.3 A Comparison 153 9.6 BodyCloud: A Cloud‐based Platform for Community BSN Applications 156 9.7 Engineering BodyCloud Applications 159 9.7.1 ECGaaS: Cardiac Monitoring 160 9.7.2 FEARaaS: Basic Fear Detection 162 9.7.3 REHABaaS: Remote Rehabilitation 165 9.7.4 ACTIVITYaaS: Community Activity Monitoring 166 9.8 Summary 171 References 171 10 Development Methodology for BSN Systems 177 10.1 Introduction 177 10.2 Background 177 10.3 Motivations and Challenges 180 10.4 SPINE‐Based Design Methodology 180 10.4.1 A Pattern‐Driven Application‐Level Design 181 10.4.2 System Parameters 183 10.4.3 Process Schema 184 10.5 Summary 186 References 186 11 SPINE‐Based Body Sensor Network Applications 187 11.1 Introduction 187 11.2 Background 187 11.3 Physical Activity Recognition 187 11.3.1 Related Work 188 11.3.2 A SPINE‐Based Activity Recognition System 189 11.4 Step Counter 191 11.4.1 Related Work 191 11.4.2 A SPINE‐Based Step Counter 192 11.5 Emotion Recognition 194 11.5.1 Stress Detection 194 11.5.1.1 Related Work 194 11.5.1.2 SPINE‐HRV: A Wearable System for Real‐Time Stress Detection 195 11.5.2 Fear Detection 197 11.5.2.1 Related Work 197 11.5.2.2 A SPINE‐Based Startle Reflex Detection System 198 11.6 Handshake Detection 200 11.6.1 Related Work 201 11.6.2 A SPINE‐Based Handshake Detection System 202 11.7 Physical Rehabilitation 205 11.7.1 Related Work 205 11.7.2 SPINE Motor Rehabilitation Assistant 206 11.8 Summary 208 References 208 12 SPINE at Work 213 12.1 Introduction 213 12.2 SPINE 1.x 213 12.2.1 How to Install SPINE 1.x 216 12.2.2 How to Use SPINE 217 12.2.3 How to Run a Simple Desktop Application Using SPINE1.3 220 12.2.4 SPINE Logging Capabilities 225 12.3 SPINE2 225 12.3.1 How to Install SPINE2 228 12.3.2 How to Use the SPINE2 API 230 12.3.3 How to Run a Simple Application Using SPINE2 232 Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn communication acoustics, the communication channel consists of a sound source, a channel (acoustic and/or electric) and finally the receiver: the human auditory system, a complex and intricate system that shapes the way sound is heard. Thus, when developing techniques in communication acoustics, such as in speech, audio and aided hearing, it is important to understand the timefrequencyspace resolution of hearing. This book facilitates the reader's understanding and development of speech and audio techniques based on our knowledge of the auditory perceptual mechanisms by introducing the physical, signal-processing and psychophysical background to communication acoustics. It then provides a detailed explanation of sound technologies where a human listener is involved, including audio and speech techniques, sound quality measurement, hearing aids and audiology. Key features: Explains perceptually-based audio: the authors take a detailed but accessible engineeringTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xix Preface xxi Preface to the Unfinished Manuscript of the Book xxiii Introduction 1 1 How to Study and Develop Communication Acoustics 7 1.1 Domains of Knowledge 7 1.2 Methodology of Research and Development 8 1.3 Systems Approach to Modelling 10 1.4 About the Rest of this Book 12 1.5 Focus of the Book 12 1.6 Intended Audience 13 References 14 2 Physics of Sound 15 2.1 Vibration and Wave Behaviour of Sound 15 2.1.1 From Vibration to Waves 16 2.1.2 A Simple Vibrating System 16 2.1.3 Resonance 18 2.1.4 Complex Mass–Spring Systems 19 2.1.5 Modal Behaviour 20 2.1.6 Waves 21 2.2 Acoustic Measures and Quantities 23 2.2.1 Sound and Voice as Signals 23 2.2.2 Sound Pressure 24 2.2.3 Sound Pressure Level 24 2.2.4 Sound Power 25 2.2.5 Sound Intensity 25 2.2.6 Computation with Amplitude and Level Quantities 25 2.3 Wave Phenomena 26 2.3.1 Spherical Waves 26 2.3.2 Plane Waves and the Wave Field in a Tube 27 2.3.3 Wave Propagation in Solid Materials 29 2.3.4 Reflection, Absorption, and Refraction 31 2.3.5 Scattering and Diffraction 32 2.3.6 Doppler Effect 33 2.4 Sound in Closed Spaces: Acoustics of Rooms and Halls 34 2.4.1 Sound Field in a Room 34 2.4.2 Reverberation 36 2.4.3 Sound Pressure Level in a Room 37 2.4.4 Modal Behaviour of Sound in a Room 38 2.4.5 Computational Modelling of Closed Space Acoustics 39 Summary 41 Further Reading 41 References 41 3 Signal Processing and Signals 43 3.1 Signals 43 3.1.1 Sounds as Signals 43 3.1.2 Typical Signals 45 3.2 Fundamental Concepts of Signal Processing 46 3.2.1 Linear and Time-Invariant Systems 46 3.2.2 Convolution 47 3.2.3 Signal Transforms 48 3.2.4 Fourier Analysis and Synthesis 49 3.2.5 Spectrum Analysis 50 3.2.6 Time–Frequency Representations 53 3.2.7 Filter Banks 54 3.2.8 Auto- and Cross-Correlation 55 3.2.9 Cepstrum 56 3.3 Digital Signal Processing (DSP) 56 3.3.1 Sampling and Signal Conversion 56 3.3.2 Z Transform 57 3.3.3 Filters as LTI Systems 58 3.3.4 Digital Filtering 58 3.3.5 Linear Prediction 59 3.3.6 Adaptive Filtering 62 3.4 Hidden Markov Models 62 3.5 Concepts of Intelligent and Learning Systems 63 Summary 64 Further Reading 64 References 64 4 Electroacoustics and Responses of Audio Systems 67 4.1 Electroacoustics 67 4.1.1 Loudspeakers 67 4.1.2 Microphones 70 4.2 Audio System Responses 71 4.2.1 Measurement of System Response 71 4.2.2 Ideal Reproduction of Sound 72 4.2.3 Impulse Response and Magnitude Response 72 4.2.4 Phase Response 74 4.2.5 Non-Linear Distortion 75 4.2.6 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 76 4.3 Response Equalization 76 Summary 77 Further Reading 78 References 78 5 Human Voice 79 5.1 Speech Production 79 5.1.1 Speech Production Mechanism 80 5.1.2 Vocal Folds and Phonation 80 5.1.3 Vocal and Nasal Tract and Articulation 82 5.1.4 Lip Radiation Measurements 84 5.2 Units and Notation of Speech used in Phonetics 84 5.2.1 Vowels 86 5.2.2 Consonants 86 5.2.3 Prosody and Suprasegmental Features 88 5.3 Modelling of Speech Production 90 5.3.1 Glottal Modelling 92 5.3.2 Vocal Tract Modelling 92 5.3.3 Articulatory Synthesis 94 5.3.4 Formant Synthesis 95 5.4 Singing Voice 96 Summary 96 Further Reading 97 References 97 6 Musical Instruments and Sound Synthesis 99 6.1 Acoustic Instruments 99 6.1.1 Types of Musical Instruments 99 6.1.2 Resonators in Instruments 100 6.1.3 Sources of Excitation 102 6.1.4 Controlling the Frequency of Vibration 103 6.1.5 Combining the Excitation and Resonant Structures 104 6.2 Sound Synthesis in Music 104 6.2.1 Envelope of Sounds 105 6.2.2 Synthesis Methods 106 6.2.3 Synthesis of Plucked String Instruments with a One-Dimensional Physical Model 107 Summary 108 Further Reading 108 References 108 7 Physiology and Anatomy of Hearing 111 7.1 Global Structure of the Ear 111 7.2 External Ear 112 7.3 Middle Ear 113 7.4 Inner Ear 115 7.4.1 Structure of the Cochlea 115 7.4.2 Passive Cochlear Processing 117 7.4.3 Active Function of the Cochlea 119 7.4.4 The Inner Hair Cells 122 7.4.5 Cochlear Non-Linearities 122 7.5 Otoacoustic Emissions 123 7.6 Auditory Nerve 123 7.6.1 Information Transmission using the Firing Rate 124 7.6.2 Phase Locking 126 7.7 Auditory Nervous System 127 7.7.1 Structure of the Auditory Pathway 127 7.7.2 Studying Brain Function 129 7.8 Motivation for Building Computational Models of Hearing 130 Summary 131 Further Reading 131 References 131 8 The Approach and Methodology of Psychoacoustics 133 8.1 Sound Events versus Auditory Events 133 8.2 Psychophysical Functions 135 8.3 Generation of Sound Events 135 8.3.1 Synthesis of Sound Signals 136 8.3.2 Listening Set-up and Conditions 137 8.3.3 Steering Attention to Certain Details of An Auditory Event 137 8.4 Selection of Subjects for Listening Tests 138 8.5 What are We Measuring? 138 8.5.1 Thresholds 138 8.5.2 Scales and Categorization of Percepts 140 8.5.3 Numbering Scales in Listening Tests 141 8.6 Tasks for Subjects 141 8.7 Basic Psychoacoustic Test Methods 142 8.7.1 Method of Constant Stimuli 143 8.7.2 Method of Limits 143 8.7.3 Method of Adjustment 143 8.7.4 Method of Tracking 144 8.7.5 Direct Scaling Methods 144 8.7.6 Adaptive Staircase Methods 144 8.8 Descriptive Sensory Analysis 145 8.8.1 Verbal Elicitation 147 8.8.2 Non-Verbal Elicitation 148 8.8.3 Indirect Elicitation 148 8.9 Psychoacoustic Tests from the Point of View of Statistics 149 Summary 149 Further Reading 150 References 150 9 Basic Function of Hearing 153 9.1 Effective Hearing Area 153 9.1.1 Equal Loudness Curves 155 9.1.2 Sound Level and its Measurement 156 9.2 Spectral Masking 156 9.2.1 Masking by Noise 157 9.2.2 Masking by Pure Tones 159 9.2.3 Masking by Complex Tones 159 9.2.4 Other Masking Phenomena 161 9.3 Temporal Masking 161 9.4 Frequency Selectivity of Hearing 163 9.4.1 Psychoacoustic Tuning Curves 164 9.4.2 ERB Bandwidths 166 9.4.3 Bark, ERB, and Greenwood Scales 167 Summary 169 Further Reading 169 References 169 10 Basic Psychoacoustic Quantities 171 10.1 Pitch 171 10.1.1 Pitch Strength and Frequency Range 171 10.1.2 JND of Pitch 172 10.1.3 Pitch Perception versus Duration of Sound 173 10.1.4 Mel Scale 174 10.1.5 Logarithmic Pitch Scale and Musical Scale 175 10.1.6 Detection Threshold of Pitch Change and Frequency Modulation 176 10.1.7 Pitch of Coloured Noise 176 10.1.8 Repetition Pitch 177 10.1.9 Virtual Pitch 178 10.1.10 Pitch of Non-Harmonic Complex Sounds 178 10.1.11 Pitch Theories 178 10.1.12 Absolute Pitch 179 10.2 Loudness 179 10.2.1 Loudness Determination Experiments 179 10.2.2 Loudness Level 180 10.2.3 Loudness of a Pure Tone 180 10.2.4 Loudness of Broadband Signals 182 10.2.5 Excitation Pattern, Specific Loudness, and Loudness 183 10.2.6 Difference Threshold of Loudness 185 10.2.7 Loudness versus Duration of Sound 187 10.3 Timbre 188 10.3.1 Timbre of Steady-State Sounds 189 10.3.2 Timbre of Sound Including Modulations 189 10.4 Subjective Duration of Sound 189 Summary 191 Further Reading 191 References 191 11 Further Analysis in Hearing 193 11.1 Sharpness 193 11.2 Detection of Modulation and Sound Onset 195 11.2.1 Fluctuation Strength 195 11.2.2 Impulsiveness 197 11.3 Roughness 198 11.4 Tonality 200 11.5 Discrimination of Changes in Signal Magnitude and Phase Spectra 201 11.5.1 Adaptation to the Magnitude Spectrum 201 11.5.2 Perception of Phase and Time Differences 202 11.6 Psychoacoustic Concepts and Music 206 11.6.1 Sensory Consonance and Dissonance 206 11.6.2 Intervals, Scales, and Tuning in Music 208 11.6.3 Rhythm, Tempo, Bar, and Measure 211 11.7 Perceptual Organization of Sound 212 11.7.1 Segregation of Sound Sources 213 11.7.2 Sound Streaming and Auditory Scene Analysis 214 Summary 216 Further Reading 217 References 217 12 Spatial Hearing 219 12.1 Concepts and Definitions for Spatial Hearing 219 12.1.1 Basic Concepts 219 12.1.2 Coordinate Systems for Spatial Hearing 221 12.2 Head-Related Acoustics 222 12.3 Localization Cues 226 12.3.1 Interaural Time Difference 227 12.3.2 Interaural Level Difference 228 12.3.3 Interaural Coherence 231 12.3.4 Cues to Resolve the Direction on the Cone of Confusion 232 12.3.5 Interaction Between Spatial Hearing and Vision 234 12.4 Localization Accuracy 235 12.4.1 Localization in the Horizontal Plane 235 12.4.2 Localization in the Median Plane 236 12.4.3 3D Localization 237 12.4.4 Perception of the Distribution of a Spatially Extended Source 238 12.5 Directional Hearing in Enclosed Spaces 239 12.5.1 Precedence Effect 239 12.5.2 Adaptation to the Room Effect in Localization 240 12.6 Binaural Advantages in Timbre Perception 241 12.6.1 Binaural Detection and Unmasking 241 12.6.2 Binaural Decolouration 243 12.7 Perception of Source Distance 243 12.7.1 Cues for Distance Perception 244 12.7.2 Accuracy of Distance Perception 245 Summary 246 Further Reading 246 References 246 13 Auditory Modelling 249 13.1 Simple Psychoacoustic Modelling with DFT 250 13.1.1 Computation of the Auditory Spectrum through DFT 250 13.2 Filter Bank Models 255 13.2.1 Modelling the Outer and Middle Ear 255 13.2.2 Gammatone Filter Bank and Auditory Nerve Responses 256 13.2.3 Level-Dependent Filter Banks 256 13.2.4 Envelope Detection and Temporal Dynamics 258 13.3 Cochlear Models 260 13.3.1 Basilar Membrane Models 260 13.3.2 Hair-Cell Models 261 13.4 Modelling of Higher-Level Systemic Properties 263 13.4.1 Analysis of Pitch and Periodicity 263 13.4.2 Modelling of Loudness Perception 265 13.5 Models of Spatial Hearing 265 13.5.1 Delay-Network-Based Models of Binaural Hearing 265 13.5.2 Equalization Cancellation and ILD Models 268 13.5.3 Count-Comparison Models 268 13.5.4 Models of Localization in the Median Plane 270 13.6 Matlab Examples 270 13.6.1 Filter-Bank Model with Autocorrelation-Based Pitch Analysis 270 13.6.2 Binaural Filter-Bank Model with Cross-Correlation-Based ITD Analysis 272 Summary 274 Further Reading 274 References 274 14 Sound Reproduction 277 14.1 Need for Sound Reproduction 277 14.2 Audio Content Production 279 14.3 Listening Set-ups 280 14.3.1 Loudspeaker Set-ups 280 14.3.2 Listening Room Acoustics 282 14.3.3 Audiovisual Systems 283 14.3.4 Auditory-Tactile Systems 284 14.4 Recording Techniques 284 14.4.1 Monophonic Techniques 285 14.4.2 Spot Microphone Technique 285 14.4.3 Coincident Microphone Techniques for Two-Channel Stereophony 286 14.4.4 Spaced Microphone Techniques for Two-Channel Stereophony 286 14.4.5 Spaced Microphone Techniques for Multi-Channel Loudspeaker Systems 287 14.4.6 Coincident Recording for Multi-Channel Set-up with Ambisonics 287 14.4.7 Non-Linear Time–Frequency-domain Reproduction of Spatial Sound 290 14.5 Virtual Source Positioning 293 14.5.1 Amplitude Panning 293 14.5.2 Amplitude Panning in a Stereophonic Set-up 294 14.5.3 Amplitude Panning in Horizontal Multi-Channel Loudspeaker Set-ups 295 14.5.4 3D Amplitude Panning 295 14.5.5 Virtual Source Positioning using Ambisonics 296 14.5.6 Wave Field Synthesis 296 14.5.7 Time Delay Panning 297 14.5.8 Synthesizing the Width of Virtual Sources 298 14.6 Binaural Techniques 298 14.6.1 Listening to Binaural Recordings with Headphones 299 14.6.2 HRTF Processing for Headphone Listening 299 14.6.3 Virtual Listening of Loudspeakers with Headphones 300 14.6.4 Headphone Listening to Two-Channel Stereophonic Content 301 14.6.5 Binaural Techniques with Cross-Talk-Cancelled Loudspeakers 301 14.7 Digital Audio Effects 302 14.8 Reverberators 303 14.8.1 Using Room Impulse Responses in Reverberators 304 14.8.2 DSP Structures for Reverberators 305 Summary 306 Further Reading and Available Toolboxes 306 References 307 15 Time–Frequency-domain Processing and Coding of Audio 311 15.1 Basic Techniques and Concepts for Time–Frequency Processing 311 15.1.1 Frame-Based Processing 311 15.1.2 Downsampled Filter-Bank Processing 313 15.1.3 Modulation with Tone Sequences 315 15.1.4 Aliasing 316 15.2 Time–Frequency Transforms 317 15.2.1 Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT) 318 15.2.2 Alias-Free STFT 320 15.2.3 Modified Discrete Cosine Transform (MDCT) 321 15.2.4 Pseudo-Quadrature Mirror Filter (PQMF) Bank 323 15.2.5 Complex QMF 323 15.2.6 Sub-Sub-Band Filtering of the Complex QMF Bands 325 15.2.7 Stochastic Measures of Time–Frequency Signals 325 15.2.8 Decorrelation 327 15.3 Time–Frequency-Domain Audio-Processing Techniques 328 15.3.1 Masking-Based Audio Coding 328 15.3.2 Audio Coding with Spectral Band Replication 328 15.3.3 Parametric Stereo, MPEG Surround, and Spatial Audio Object Coding 329 15.3.4 Stereo Upmixing and Enhancement for Loudspeakers and Headphones 330 Summary 332 Further Reading 332 References 332 16 Speech Technologies 335 16.1 Speech Coding 336 16.2 Text-to-Speech Synthesis 338 16.2.1 Early Knowledge-Based Text-to-Speech (TTS) Synthesis 339 16.2.2 Unit-Selection Synthesis 340 16.2.3 Statistical Parametric Synthesis 342 16.3 Speech Recognition 345 Summary 346 Further Reading 347 References 347 17 Sound Quality 349 17.1 Historical Background of Sound Quality 350 17.2 The Many Facets of Sound Quality 351 17.3 Systemic Framework for Sound Quality 352 17.4 Subjective Sound Quality Measurement 353 17.4.1 Mean Opinion Score 353 17.4.2 MUSHRA 354 17.5 Audio Quality 356 17.5.1 Monaural Quality 356 17.5.2 Perceptual Measures and Models for Monaural Audio Quality 356 17.5.3 Spatial Audio Quality 359 17.6 Quality of Speech Communication 360 17.6.1 Subjective Methods and Measures 361 17.6.2 Objective Methods and Measures 362 17.7 Measuring Speech Understandability with the Modulation Transfer Function 363 17.7.1 Modulation Transfer Function 363 17.7.2 Speech Transmission Index STI 367 17.7.3 STI and Speech Intelligibility 368 17.7.4 Practical Measurement of STI 369 17.8 Objective Speech Quality Measurement for Telecommunication 370 17.8.1 General Speech Quality Measurement Techniques 371 17.8.2 Measurement of the Perceptual Effect of Background Noise 372 17.8.3 Measurement of the Perceptual Effect of Echoes 373 17.9 Sound Quality in Auditoria and Concert Halls 374 17.9.1 Subjective Measures 374 17.9.2 Objective Measures 375 17.9.3 Percentage of Consonant Loss 377 17.10 Noise Quality 377 17.11 Product Sound Quality 378 Summary 380 Further Reading 380 References 380 18 Other Audio Applications 383 18.1 Virtual Reality and Game Audio Engines 383 18.2 Sonic Interaction Design 386 18.3 Computational Auditory Scene Analysis, CASA 387 18.4 Music Information Retrieval 387 18.5 Miscellaneous Applications 389 Summary 390 Further Reading 390 References 390 19 Technical Audiology 393 19.1 Hearing Impairments and Disabilities 393 19.1.1 Key Terminology 394 19.1.2 Classification of Hearing Impairments 395 19.1.3 Causes for Hearing Impairments 396 19.2 Symptoms and Consequences of Hearing Impairments 396 19.2.1 Hearing Threshold Shift 397 19.2.2 Distortion and Decrease in Discrimination 398 19.2.3 Speech Communication Problems 400 19.2.4 Tinnitus 400 19.3 The Effect of Noise on Hearing 401 19.3.1 Noise 401 19.3.2 Formation of Noise-Induced Hearing Loss 402 19.3.3 Temporary Threshold Shift 402 19.3.4 Hearing Protection 404 19.4 Audiometry 405 19.4.1 Pure-Tone Audiometry 405 19.4.2 Bone-Conduction Audiometry 406 19.4.3 Speech Audiometry 406 19.4.4 Sound-Field Audiometry 407 19.4.5 Tympanometry 407 19.4.6 Otoacoustic Emissions 408 19.4.7 Neural Responses 409 19.5 Hearing Aids 409 19.5.1 Types of Hearing Aids 409 19.5.2 Signal Processing in Hearing Aids 410 19.5.3 Transmission Systems and Assistive Listening Devices 414 19.6 Implantable Hearing Solutions 414 19.6.1 Cochlear Implants 414 19.6.2 Electric-Acoustic Stimulation 416 19.6.3 Bone-Anchored Hearing Aids 416 19.6.4 Middle-Ear Implants 416 Summary 416 Further Reading 417 References 417 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisEverything you need to know to take amazing photographs using your new DSLR The Nikon D5300 Digital Field Guide is filled with everything you need to know to take fantastic photos with your new Nikon.Table of ContentsIntroduction xiii About the Digital Field Guide xiv CHAPTER 1 Exploring the Nikon D5300 1 Key Components of the D5300 2 The top of the camera 2 The back of the camera 4 The front of the camera 7 The left side of the camera 8 The Viewfinder Display 10 The Information Display 14 CHAPTER 2 Nikon D5300 Essentials 21 Exposure Modes 22 Automatic modes 22 Programmed auto mode 23 Aperture-priority auto mode 24 Shutter-priority auto mode 25 Manual mode 26 Scene modes 27 Special Effects Modes 33 Night Vision 33 Color Sketch 34 Toy Camera effect 34 Miniature Effect 35 Selective Color 37 Silhouette 38 High Key 38 Low Key 38 HDR Painting 39 Metering Modes 40 Matrix metering mode 40 Center-weighted metering mode 41 Spot metering mode 42 Autofocus 42 Phase detection 42 Contrast detection 43 Focus Modes 43 Auto Servo AF mode 44 Continuous Servo AF mode 44 Single Servo AF mode 44 Manual focus mode 45 Autofocus Area Modes 45 Auto-area AF mode 46 Single-point AF mode 46 Dynamic-area AF mode 47 Release Modes 48 ISO Sensitivity 50 Auto ISO 50 Noise reduction 51 White Balance 53 The Kelvin scale 53 White balance settings 53 Picture Controls 55 File Formats, Size, and Compression 62 NEF (RAW) 63 JPEG 63 Image size 65 Image quality 66 Wi-Fi 67 GPS 69 CHAPTER 3 Setting up the Nikon D5300 71 The Playback Menu 72 Delete 72 Playback folder 73 Playback display options 74 Image review 75 Rotate tall 75 Slide show 75 DPOF print order 76 Rating 77 Select to send to smart device 77 The Shooting Menu 78 Reset shooting menu 78 Storage folder 78 Image quality 79 Image size 80 NEF (RAW) recording 80 White balance 82 Set Picture Control 84 Manage Picture Control 84 Auto distortion control 86 Color space 86 Active D-Lighting 87 High Dynamic Range 87 Long exposure NR 88 High ISO NR 88 ISO sensitivity settings 89 Release Mode 89 Multiple exposure 89 Interval timer shooting 90 Movie settings 91 The Custom Setting Menu 92 Reset custom settings 92 Custom Setting menu a: Autofocus 92 Custom Setting menu b: Exposure 94 Custom Setting menu c: Timers/AE lock 94 Custom Setting menu d: Shooting/display 96 Custom Setting menu e: Bracketing/fl ash 97 Custom Setting menu f: Controls 98 The Setup Menu 100 Format memory card 100 Monitor brightness 101 Info display format 101 Auto info display 101 Clean image sensor 102 Lock mirror up for cleaning 102 Image Dust Off ref photo 103 Flicker reduction 104 Time zone and date 104 Language 104 Auto image rotation 104 Image comment 104 Location data 105 Video mode 105 HDMI 106 Remote control 106 Wi-Fi 107 Eye-Fi upload 107 Conformity marking 107 Firmware version 107 The Retouch Menu 107 D-Lighting 109 Red-eye correction 109 Trim 110 Monochrome 110 Filter effects 111 Color balance 112 Image overlay 112 NEF (RAW) processing 113 Resize 114 Quick retouch 115 Straighten 115 Distortion control 116 Fisheye 116 Color outline 116 Color sketch 116 Perspective control 116 Miniature effect 117 Selective color 117 Edit movie 118 Recent Settings / My Menu 118 CHAPTER 4 Selecting and Using Lenses with the Nikon D5300 121 Deciphering Nikon Lens Codes 122 Lens Compatibility 123 The DX Crop Factor 125 Third-Party Lenses 127 Types of Lenses 129 Wide-angle lenses 129 Standard zoom lenses 133 Telephoto lenses 135 Close-up/Macro lenses 137 Fisheye lenses 139 CHAPTER 5 Controlling Exposure 141 Defining Exposure 142 ISO 143 Shutter speed 144 Aperture or f-stop 147 Fine-Tuning Your Exposure 150 Exposure compensation 150 Using histograms 151 CHAPTER 6 Working with Light 157 Lighting Essentials 158 The quality of light 158 Lighting direction 160 Natural Light 163 Continuous Light 165 The D5300 Built-in Flash 166 Built-in flash exposure modes 167 Flash sync modes 168 Flash Compensation 171 Light Modifiers 172 CHAPTER 7 Working with the Live View and Video Modes 175 Live View Mode 176 Focus modes 177 AF-area modes 178 Using Live View mode 180 Shooting and Editing Video 184 Frame size and frame rate 187 In-camera video editing 188 CHAPTER 8 Real-World Applications 191 Abstract Photography 192 Equipment 193 Technique 193 Action and Sports Photography 194 Equipment 195 Technique 196 Concert and Live Music Photography 198 Equipment 200 Technique 201 Macro Photography 203 Equipment 204 Technique 206 Nature and Landscape Photography 208 Equipment 209 Technique 210 Night and Low-light Photography 211 Equipment 212 Technique 214 Portrait Photography 216 Equipment 217 Technique 218 Still-life, Product, and Food Photography 220 Equipment 221 Technique 222 Street Photography 225 Equipment 225 Technique 227 CHAPTER 9 After Capture 231 Viewing Your Images 232 Downloading Your Images 234 File Management and Workflow 235 Folder structure 236 Editing 236 Filenames and metadata 237 Tonal Adjustments and Color Corrections 238 Sharing Your Images Using Wi-Fi 242 APPENDIX A General Composition Tips 245 APPENDIX B Accessories 251 Glossary 255 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks provides an overview of the key features of the 5th Generation (5G) mobile networks, discussing the motivation for 5G and the main challenges in developing this new technology.Table of ContentsContributor Biographies xiii Preface xxix Acknowledgements xxxi Introduction xxxiii 1 Drivers for 5G: The ‘Pervasive Connected World’ 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Historical Trend of Wireless Communications 2 1.3 Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G 4 1.4 5G Roadmap 5 1.5 10 Pillars of 5G 6 1.5.1 Evolution of Existing RATs 6 1.5.2 Hyperdense Small]Cell Deployment 7 1.5.3 Self]Organising Network 8 1.5.4 Machine Type Communication 8 1.5.5 Developing Millimetre]Wave RATs 8 1.5.6 Redesigning Backhaul Links 9 1.5.7 Energy Efficiency 9 1.5.8 Allocation of New Spectrum for 5G 10 1.5.9 Spectrum Sharing 10 1.5.10 RAN Virtualisation 10 1.6 5G in Europe 11 1.6.1 Horizon 2020 Framework Programme 11 1.6.2 5G Infrastructure PPP 12 1.6.3 METIS Project 13 1.6.4 5G Innovation Centre 14 1.6.5 Visions of Companies 14 1.7 5G in North America 15 1.7.1 Academy Research 15 1.7.2 Company R&D 15 1.8 5G in Asia 16 1.8.1 5G in China 16 1.8.2 5G in South Korea 19 1.8.3 5G in Japan 21 1.9 5G Architecture 23 1.10 Conclusion 24 Acknowledgements 25 References 25 2 The 5G Internet 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Internet of Things and Context]Awareness 32 2.2.1 Internet of Things 33 2.2.2 Context]Awareness 34 2.3 Networking Reconfiguration and Virtualisation Support 35 2.3.1 Software Defined Networking 36 2.3.2 Network Function Virtualisation 38 2.4 Mobility 40 2.4.1 An Evolutionary Approach from the Current Internet 40 2.4.2 A Clean]Slate Approach 45 2.5 Quality of Service Control 47 2.5.1 Network Resource Provisioning 47 2.5.2 Aggregate Resource Provisioning 49 2.6 Emerging Approach for Resource Over]Provisioning 50 2.6.1 Control Information Repository 53 2.6.2 Service Admission Control Policies 53 2.6.3 Network Resource Provisioning 53 2.6.4 Control Enforcement Functions 54 2.6.5 Network Configurations 54 2.6.6 Network Operations 55 2.7 Summary 57 Acknowledgements 57 References 58 3 Small Cells for 5G Mobile Networks 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 What are Small Cells? 64 3.2.1 WiFi and Femtocells as Candidate Small]Cell Technologies 66 3.2.2 WiFi and Femto Performance – Indoors vs Outdoors 70 3.3 Capacity Limits and Achievable Gains with Densification 73 3.3.1 Gains with Multi]Antenna Techniques 73 3.3.2 Gains with Small Cells 76 3.4 Mobile Data Demand 81 3.4.1 Approach and Methodology 81 3.5 Demand vs Capacity 81 3.6 Small]Cell Challenges 93 3.7 Conclusions and Future Directions 97 References 99 4 Cooperation for Next Generation Wireless Networks 105 4.1 Introduction 105 4.2 Cooperative Diversity and Relaying Strategies 107 4.2.1 Cooperation and Network Coding 107 4.2.2 Cooperative ARQ MAC Protocols 108 4.3 PHY Layer Impact on MAC Protocol Analysis 110 4.3.1 Impact of Fast Fading and Shadowing on Packet Reception for QoS Guarantee 111 4.3.2 Impact of Shadowing Spatial Correlation 112 4.4 Case Study: NCCARQ 113 4.4.1 NCCARQ Overview 113 4.4.2 PHY Layer Impact 114 4.5 Performance Evaluation 116 4.5.1 Simulation Scenario 116 4.5.2 Simulation Results 117 4.6 Conclusion 122 Acknowledgements 122 References 122 5 Mobile Clouds: Technology and Services for Future Communication Platforms 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 The Mobile Cloud 127 5.2.1 User Resources 129 5.2.2 Software Resources 130 5.2.3 Hardware Resources 131 5.2.4 Networking Resources 132 5.3 Mobile Cloud Enablers 133 5.3.1 The Mobile User Domain 133 5.3.2 Wireless Technologies 135 5.3.3 Software and Middleware 139 5.4 Network Coding 140 5.5 Summary 145 References 145 6 Cognitive Radio for 5G Wireless Networks 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Overview of Cognitive Radio Technology in 5G Wireless 150 6.3 Spectrum Optimisation using Cognitive Radio 152 6.4 Relevant Spectrum Optimisation Literature in 5G 152 6.4.1 Dynamic Spectrum Access 152 6.4.2 Spectrum Regulatory Policy 153 6.4.3 Marketing Policy and Model 154 6.5 Cognitive Radio and Carrier Aggregation 154 6.6 Energy]Efficient Cognitive Radio Technology 155 6.7 Key Requirements and Challenges for 5G Cognitive Terminals 156 6.7.1 5G Devices as Cognitive Radio Terminals 157 6.7.2 5G Cognitive Terminal Challenges 159 6.8 Summary 162 References 162 7 The Wireless Spectrum Crunch: White Spaces for 5G? 165 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Background 168 7.2.1 Early Spectrum Management 168 7.2.2 History of TV White Spaces 169 7.2.3 History of Radar White Spaces 171 7.3 TV White Space Technology 171 7.3.1 Standards 172 7.3.2 Approaches to White Space 173 7.4 White Space Spectrum Opportunities and Challenges 175 7.5 TV White Space Applications 178 7.5.1 Fixed Wireless Networking 180 7.5.2 Public Safety Applications 181 7.5.3 Mobile Broadband 182 7.6 International Efforts 185 7.7 Role of WS in 5G 186 7.8 Conclusion 186 References 187 8 Towards a Unified 5G Broadcast]Broadband Architecture 191 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 Background 192 8.3 Challenges to Be Addressed 195 8.3.1 The Spectrum Dimension 195 8.3.2 The Risk of Fragmentation of the Terminal Market 196 8.3.3 The Change in TV Consumer Patterns and the Need for a Flexible Approach 197 8.3.4 Business]Related Hurdles 198 8.3.5 Societal Requirement: TV Broadcasting as a Public Service Media in Europe 198 8.4 Candidate Network Architectures for a BC]BB Convergent Solution 199 8.4.1 Solution 1: Cellular Broadcasting in the TV Spectrum 200 8.4.2 Solution 2: Hybrid Network Approach – Using DVB]T2 FEFs for LTE Transmission 201 8.4.3 Solution 3: Next Generation Common Broadcasting System 201 8.5 The BC]BB Study: What Needs to Be Done 204 8.5.1 TV and Video Future Consumption Models in Europe 204 8.5.2 BC]BB Architecture Options 204 8.5.3 Large]Scale Simulation and Assessment of BC]BB Convergent Options 204 8.5.4 Feasibility Study 205 8.6 Conclusion 205 References 206 9 Security for 5G Communications 207 9.1 Introduction 207 9.2 Overview of a Potential 5G Communications System Architecture 208 9.3 Security Issues and Challenges in 5G Communications Systems 209 9.3.1 User Equipment 210 9.3.2 Access Networks 212 9.3.3 Mobile Operator’s Core Network 216 9.3.4 External IP Networks 217 9.4 Summary 218 References 219 10 SON Evolution for 5G Mobile Networks 221 10.1 Introduction 221 10.2 SON in UMTS and LTE 222 10.3 The Need for SON in 5G 231 10.4 Evolution towards Small]Cell Dominant HetNets 236 10.4.1 Towards a New SON Architecture for 5G 237 10.5 Conclusion 239 References 240 11 Green Flexible RF for 5G 241 11.1 Introduction 241 11.2 Radio System Design 242 11.2.1 Antenna Design for 5G 242 11.2.2 Passive Front]End Design Using SIW for 5G Application 254 11.2.3 RF Power Amplifiers 257 11.3 Nonlinear Crosstalk in MIMO Systems 264 11.4 Summary 269 Acknowledgements 269 References 270 12 Conclusion and Future Outlook 273 12.1 Design Drivers for Next]Generation Networks 273 12.2 5G: A Green Inter]networking Experience 274 12.2.1 Emerging Approaches to Allow Drastic Reduction in the Signalling Overhead 278 12.3 A Vision for 5G Mobile 278 12.3.1 Mobile Small Cells the Way Forward? 279 12.4 Final Remarks 282 References 282 Index 285

Read more less

Book SynopsisComputer Vision in Vehicle Technology: Land, Sea & Air Antonio M. Lopez, Universitat Autonoma de Barcelona, Spain Atsushi Imiya, Chiba University, Japan Tomas Pajdla, Czech Technical University, Prague Jose M.Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi Abbreviations and Acronyms xiii 1 Computer Vision in Vehicles 1Reinhard Klette 1.1 Adaptive Computer Vision for Vehicles 1 1.1.1 Applications 1 1.1.2 Traffic Safety and Comfort 2 1.1.3 Strengths of (Computer) Vision 2 1.1.4 Generic and Specific Tasks 3 1.1.5 Multi-module Solutions 4 1.1.6 Accuracy, Precision, and Robustness 5 1.1.7 Comparative Performance Evaluation 5 1.1.8 There Are Many Winners 6 1.2 Notation and Basic Definitions 6 1.2.1 Images and Videos 6 1.2.2 Cameras 8 1.2.3 Optimization 10 1.3 Visual Tasks 12 1.3.1 Distance 12 1.3.2 Motion 16 1.3.3 Object Detection and Tracking 18 1.3.4 Semantic Segmentation 21 1.4 Concluding Remarks 23 Acknowledgments 23 2 Autonomous Driving 24Uwe Franke 2.1 Introduction 24 2.1.1 The Dream 24 2.1.2 Applications 25 2.1.3 Level of Automation 26 2.1.4 Important Research Projects 27 2.1.5 Outdoor Vision Challenges 30 2.2 Autonomous Driving in Cities 31 2.2.1 Localization 33 2.2.2 Stereo Vision-Based Perception in 3D 36 2.2.3 Object Recognition 43 2.3 Challenges 49 2.3.1 Increasing Robustness 49 2.3.2 Scene Labeling 50 2.3.3 Intention Recognition 52 2.4 Summary 52 Acknowledgments 54 3 Computer Vision for MAVs 55Friedrich Fraundorfer 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 System and Sensors 57 3.3 Ego-Motion Estimation 58 3.3.1 State Estimation Using Inertial and Vision Measurements 58 3.3.2 MAV Pose from Monocular Vision 62 3.3.3 MAV Pose from Stereo Vision 63 3.3.4 MAV Pose from Optical Flow Measurements 65 3.4 3D Mapping 67 3.5 Autonomous Navigation 71 3.6 Scene Interpretation 72 3.7 Concluding Remarks 73 4 Exploring the Seafloor with Underwater Robots 75Rafael Garcia, Nuno Gracias, Tudor Nicosevici, Ricard Prados, Natalia Hurtos, Ricard Campos, Javier Escartin, Armagan Elibol, Ramon Hegedus and Laszlo Neumann 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Challenges of Underwater Imaging 77 4.3 Online Computer Vision Techniques 79 4.3.1 Dehazing 79 4.3.2 Visual Odometry 84 4.3.3 SLAM 87 4.3.4 Laser Scanning 91 4.4 Acoustic Imaging Techniques 92 4.4.1 Image Formation 92 4.4.2 Online Techniques for Acoustic Processing 95 4.5 Concluding Remarks 98 Acknowledgments 99 5 Vision-Based Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 100David Gerónimo, David Vázquez and Arturo de la Escalera 5.1 Introduction 100 5.2 Forward Assistance 101 5.2.1 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Forward Collision Avoidance (FCA) 101 5.2.2 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) 103 5.2.3 Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) 105 5.2.4 Vulnerable Road User Protection 106 5.2.5 Intelligent Headlamp Control 109 5.2.6 Enhanced Night Vision (Dynamic Light Spot) 110 5.2.7 Intelligent Active Suspension 111 5.3 Lateral Assistance 112 5.3.1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Keeping System (LKS) 112 5.3.2 Lane Change Assistance (LCA) 115 5.3.3 Parking Assistance 116 5.4 Inside Assistance 117 5.4.1 Driver Monitoring and Drowsiness Detection 117 5.5 Conclusions and Future Challenges 119 5.5.1 Robustness 119 5.5.2 Cost 121 Acknowledgments 121 6 Application Challenges from a Bird’s-Eye View 122Davide Scaramuzza 6.1 Introduction to Micro Aerial Vehicles (MAVs) 122 6.1.1 Micro Aerial Vehicles (MAVs) 122 6.1.2 Rotorcraft MAVs 123 6.2 GPS-Denied Navigation 124 6.2.1 Autonomous Navigation with Range Sensors 124 6.2.2 Autonomous Navigation with Vision Sensors 125 6.2.3 SFLY: Swarm of Micro Flying Robots 126 6.2.4 SVO, a Visual-Odometry Algorithm for MAVs 126 6.3 Applications and Challenges 127 6.3.1 Applications 127 6.3.2 Safety and Robustness 128 6.4 Conclusions 132 7 Application Challenges of Underwater Vision 133Nuno Gracias, Rafael Garcia, Ricard Campos, Natalia Hurtos, Ricard Prados, ASM Shihavuddin, Tudor Nicosevici, Armagan Elibol, Laszlo Neumann and Javier Escartin 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Offline Computer Vision Techniques for Underwater Mapping and Inspection 134 7.2.1 2D Mosaicing 134 7.2.2 2.5D Mapping 144 7.2.3 3D Mapping 146 7.2.4 Machine Learning for Seafloor Classification 154 7.3 Acoustic Mapping Techniques 157 7.4 Concluding Remarks 159 8 Closing Notes 161Antonio M. López References 164 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive advanced level examination of the transport theory of nanoscale devices Provides advanced level material of electron transport in nanoscale devices from basic principles of quantum mechanics through to advanced theory and various numerical techniques for electron transportCombines several up-to-date theoretical and numerical approaches in a unified manner, such as Wigner-Boltzmann equation, the recent progress of carrier transport research for nanoscale MOS transistors, and quantum correction approximationsThe authors approach the subject in a logical and systematic way, reflecting their extensive teaching and research backgroundsTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi 1 Emerging Technologies 1 1.1 Moore's Law and the Power Crisis 1 1.2 Novel Device Architectures 2 1.3 High Mobility Channel Materials 5 1.4 Two-Dimensional (2-D) Materials 7 1.5 Atomistic Modeling 8 2 First-principles calculations for Si nanostructures 12 2.1 Band structure calculations 12 2.1.1 Si ultrathin-body structures 12 2.1.2 Si nanowires 17 2.1.3 Strain effects on band structures: From bulk to nanowire 20 2.2 Tunneling current calculations through Si/SiO2/Si structures 31 2.2.1 Atomic models of Si (001)/SiO2 /Si (001) structures 32 2.2.2 Current-voltage characteristics 33 2.2.3 SiO2 thickness dependences 35 3 Quasi-ballistic Transport in Si Nanoscale MOSFETs 41 3.1 A picture of quasi-ballistic transport simulated using quantum-corrected Monte Carlo simulation 41 3.1.1 Device structure and simulation method 42 3.1.2 Scattering rates for 3-D electron gas 44 3.1.3 Ballistic transport limit 46 3.1.4 Quasi-ballistic transport 50 3.1.5 Role of elastic and inelastic phonon scattering 51 3.2 Multi-sub-band Monte Carlo simulation considering quantum confinement in inversion layers 55 3.2.1 Scattering Rates for 2-D Electron Gas 56 3.2.2 Increase in Dac for SOI MOSFETs 58 3.2.3 Simulated electron mobilities in bulk Si and SOI MOSFETs 59 3.2.4 Electrical characteristics of Si DG-MOSFETs 61 3.3 Extraction of quasi-ballistic transport parameters in Si DG-MOSFETs 64 3.3.1 Backscattering coefficient 64 3.3.2 Current drive 66 3.3.3 Gate and drain bias dependences 67 3.4 Quasi-ballistic transport in Si junctionless transistors 69 3.4.1 Device structure and simulation conditions 70 3.4.2 Influence of SR scattering 71 3.4.3 Influence of II scattering 74 3.4.4 Backscattering coefficient 75 3.5 Quasi-ballistic transport in GAA-Si nanowire MOSFETs 76 3.5.1 Device structure and 3DMSB-MC method 76 3.5.2 Scattering rates for 1-D electron gas 77 3.5.3 ID-VG characteristics and backscattering coefficient 79 4 Phonon Transport in Si Nanostructures 85 4.1 Monte Carlo simulation method 87 4.1.1 Phonon dispersion model 87 4.1.2 Particle simulation of phonon transport 88 4.1.3 Free flight and scattering 89 4.2 Simulation of thermal conductivity 91 4.2.1 Thermal conductivity of bulk silicon 91 4.2.2 Thermal conductivity of silicon thin films 94 4.2.3 Thermal conductivity of silicon nanowires 98 4.2.4 Discussion on Boundary scattering effect 100 4.3 Simulation of heat conduction in devices 102 4.3.1 Simulation method 102 4.3.2 Simple 1-D structure 103 4.3.3 FinFET structure 106 5 Carrier Transport in High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1 Quantum-corrected MC Simulation of High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1.1 Device Structure and Band Structures of Materials 112 5.1.2 Band Parameters of Si, Ge, and III-V Semiconductors 114 5.1.3 Polar-optical Phonon (POP) Scattering in III-V Semiconductors 115 5.1.4 Advantage of UTB Structure 116 5.1.5 Drive Current of III-V, Ge and Si n-MOSFETs 119 5.2 Source-drain Direct Tunneling in Ultrascaled MOSFETs 124 5.3 Wigner Monte Carlo (WMC) Method 125 5.3.1 Wigner Transport Formalism 126 5.3.2 Relation with Quantum-corrected MC Method 129 5.3.3 WMC Algorithm 131 5.3.4 Description of Higher-order Quantized Subbands 133 5.3.5 Application to Resonant-tunneling Diode 133 5.4 Quantum Transport Simulation of III-V n-MOSFETs with Multi-subband WMC (MSB-WMC) Method 138 5.4.1 Device Structure 138 5.4.2 POP Scattering Rate for 2-D Electron Gas 139 5.4.3 ID-VG Characteristics for InGaAs DG-MOSFETs 139 5.4.4 Channel Length Dependence of SDT Leakage Current 143 5.4.5 Effective Mass Dependence of Subthreshold Current Properties 144 6 Atomistic Simulations of Si, Ge and III-V Nanowire MOSFETs 151 6.1 Phonon-limited electron mobility in Si nanowires 151 6.1.1 Band structure calculations 152 6.1.2 Electron-phonon interaction 161 6.1.3 Electron mobility 162 6.2 Comparison of phonon-limited electron mobilities between Si and Ge nanowires 168 6.3 Ballistic performances of Si and InAs nanowire MOSFETs 173 6.3.1 Band structures 174 6.3.2 Top-of-the-barrier model 174 6.3.3 ID-VG characteristics 177 6.3.4 Quantum capacitances 178 6.3.5 Power-delay-product 179 6.4 Ballistic performances of InSb, InAs, and GaSb nanowire MOSFETs 181 6.4.1 Band structures 182 6.4.2 ID-VG characteristics 182 6.4.3 Power-delay-product 186 Appendix A: Atomistic Poisson equation 187 Appendix B: Analytical expressions of electron-phonon interaction Hamiltonian matrices 188 7 2-D Materials and Devices 191 7.1 2-D Materials 191 7.1.1 Fundamental Properties of Graphene, Silicene and Germanene 192 7.1.2 Features of 2-D Materials as an FET Channel 197 7.2 Graphene Nanostructures with a Bandgap 198 7.2.1 Armchair-edged Graphene Nanoribbons (A-GNRs) 199 7.2.2 Relaxation Effects of Edge Atoms 203 7.2.3 Electrical Properties of A-GNR-FETs Under Ballistic Transport 205 7.2.4 Bilayer Graphenes (BLGs) 209 7.2.5 Graphene Nanomeshes (GNMs) 214 7.3 Influence of Bandgap Opening on Ballistic Electron Transport in BLG and A-GNR-MOSFETs 215 7.3.1 Small Bandgap Regime 217 7.3.2 Large Bandgap Regime 219 7.4 Silicene, Germanene and Graphene Nanoribbons 221 7.4.1 Bandgap vs Ribbon Width 222 7.4.2 Comparison of Band Structures 222 7.5 Ballistic MOSFETs with Silicene, Germanene and Graphene nanoribbons 223 7.5.1 ID-VG Characteristics 223 7.5.2 Quantum Capacitances 224 7.5.3 Channel Charge Density and Average Electron Velocity 225 7.5.4 Source-drain Direct Tunneling (SDT) 226 7.6 Electron Mobility Calculation for Graphene on Substrates 228 7.6.1 Band Structure 229 7.6.2 Scattering Mechanisms 229 7.6.3 Carrier Degeneracy 231 7.6.4 Electron Mobility Considering Surface Optical Phonon Scattering of Substrates 232 7.6.5 Electron Mobility Considering Charged Impurity Scattering 234 7.7 Germanane MOSFETs 236 7.7.1 Atomic Model for Germanane Nanoribbon Structure 237 7.7.2 Band Structure and Electron Effective Mass 238 7.7.3 Electron Mobility 240 Appendix A: Density-of-states for Carriers in Graphene 242 References 242 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisA fully comprehensive reference combining digital communications and RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits) in one complete volume There are many books which focus on the physical implementation of the RF/analog part of transceivers, such as the CMOS design, or the signal processing involved in digital communications. However, there islittle material dedicated to transceiver architecture and system design. Similarly, much of the existing literature looks at concepts useful for dimensioning, yet offers little practical information on how to proceed for dimensioning a line-up from scratch, and on the reasons for proceeding that way. This book redresses the balance by explaining the architecture of transceivers and their dimensioning from the perspective of a RFIC architect from within industry. It bridges the gap between digital communication systems and radiofrequency integrated circuit design, covering wireless transceiver architecture and system design from Table of ContentsForeword ix Glossary xiv I Somewhere between Maxwell and Shannon 1 Chapter 1. The digital communications point of view 3 1.1 Bandpass signal representation 4 1.2 Bandpass noise representation 36 1.3 Digital modulations examples 48 1.4 First transceivers architecture 73 Chapter 2. The Electromagnetism point of view 79 2.1 Free space radiation 79 2.2 Conducted propagation 107 2.3 The propagation channel 126 Chapter 3. The wireless standards point of view 161 3.1 Medium access strategies 161 3.2 Metrics for transmitters 169 3.3 Metrics for receivers 187 II Implementation limitations 205 Chapter 4. Noise 207 4.1 Analogue electronic noises 208 4.2 Noisy devices characterization 211 4.3 LO phase noise 259 4.4 Linear EVM 294 4.5 Quantization noise 298 4.6 Analogue vs. digital worlds conversions 322 Chapter 5. Nonlinearity 345 5.1 Smooth AM-AM conversion 346 5.2 Hard AM-AM conversion 440 5.3 AM-PM conversion, memory effect 449 5.4 Baseband devices 464 Chapter 6. RF Impairments 467 6.1 Frequency conversion 468 6.2 Gain and phase imbalance 489 6.3 Mixers implementation 508 6.4 Frequency planning 540 6.5 DC offset, LO leakage 548 III Transceivers dimensioning 553 Chapter 7. Transceivers budgets 555 7.1 Considered transceiver architecture 556 7.2 Budgeting a transmitter 557 7.3 Budgeting a receiver 599 Chapter 8. Transceivers architectures 661 8.1 Transmitters 661 8.2 Receivers 717 Chapter 9. Algorithms for transceivers 735 9.1 Transmit side 735 9.2 Receive side 774 Appendix 1. Correlations 799 Appendix 2. Stationarity 809 Appendix 3. Moments of normal random vectors 815 Bibliography 821 Index 829

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn in-demand cloud computing skills from industry experts Deploying and Managing a Cloud Infrastructure is an excellent resource for IT professionals seeking to tap into the demand for cloud administrators. This book helps prepare candidates for the CompTIA Cloud+ Certification (CV0-001) cloud computing certification exam. Designed for IT professionals with 2-3 years of networking experience, this certification provides validation of your cloud infrastructure knowledge. With over 30 years of combined experience in cloud computing, the author team provides the latest expert perspectives on enterprise-level mobile computing, and covers the most essential topics for building and maintaining cloud-based systems, including: Understanding basic cloud-related computing concepts, terminology, and characteristics Identifying cloud delivery solutions and deploying new infrastructure Managing cloud technologies, services, and networks Table of ContentsIntroduction xxiii Chapter 1 Understanding Cloud Characteristics 1 Basic Terms and Characteristics 2 Elasticity 2 On-Demand Self-service/JIT 3 Templating 4 Pay as You Grow 6 Pay-as-You-Grow Theory vs. Practice 7 Chargeback 8 Ubiquitous Access 9 Metering Resource Pooling 10 Multitenancy 11 Cloud Bursting 13 Rapid Deployment 14 Object Storage Concepts 16 File-Based Data Storage 16 Object Storage 18 Structured vs. Unstructured Data 18 REST APIs 19 Summary 25 Chapter Essentials 26 Chapter 2 To Grasp the Cloud—Fundamental Concepts 27 The True Nature of the Cloud 28 Elastic 29 Massive 29 On Demand 29 Virtualized 30 Secure 30 Always Available 30 Virtualization and Scalability 31 The True Definer of Cloud Computing 32 Serving the Whole World 32 The Cloud Hypervisor 33 Type 1 and Type 2 33 Use Cases and Examples 34 Benefits of Hypervisors 35 Hypervisor Security Concerns 35 Proprietary vs. Open Source 36 Moore’s Law, Increasing Performance, and Decreasing Enterprise Usage 36 Xen Cloud Platform (Open Source) 37 KVM (Open Source) 38 OpenVZ (Open Source) 38 VirtualBox (Open Source) 39 Citrix XenServer (Proprietary) 39 VMware vSphere/ESXi (Proprietary) 39 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Hyper-V 41 Consumer vs. Enterprise Use 41 Workstation vs. Infrastructure 43 Key Benefits of Implementing Hypervisors 46 Shared Resources 46 Elasticity 46 Network and Application Isolation 47 Foundations of Cloud Computing 48 Infrastructure 48 Platform 49 Applications 50 Enabling Services 50 Summary 50 Chapter Essentials 51 Chapter 3 Within the Cloud: Technical Concepts of Cloud Computing 53 Technical Basics of Cloud and Scalable Computing 54 Defining a Data Center 55 Traditional vs. Cloud Hardware 62 Determining Cloud Data Center Hardware and Infrastructure 65 Optimization and the Bottom Line 70 The Cloud Infrastructure 78 Open Source 79 Proprietary 84 Summary 85 Chapter Essentials 86 Chapter 4 Cloud Management 87 Understanding Cloud Management Platforms 88 What It Means for Service Providers 90 Planning Your Cloud 90 Building Your Cloud 94 Running Your Cloud 95 What This Means for Customers 95 Service-Level Agreements 97 Policies and Procedures 97 Planning the Documentation of the Network and IP 98 Implementing Change Management Best Practices 100 Managing the Configuration 105 Managing Cloud Workloads 111 Managing Workloads Right on the Cloud 111 Managing Risk 112 Securing Data in the Cloud 113 Managing Devices 114 Virtualizing the Desktop 115 Enterprise Cloud Solution 116 Summary 116 Chapter Essentials 119 Chapter 5 Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring 121 Performance Concepts 122 Input/Output Operations per Second (IOPS) 123 Read vs. Write Files 124 File System Performance 125 Metadata Performance 127 Caching 130 Bandwidth 131 Throughput: Bandwidth Aggregation 132 Jumbo Frames 134 Network Latency 135 Hop Counts 136 Quality of Service (QoS) 137 Multipathing 137 Load Balancing 138 Scaling: Vertical vs. Horizontal vs. Diagonal 138 Disk Performance 140 Access Time 140 Data Transfer Rate 142 Disk Tuning 143 Swap Disk Space 144 I/O Tuning 144 Performance Management and Monitoring Tools 146 Hypervisor Configuration Best Practices 149 Impact of Configuration Changes 151 Common Issues 152 Summary 153 Chapter Essentials 154 Chapter 6 Cloud Delivery and Hosting Models 157 Private 158 Full Private Cloud Deployment Model 158 Semi-private Cloud Deployment Model 159 Public 160 Hybrid 160 Community 161 On-Premises vs. Off-Premises Hosting 161 On-Premises Hosting 162 Off-Premises Hosting 162 Miscellaneous Factors to Consider When Choosing between On- or Off-Premises Hosting 163 Comparing Total Cost of Ownership 166 Accountability and Responsibility Based on Delivery Models 168 Private Cloud Accountability 168 Public Cloud Accountability 169 Responsibility for Service Impairments 170 Accountability Categories 170 Security Differences between Models 171 Multitenancy Issues 171 Data Segregation 173 Network Isolation 173 Functionality and Performance Validation 174 On-Premises Performance 174 Off-Premises Performance 174 Types of Testing 175 Orchestration Platforms 175 Summary 177 Chapter Essentials 178 Chapter 7 Practical Cloud Knowledge: Install, Configure, and Manage 181 Setting Up the Cloud 183 Creating, Importing, and Exporting Templates and Virtual Machines 183 Creating Virtual Machine Templates 184 Importing and Exporting Service Templates 186 Installing Guest Tools 188 Snapshots and Cloning 189 Image Backups vs. File Backups 193 Virtual Network Interface Card 195 Virtual Disks 198 Virtual Switches 199 Configuring Virtual Machines for Several VLANs 201 Virtual Storage Area Network 203 Virtual Resource Migration 204 Establishing Migration Requirements 204 Migrating Storage 206 Scheduling Maintenance 208 Reasons for Maintenance 208 Virtual Components of the Cloud 209 Virtual Network Components 209 Shared Memory 210 Virtual CPU 211 Storage Virtualization 211 Summary 214 Chapter Essentials 215 Chapter 8 Hardware Management 221 Cloud Hardware Resources 222 BIOS/Firmware Configurations 222 Minimum Memory Capacity and Configuration 223 Number of CPUs 223 Number of Cores 224 NIC Quantity, Speeds, and Configurations 225 Internal Hardware Compatibility 225 Storage Media 226 Proper Allocation of Hardware Resources (Host) 227 Proper Virtual Resource Allocation (Tenant/Client) 232 Management Differences between Public, Private, and Hybrid Clouds 234 Public Cloud Management 234 Private Cloud Management 235 Hybrid Cloud Management 236 Tiering 236 Performance Levels of Each Tier 237 Policies 238 RAID Levels 238 File Systems 239 Summary 241 Chapter Essentials 242 Chapter 9 Storage Provisioning and Networking 245 Cloud Storage Concepts 246 Object Storage 246 Metadata 247 Data/Blob 248 Extended Metadata 248 Replicas 248 Policies and Access Control 248 Understanding SAN and NAS 249 Cloud vs. SAN Storage 250 Cloud Storage 251 Advantages of Cloud Storage 252 Cloud Provisioning 252 Migrating Software Infrastructure to the Cloud 253 Cloud Provisioning Security Concerns 253 Storage Provisioning 255 Network Configurations 256 Network Optimization 259 Cloud Storage Technology 260 Data Replication 261 Amazon Elastic Block Store (EBS) 262 Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) 264 OpenStack Swift 266 Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS) 266 Choosing from among These Technologies 277 Cloud Storage Gateway 278 Cloud Security and Privacy 280 Security, Privacy, and Attack Surface Area 280 Legal Issues (Jurisdiction and Data) 282 Supplier Lifetime (Vendor Lock-In) 283 Summary 284 Chapter Essentials 284 Chapter 10 Testing and Deployment: Quality Is King 287 Overview of Deployment Models 288 Private Cloud 288 Community Cloud 289 Public Cloud 289 Hybrid Cloud 290 Cloud Management Strategies 290 Private Cloud Strategies 291 Community Cloud Strategies 291 Public Cloud Strategies 292 Hybrid Cloud Strategies 292 Management Tools 293 Cloud Architecture 294 The Need for Cloud Architectures 294 Technical Benefits 295 Business Benefits 295 Cloud Deployment Options 296 Environment Provisioning 296 Deploying a Service to the Cloud 298 Deployment Testing and Monitoring 301 Creating and Deploying Cloud Services 304 Creating and Deploying a Cloud Service Using Windows Azure 305 Deploying and Managing a Scalable Web Service with Flume on Amazon EC2 309 Summary 321 Chapter Essentials 322 Chapter 11 Cloud Computing Standards and Security 323 Cloud Computing Standards 324 Why Do Standards Matter? 324 Current Ad Hoc Standards 325 Security Concepts and Tools 326 Security Threats and Attacks 326 Obfuscation 329 Access Control List 329 Virtual Private Network 330 Firewalls 330 Demilitarized Zone 333 Encryption Techniques 334 Public Key Infrastructure 335 Internet Protocol Security 336 Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security 336 Ciphers 337 Access Control Methods 338 Role-Based Access Control 338 Mandatory Access Control 338 Discretionary Access Control 339 Rule-Based Access Controls 339 Multifactor Authentication 339 Single Sign-On 339 Federation 340 Implementing Guest and Host Hardening Techniques 340 Disabling Unneeded Ports and Services 340 Secure User Credentials 343 Antivirus Software 344 Software Security Patching 344 Summary 345 Chapter Essentials 345 Chapter 12 The Cloud Makes It Rain Money: The Business in Cloud Computing 347 The Nature of Cloud Business 348 The Service Nature of the Cloud 348 Making Money with Open-Source Software 349 White Label Branding 350 Cloud Service Business Models 351 Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) 351 Platform as a Service (PaaS) 352 Software as a Service (SaaS) 353 Data as a Service (DaaS) 354 Communication as a Service (CaaS) 355 Monitoring as a Service (MaaS) 355 Business Process as a Service (BPaaS) 355 Anything as a Service (XaaS) 356 Service Model Accountability and Responsibility 356 The Enterprise Cloud 359 Enterprise Applications 359 Cloud Collaboration 360 Collaborating with Telepresence 361 Disaster Recovery 364 Preparing for Failure: Disaster Recovery Plan 365 Backup Sites and Geographical Diversity 366 Change-Over Mechanism: Failover and Failback 369 Business Continuity and Cloud Computing 369 Business Continuity in the Cloud 370 Workshifting in the Cloud 371 Bring Your Own Device 371 Summary 372 Chapter Essentials 373 Chapter 13 Planning for Cloud Integration: Pitfalls and Advantages 375 Work Optimization 376 Optimizing Usage, Capacity, and Cost 376 Which Service Model Is Best for You? 379 The Right Cloud Model 381 Private Cloud 381 Public Cloud 383 Hybrid Cloud 384 Adapting Organizational Culture for the Cloud 385 Finding Out the Current Culture 385 Mapping Out an Adaption Plan 386 Culture Adaption, Propagation, and Maintenance 387 Potholes on the Cloud Road 389 Roadblocks to Planning 389 Convincing the Board 391 Summary 394 Chapter Essentials 394 Appendix The CompTIA Cloud+ Certification Exam 397 Preparing for the Exam 398 Taking the Exam 399 Reviewing the Exam Objectives 400 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers power electronics, in depth, by presenting the basic principles and application details, which can be used both as a textbook and reference book. Introduces a new method to present power electronics converters called Power Blocks Geometry (PBG) Applicable for courses focusing on power electronics, power electronics converters, and advanced power converters Offers a comprehensive set of simulation results to help understand the circuits presented throughout the book Table of ContentsPreface xi Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Background 3 1.3 History of Power Switches and Power Converters 4 1.4 Applications of Power Electronics Converters 6 1.5 Summary 9 References 9 Chapter 2 Power Switches and Overview of Basic Power Converters 10 2.1 Introduction 10 2.2 Power Electronics Devices as Ideal Switches 11 2.2.1 Static Characteristics 12 2.2.2 Dynamic Characteristics 12 2.3 Main Real Power Semiconductor Devices 16 2.3.1 Spontaneous Conduction/Spontaneous Blocking 17 2.3.2 Controlled Conduction/Spontaneous Blocking Devices 18 2.3.3 Controlled Conduction/Controlled Blocking Devices 19 2.3.4 Spontaneous Conduction/Controlled Blocking Devices 22 2.3.5 List of Inventors of the Major Power Switches 24 2.4 Basic Converters 25 2.4.1 dc–dc Conversion 28 2.4.2 dc–ac Conversion 33 2.4.3 ac–dc Conversion 43 2.4.4 ac–dc Conversion 49 2.5 Summary 50 References 52 Chapter 3 Power Electronics Converters Processing AC Voltage and Power Blocks Geometry 56 3.1 Introduction 56 3.2 Principles of Power Blocks Geometry (PBG) 58 3.3 Description of Power Blocks 62 3.4 Application of PBG in Multilevel Configurations 67 3.4.1 Neutral-Point-Clamped Configuration 68 3.4.2 Cascade Configuration 72 3.4.3 Flying Capacitor Configuration 75 3.4.4 Other Multilevel Configurations 79 3.5 Application of PBG in ac–dc–ac Configurations 81 3.5.1 Three-Phase to Three-Phase Configurations 82 3.5.2 Single-Phase to Single-Phase Configurations 85 3.6 Summary 85 References 87 Chapter 4 Neutral-Point-Clamped Configuration 88 4.1 Introduction 88 4.2 Three-Level Configuration 89 4.3 PWM Implementation (Half-Bridge Topology) 93 4.4 Full-Bridge Topologies 95 4.5 Three-Phase NPC Converter 98 4.6 Nonconventional Arrangements by Using Three-Level Legs 101 4.7 Unbalanced Capacitor Voltage 108 4.8 Four-Level Configuration 112 4.9 PWM Implementation (Four-Level Configuration) 115 4.10 Full-Bridge and Other Circuits (Four-Level Configuration) 118 4.11 Five-Level Configuration 119 4.12 Summary 124 References 124 Chapter 5 Cascade Configuration 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 Single H-Bridge Converter 126 5.3 PWM Implementation of a Single H-Bridge Converter 129 5.4 Three-Phase Converter—One H-Bridge Converter Per Phase 140 5.5 Two H-Bridge Converters 144 5.6 PWM Implementation of Two Cascade H-Bridges 146 5.7 Three-Phase Converter—Two Cascade H-Bridges Per Phase 149 5.8 Two H-Bridge Converters (Seven- and Nine-Level Topologies) 162 5.9 Three H-Bridge Converters 164 5.10 Four H-Bridge Converters and Generalization 169 5.11 Summary 169 References 170 Chapter 6 Flying-Capacitor Configuration 172 6.1 Introduction 172 6.2 Three-Level Configuration 173 6.3 PWM Implementation (Half-Bridge Topology) 177 6.4 Flying Capacitor Voltage Control 179 6.5 Full-Bridge Topology 181 6.6 Three-Phase FC Converter 183 6.7 Nonconventional FC Converters with Three-Level Legs 186 6.8 Four-Level Configuration 189 6.9 Generalization 196 6.10 Summary 197 References 198 Chapter 7 Other Multilevel Configurations 199 7.1 Introduction 199 7.2 Nested Configuration 200 7.3 Topology with Magnetic Element at the Output 205 7.4 Active-Neutral-Point-Clamped Converters 211 7.5 More Multilevel Converters 214 7.6 Summary 218 References 219 Chapter 8 Optimized PWM Approach 221 8.1 Introduction 221 8.2 Two-Leg Converter 222 8.2.1 Model 222 8.2.2 PWM Implementation 223 8.2.3 Analog and Digital Implementation 228 8.2.4 Influence of 𝜇 for PWM Implementation 231 8.3 Three-Leg Converter and Three-Phase Load 233 8.3.1 Model 233 8.3.2 PWM Implementation 235 8.3.3 Analog and Digital Implementation 236 8.3.4 Influence of 𝜇 for PWM Implementation in a Three-Leg Converter 236 8.3.5 Influence of the Three-Phase Machine Connection over Inverter Variables 238 8.4 Space Vector Modulation (SVPWM) 243 8.5 Other Configurations with CPWM 247 8.5.1 Three-Leg Converter—Two-Phase Machine 247 8.5.2 Four-Leg Converter 249 8.6 Nonconventional Topologies with CPWM 252 8.6.1 Inverter with Split-Wound Coupled Inductors 252 8.6.2 Z-Source Converter 254 8.6.3 Open-End Winding Motor Drive System 257 8.7 Summary 261 References 261 Chapter 9 Control Strategies for Power Converters 264 9.1 Introduction 264 9.2 Basic Control Principles 265 9.3 Hysteresis Control 271 9.3.1 Application of the Hysteresis Control for dc Motor Drive 275 9.3.2 Hysteresis Control for Regulating an ac Variable 278 9.4 Linear Control—dc Variable 279 9.4.1 Proportional Controller: RL Load 279 9.4.2 Proportional Controller: dc Motor Drive System 280 9.4.3 Proportional-Integral Controller: RL Load 283 9.4.4 Proportional-Integral Controller: dc Motor 285 9.4.5 Proportional-Integral-Derivative Controller: dc Motor 286 9.5 Linear Control—ac Variable 288 9.6 Cascade Control Strategies 289 9.6.1 Rectifier Circuit: Voltage-Current Control 289 9.6.2 Motor Drive: Speed-Current Control 290 9.7 Summary 293 References 293 Chapter 10 Single-Phase to Single-Phase Back-to-Back Converter 295 10.1 Introduction 295 10.2 Full-Bridge Converter 296 10.2.1 Model 296 10.2.2 PWM Strategy 297 10.2.3 Control Approach 298 10.2.4 Power Analysis 299 10.2.5 dc-link Capacitor Voltage 301 10.2.6 Capacitor Bank Design 304 10.3 Topology with Component Count Reduction 307 10.3.1 Model 307 10.3.2 PWM Strategy 308 10.3.3 dc-link Voltage Requirement 309 10.3.4 Half-Bridge Converter 310 10.4 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Parallel) 310 10.4.1 Model 311 10.4.2 PWM Strategy 315 10.4.3 Control Strategy 316 10.5 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Series) 318 10.6 Summary 321 References 321 Chapter 11 Three-Phase to Three-Phase and Other Back-to-Back Converters 324 11.1 Introduction 324 11.2 Full-Bridge Converter 325 11.2.1 Model 325 11.2.2 PWM Strategy 327 11.2.3 Control Approach 328 11.3 Topology with Component Count Reduction 330 11.3.1 Model 330 11.3.2 PWM Strategies 331 11.3.3 dc-link Voltage Requirement 332 11.3.4 Half-Bridge Converter 332 11.4 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Parallel) 332 11.4.1 Model 333 11.4.2 PWM 338 11.4.3 Control Strategies 339 11.5 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Series) 340 11.6 Other Back-To-Back Converters 340 11.7 Summary 344 References 344 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisPractical guide that can be used by executives to make well-informed decisions on cybersecurity issues to better protect their business Emphasizes, in a direct and uncomplicated way, how executives can identify, understand, assess, and mitigate risks associated with cybersecurity issues Covers ''What to Do When You Get Hacked?'' including Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery planning, Public Relations, Legal and Regulatory issues, and Notifications and Disclosures Provides steps for integrating cybersecurity into Strategy; Policy and Guidelines; Change Management and Personnel Management Identifies cybersecurity best practices that executives can and should use both in the office and at home to protect their vital information Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxiii 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Defining Cybersecurity 1 1.2 Cybersecurity is a Business Imperative 2 1.3 Cybersecurity is an Executive-Level Concern 4 1.4 Questions to Ask 4 1.5 Views of Others 7 1.6 Cybersecurity is a Full-Time Activity 7 2.0 Why Be Concerned? 9 2.1 A Classic Hack 9 2.2 Who Wants Your Fortune? 12 2.3 Nation-State Threats 13 2.3.1 China 13 2.3.2 Don’t Think that China is the Only One 17 2.4 Cybercrime is Big Business 20 2.4.1 Mercenary Hackers 20 2.4.2 Hacktivists 25 2.4.3 The Insider Threat 26 2.4.4 Substandard Products and Services 29 2.5 Summary 36 3.0 Managing Risk 37 3.1 Who Owns Risk in Your Business? 37 3.2 What are Your Risks? 38 3.2.1 Threats to Your Intellectual Property and Trade Secrets 38 3.2.2 Technical Risks 42 3.2.3 Human Risks 47 3.3 Calculating Your Risk 54 3.3.1 Quantitative Risk Assessment 55 3.3.2 Qualitative Risk Assessment 63 3.3.3 Risk Decisions 71 3.4 Communicating Risk 77 3.4.1 Communicating Risk Internally 78 3.4.2 Regulatory Communications 79 3.4.3 Communicating with Shareholders 86 3.5 Organizing for Success 89 3.5.1 Risk Management Committee 89 3.5.2 Chief Risk Officers 90 3.6 Summary 91 4.0 Build Your Strategy 95 4.1 How Much “Cybersecurity” Do I Need? 95 4.2 The Mechanics of Building Your Strategy 97 4.2.1 Where are We Now? 99 4.2.2 What do We have to Work with? 103 4.2.3 Where do We Want to be? 104 4.2.4 How do We Get There? 107 4.2.5 Goals and Objectives 108 4.3 Avoiding Strategy Failure 111 4.3.1 Poor Plans, Poor Execution 111 4.3.2 Lack of Communication 113 4.3.3 Resistance to Change 114 4.3.4 Lack of Leadership and Oversight 117 4.4 Ways to Incorporate Cybersecurity into Your Strategy 118 4.4.1 Identify the Information Critical to Your Business 119 4.4.2 Make Cybersecurity Part of Your Culture 119 4.4.3 Consider Cybersecurity Impacts in Your Decisions 119 4.4.4 Measure Your Progress 120 4.5 Plan For Success 121 4.6 Summary 123 5.0 Plan For Success 125 5.1 Turning Vision into Reality 125 5.1.1 Planning for Excellence 127 5.1.2 A Plan of Action 128 5.1.3 Doing Things 131 5.2 Policies Complement Plans 140 5.2.1 Great Cybersecurity Policies for Everyone 140 5.2.2 Be Clear about Your Policies and Who Owns Them 188 5.3 Procedures Implement Plans 190 5.4 Exercise Your Plans 191 5.5 Legal Compliance Concerns 193 5.6 Auditing 195 5.7 Summary 196 6.0 Change Management 199 6.1 Why Managing Change is Important 199 6.2 When to Change? 201 6.3 What is Impacted by Change? 205 6.4 Change Management and Internal Controls 209 6.5 Change Management as a Process 214 6.5.1 The Touhill Change Management Process 215 6.5.2 Following the Process 216 6.5.3 Have a Plan B, Plan C, and maybe a Plan D 220 6.6 Best Practices in Change Management 220 6.7 Summary 224 7.0 Personnel Management 227 7.1 Finding the Right Fit 227 7.2 Creating the Team 229 7.2.1 Picking the Right Leaders 230 7.2.2 Your Cybersecurity Leaders 233 7.3 Establishing Performance Standards 237 7.4 Organizational Considerations 240 7.5 Training for Success 242 7.5.1 Information Every Employee Ought to Know 242 7.5.2 Special Training for Executives 246 7.6 Special Considerations for Critical Infrastructure Protection 249 7.7 Summary 258 8.0 Performance Measures 261 8.1 Why Measure? 261 8.2 What to Measure? 267 8.2.1 Business Drivers 267 8.2.2 Types of Metrics 271 8.3 Metrics and the C-Suite 272 8.3.1 Considerations for the C-Suite 273 8.3.2 Questions about Cybersecurity Executives Should Ask 275 8.4 The Executive Cybersecurity Dashboard 277 8.4.1 How Vulnerable Are We? 277 8.4.2 How Effective Are Our Systems and Processes? 282 8.4.3 Do We Have the Right People, Are They Properly Trained, and Are They Following Proper Procedures? 286 8.4.4 Am I Spending the Right Amount on Security? 287 8.4.5 How Do We Compare to Others? 288 8.4.6 Creating Your Executive Cybersecurity Dashboard 289 8.5 Summary 291 9.0 What To Do When You Get Hacked 293 9.1 Hackers Already Have You Under Surveillance 293 9.2 Things to do Before it’s Too Late: Preparing for the Hack 295 9.2.1 Back Up Your Information 296 9.2.2 Baseline and Define What is Normal 296 9.2.3 Protect Yourself with Insurance 297 9.2.4 Create Your Disaster Recovery and Business Continuity Plan 298 9.3 What to do When Bad Things Happen: Implementing Your Plan 299 9.3.1 Item 1: Don’t Panic 300 9.3.2 Item 2: Make Sure You’ve Been Hacked 301 9.3.3 Item 3: Gain Control 302 9.3.4 Item 4: Reset All Passwords 303 9.3.5 Item 5: Verify and Lock Down All Your External Links 304 9.3.6 Item 6: Update and Scan 305 9.3.7 Item 7: Assess the Damage 305 9.3.8 Item 8: Make Appropriate Notifications 307 9.3.9 Item 9: Find Out Why It Happened and Who Did It 309 9.3.10 Item 10: Adjust Your Defenses 310 9.4 Foot Stompers 310 9.4.1 The Importance of Public Relations 310 9.4.2 Working with Law Enforcement 315 9.4.3 Addressing Liability 317 9.4.4 Legal Issues to Keep an Eye On 318 9.5 Fool Me Once… 319 9.6 Summary 320 10.0 Boardroom Interactions 323 Appendix A: Policies 347 Appendix B: General Rules for Email Etiquette: Sample Training Handout 357 Glossary 361 Select Bibliography 371 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines the governance challenges of cybersecurity through twelve, real-world case studies Through twelve detailed case studies, this superb collection provides an overview of the ways in which government officials and corporate leaders across the globe are responding to the challenges of cybersecurity. Drawing perspectives from industry, government, and academia, the book incisively analyzes the actual issues, and provides a guide to the continually evolving cybersecurity ecosystem. It charts the role that corporations, policymakers, and technologists are playing in defining the contours of our digital world. Rewired: Cybersecurity Governance places great emphasis on the interconnection of law, policy, and technology in cyberspace. It examines some of the competing organizational efforts and institutions that are attempting to secure cyberspace and considers the broader implications of the in-place and unfolding effortstracing how different notions of cTable of ContentsNotes on Contributors xi Acknowledgments xv Introduction xvii 1 Cybersecurity Information‐Sharing Governance Structures: An Ecosystem of Diversity, Trust, and Trade‐offs 1Elaine Sedenberg and Jim Dempsey 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Taxonomy of Information‐sharing Governance Structures and Policies 4 1.2.1 Government‐centric Sharing Models 4 1.2.2 Government‐Prompted, Industry‐Centric Sharing Models 8 1.2.3 Corporate‐initiated, Peer‐based Groups 10 1.2.4 Small, Highly Vetted, Individual‐based Groups 10 1.2.5 Open Communities and Platforms 11 1.2.6 Proprietary Products and Commercialized Services 12 1.3 Discussion and Conclusions 13 1.3.1 Trust and the Trade‐offs 13 1.3.2 The Ecosystem and the Role of the Federal Government 14 Acknowledgments 15 Notes 15 2 Cybersecurity Governance in the GCC 19James Shires 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Why the GCC? 20 2.3 Key Cybersecurity Incidents 21 2.4 Government Organizations 22 2.5 Strategies, Laws, and Standards 24 2.6 The Cybersecurity Industry 26 2.7 Conclusion 28 Acknowledgments 29 Notes 29 3 The United Kingdom’s Emerging Internet of Things (IoT) Policy Landscape 37Leonie Maria Tanczer, Irina Brass, Miles Elsden, Madeline Carr, and Jason Blackstock 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 The IoT’s Risks and Uncertainties 39 3.3 Adaptive Policymaking in the Context of IoT 41 3.4 The UK Policy Landscape 42 3.5 The IoT and its Governance Challenges 46 3.6 Conclusion 48 Notes 49 4 Birds of a Feather: Strategies for Collective Cybersecurity in the Aviation Ecosystem 57Emilian Papadopoulos and Evan Sills 4.1 Introduction: The Challenge of Ecosystem Risk 57 4.1.1 Aviation Is a National and Global Target 58 4.1.1.1 The Cyber Harm 59 4.1.1.2 Economic Harm 60 4.1.1.3 Political/Governmental Harm 60 4.1.1.4 Reputational Harm 60 4.1.1.5 Physical Harm 61 4.1.1.6 Psychological and Emotional Harm 61 4.1.2 Domestic and International Challenges of Aviation Governance 61 4.2 Progress So Far 63 4.2.1 The AIAA’s Decision Paper, “The Connectivity Challenge: Protecting Critical Assets in a Networked World” (August 2013) 64 4.2.2 The Aviation Information Sharing and Analysis Center (A‐ISAC) (September 2014) 66 4.2.3 The Civil Aviation Cybersecurity Action Plan (December 2014) 66 4.2.4 Connecting the Dots on Connectivity (2015) 67 4.2.5 Hackers Allege Aircraft Vulnerabilities (2015) 67 4.2.6 United Airlines Opens Bug Bounty Program (2015) 68 4.2.7 Aviation Security World Conference (2015) 68 4.2.8 Conferences and Organizations Mature (2015 and Beyond) 69 4.2.9 Industry Takes the Lead (2017) 70 4.3 Aviation’s Tools for Cyber Risk Governance 70 4.4 The Path Forward 71 4.4.1 Collective Third‐Party Risk Management 71 4.4.2 Secure Design 72 4.4.3 Information Sharing, “Plus” 73 4.4.4 International Norms and Standards 74 4.5 Conclusion 75 Notes 75 5 An Incident‐Based Conceptualization of Cybersecurity Governance 81Jacqueline Eggenschwiler 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Conceptualizing Cybersecurity Governance 82 5.3 Case Studies 84 5.3.1 RUAG 84 5.3.1.1 Background 84 5.3.1.2 Events 85 5.3.1.3 Learnings 86 5.3.2 The Conficker Working Group 86 5.3.2.1 Background 86 5.3.2.2 Events 86 5.3.2.3 Learnings 88 5.3.3 Symantec’s Cybersecurity Practices 89 5.3.3.1 Background 89 5.3.3.2 Events 89 5.3.3.3 Learnings 89 5.4 Utility and Limitations 90 5.5 Conclusion 92 Notes 92 6 Cyber Governance and the Financial Services Sector: The Role of Public–Private Partnerships 97Valeria San Juan and Aaron Martin 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Governance, Security, and Critical Infrastructure Protection 98 6.3 Financial Services Information Sharing and Analysis Center 100 6.4 Financial Services Sector Coordinating Council 104 6.5 Financial Systemic Analysis and Resilience Center 108 6.6 Lessons for Cybersecurity Governance 109 6.6.1 Lesson One: Affirmation of PPP Model, but Focus and Clarity Needed 109 6.6.2 Lesson Two: Addressing Systemic Risk Requires more than Just Information Sharing 110 6.6.3 Lesson Three: Limitations of PPPs in Regulated Industries 111 6.7 Conclusion 111 Acknowledgments 111 Notes 112 7 The Regulation of Botnets: How Does Cybersecurity Governance Theory Work When Everyone Is a Stakeholder? 117Samantha A. Adams, Karine e Silva, Bert‐Jaap Koops, and Bart van der Sloot 7.1 Introduction 117 7.2 Cybersecurity 119 7.3 Botnets 121 7.3.1 Preventing New Infections 122 7.3.2 Mitigating Existing Botnets 122 7.3.3 Minimizing Criminal Profit 123 7.4 Governance Theory 124 7.5 Discussion: Governance Theory Applied to Botnet Mitigation 127 7.6 Conclusion 132 Acknowledgment 133 Notes 133 8 Governing Risk: The Emergence of Cyber Insurance 137Trey Herr 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Where Did Cyber Insurance Come From? 139 8.2.1 Understanding Insurance 140 8.2.2 Risk Pool 140 8.2.3 Premiums 140 8.2.4 Insurer 141 8.2.5 Insurable Risk 141 8.2.6 Comparisons to Terrorism 142 8.3 Security Standards in the Governance Process 143 8.3.1 Government‐Developed Standards 144 8.3.2 Private Sector Standards 145 8.4 The Key Role of Risk 146 8.5 Enforcing Standards: Insurance Becomes Governance 147 8.5.1 Model of Modern Market Governance 148 8.5.2 Cyber Insurance: Governing Risk Through Standard Setting and Enforcement 149 8.6 Conclusion and Implications 151 Notes 153 9 Containing Conficker: A Public Health Approach 157Michael Thornton 9.1 Introduction 157 9.2 The Conficker Infection 158 9.3 A Public Health Alternative 162 9.3.1 Populations, Not Individuals 162 9.3.2 Shared and Overlapping Problems 163 9.3.3 Balancing Efficacy and Individual Rights 166 9.4 A Public Health Approach to Conficker 169 9.5 Conclusion 171 Notes 171 10 Bug Bounty Programs: Institutional Variation and the Different Meanings of Security 175Andreas Kuehn and Ryan Ellis 10.1 Introduction: Conspicuously Absent 175 10.2 Scope and Aims 176 10.3 A Market for Flaws: Bug Bounty Programs 177 10.3.1 Case I, Microsoft: Rethinking the Market for Flaws 178 10.3.2 Case II, Google: Matching the Wisdom of Crowds and the Wisdom of Experts 180 10.3.3 Case III, Facebook: Transaction Costs and Reputational Benefits 183 10.4 Conclusion 185 Notes 188 11 Rethinking Data, Geography, and Jurisdiction: A Common Framework for Harmonizing Global Data Flow Controls 195Jonah Force Hill and Matthew Noyes 11.1 Introduction 195 11.2 The Challenge of Extraterritorial Data 197 11.2.1 The Challenge to Law Enforcement 197 11.2.2 Alternative Approaches to MLATs 201 11.2.3 The Challenge to Regulators 203 11.2.3.1 Content and Speech 203 11.2.3.2 Privacy and Data Protection 205 11.3 The Threat of Data Localization 206 11.4 A New Approach to Data Flow Controls 207 11.4.1 Control Points Analysis 208 11.4.2 A Common Framework for Data Flow Controls 209 11.5 Recommendations 212 11.5.1 Recommendation One: Establish a Common Framework for Data Flow Controls Through the Development of International Standards, Norms, and Principles 212 11.5.2 Recommendation Two: Formalize Agreed‐upon Standards, Norms, and Principles Through the Adoption of Voluntary and Treaty‐Based International Agreements 214 11.5.3 Recommendation Three: Reform Domestic Law and Policy Frameworks Consistent with Agreed‐upon Standards, Norms, and Principles 215 11.5.4 Recommendation Four: Focus First on Specific Policy Matters of Broad International Consensus, Then Move on to the more Contentious Issues 216 11.6 Additional Challenges 217 11.7 Conclusion 218 Acknowledgments 218 Notes 219 12 Private Ordering Shaping Cybersecurity Policy: The Case of Bug Bounties 231Amit Elazari Bar On 12.1 Introduction 231 12.2 Are Bug Bounties Operating as a “Private” Safe Harbor? Key Findings of the Legal Terms Survey 234 12.2.1 The Bug Bounty Economy Anti‐Hacking Legal Landscape 234 12.2.1.1 The CFAA 234 12.2.1.2 The DMCA 235 12.2.1.3 The Department of Justice Framework for a Vulnerability Disclosure Program for Online Systems 235 12.2.2 Bug Bounty Legal Terms: General Structure 236 12.2.3 The Bug Bounty Catch 22 238 12.2.4 Safe Harbor Language Matters 240 12.3 Policy Recommendations: Toward a Private Safe Harbor 242 12.3.1 Increase of Terms Salience 242 12.3.2 Clear Safe Harbor Language 243 12.3.3 Standardization of Bug Bounty Legal Terms Across Platforms, Industries, and Sponsors 244 12.3.4 Improved Disclosures and Educational Efforts 245 12.3.5 Individual Hackers as Collective Bargainers 246 12.4 Conclusion 246 Acknowledgments 247 Notes 247 Bibliography 265 Index 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a comprehensive study on OPS networks, its architectures, and developed techniques for improving its quality of switching and managing quality of service.Table of ContentsList of Figures xix List of Tables xxxv Preface xxxvii References xli Acknowledgments xliii Acronyms xlv Glossary li List of Symbols liii 1 Introduction to Optical Packet Switched (OPS) Networks 1 1.1 Optical Fiber Technology 1 1.2 Why Optical Networks? 5 1.3 Optical Networking Mechanisms 7 1.4 Overview of OPS Networking 19 1.5 Optical OFDM based Elastic Optical Networking (EON) 44 1.6 Summary 55 References 57 2 Contention Avoidance in OPS Networks 67 2.1 Software based Contention Avoidance Schemes 68 2.2 Hardware based Schemes 121 2.3 Formulation of Even Traffic Transmission in Slotted OPS 128 2.4 Summary 141 References 143 3 Contention Resolution in OPS Networks 149 3.1 Hardware based Contention Resolution Schemes 150 3.2 Software based Contention Resolution Schemes 204 3.3 Summary 224 References 225 4 Hybrid Contention Avoidance/Resolution in OPS Networks 233 4.1 Hybrid Contention Resolution Schemes 234 4.2 Hybrid Contention Resolution and Avoidance Schemes 244 4.3 Summary 283 References 285 5 Hybrid OPS Networks 289 5.1 Hybrid Asynchronous and Synchronous OPS Networks 290 5.2 Hybrid OPS and OCS Networks 291 5.3 Comparison of Hybrid OPS Schemes 310 5.4 Summary 311 References 313 6 Metro OPS Networks 317 6.1 OPS in Star Topology 317 6.2 OPS in Ring Topology 372 6.3 Summary 382 References 383

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of high-performance pattern recognition techniques and approaches to Computational Molecular Biology This book surveys the developments of techniques and approaches on pattern recognition related to Computational Molecular Biology. Providing a broad coverage of the field, the authors cover fundamental and technical information on these techniques and approaches, as well as discussing their related problems. The text consists of twenty nine chapters, organized into seven parts: Pattern Recognition in Sequences, Pattern Recognition in Secondary Structures, Pattern Recognition in Tertiary Structures, Pattern Recognition in Quaternary Structures, Pattern Recognition in Microarrays, Pattern Recognition in Phylogenetic Trees, and Pattern Recognition in Biological Networks. Surveys the development of techniques and approaches on pattern recognition in biomolecular data Discusses pattern recognitTable of ContentsLIST OF CONTRIBUTORS xxi PREFACE xxvii I PATTERN RECOGNITION IN SEQUENCES 1 1 COMBINATORIAL HAPLOTYPING PROBLEMS 3Giuseppe Lancia 1.1 Introduction / 3 1.2 Single Individual Haplotyping / 5 1.2.1 The Minimum Error Correction Model / 8 1.2.2 Probabilistic Approaches and Alternative Models / 10 1.3 Population Haplotyping / 12 1.3.1 Clark’s Rule / 14 1.3.2 Pure Parsimony / 15 1.3.3 Perfect Phylogeny / 19 1.3.4 Disease Association / 21 1.3.5 Other Models / 22 References / 23 2 ALGORITHMIC PERSPECTIVES OF THE STRING BARCODING PROBLEMS 28Sima Behpour and Bhaskar DasGupta 2.1 Introduction / 28 2.2 Summary of Algorithmic Complexity Results for Barcoding Problems / 32 2.2.1 Average Length of Optimal Barcodes / 33 2.3 Entropy-Based Information Content Technique for Designing Approximation Algorithms for String Barcoding Problems / 34 2.4 Techniques for Proving Inapproximability Results for String Barcoding Problems / 36 2.4.1 Reductions from Set Covering Problem / 36 2.4.2 Reduction from Graph-Coloring Problem / 38 2.5 Heuristic Algorithms for String Barcoding Problems / 39 2.5.1 Entropy-Based Method with a Different Measure for Information Content / 39 2.5.2 Balanced Partitioning Approach / 40 2.6 Conclusion / 40 Acknowledgments / 41 References / 41 3 ALIGNMENT-FREE MEASURES FOR WHOLE-GENOME COMPARISON 43Matteo Comin and Davide Verzotto 3.1 Introduction / 43 3.2 Whole-Genome Sequence Analysis / 44 3.2.1 Background on Whole-Genome Comparison / 44 3.2.2 Alignment-Free Methods / 45 3.2.3 Average Common Subword / 46 3.2.4 Kullback–Leibler Information Divergence / 47 3.3 Underlying Approach / 47 3.3.1 Irredundant Common Subwords / 48 3.3.2 Underlying Subwords / 49 3.3.3 Efficient Computation of Underlying Subwords / 50 3.3.4 Extension to Inversions and Complements / 53 3.3.5 A Distance-Like Measure Based on Underlying Subwords / 53 3.4 Experimental Results / 54 3.4.1 Genome Data sets and Reference Taxonomies / 54 3.4.2 Whole-Genome Phylogeny Reconstruction / 56 3.5 Conclusion / 61 Author’s Contributions / 62 Acknowledgments / 62 References / 62 4 A MAXIMUM LIKELIHOOD FRAMEWORK FOR MULTIPLE SEQUENCE LOCAL ALIGNMENT 65Chengpeng Bi 4.1 Introduction / 65 4.2 Multiple Sequence Local Alignment / 67 4.2.1 Overall Objective Function / 67 4.2.2 Maximum Likelihood Model / 68 4.3 Motif Finding Algorithms / 70 4.3.1 DEM Motif Algorithm / 70 4.3.2 WEM Motif Finding Algorithm / 70 4.3.3 Metropolis Motif Finding Algorithm / 72 4.3.4 Gibbs Motif Finding Algorithm / 73 4.3.5 Pseudo-Gibbs Motif Finding Algorithm / 74 4.4 Time Complexity / 75 4.5 Case Studies / 75 4.5.1 Performance Evaluation / 76 4.5.2 CRP Binding Sites / 76 4.5.3 Multiple Motifs in Helix–Turn–Helix Protein Structure / 78 4.6 Conclusion / 80 References / 81 5 GLOBAL SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT WITH A BOUNDED NUMBER OF GAPS 83Carl Barton, Tomáš Flouri, Costas S. Iliopoulos, and Solon P. Pissis 5.1 Introduction / 83 5.2 Definitions and Notation / 85 5.3 Problem Definition / 87 5.4 Algorithms / 88 5.5 Conclusion / 94 References / 95 II PATTERN RECOGNITION IN SECONDARY STRUCTURES 97 6 A SHORT REVIEW ON PROTEIN SECONDARY STRUCTURE PREDICTION METHODS 99Renxiang Yan, Jiangning Song, Weiwen Cai, and Ziding Zhang 6.1 Introduction / 99 6.2 Representative Protein Secondary Structure Prediction Methods / 102 6.2.1 Chou–Fasman / 103 6.2.2 GOR / 104 6.2.3 PHD / 104 6.2.4 PSIPRED / 104 6.2.5 SPINE-X / 105 6.2.6 PSSpred / 105 6.2.7 Meta Methods / 105 6.3 Evaluation of Protein Secondary Structure Prediction Methods / 106 6.3.1 Measures / 106 6.3.2 Benchmark / 106 6.3.3 Performances / 107 6.4 Conclusion / 110 Acknowledgments / 110 References / 111 7 A GENERIC APPROACH TO BIOLOGICAL SEQUENCE SEGMENTATION PROBLEMS: APPLICATION TO PROTEIN SECONDARY STRUCTURE PREDICTION 114Yann Guermeur and Fabien Lauer 7.1 Introduction / 114 7.2 Biological Sequence Segmentation / 115 7.3 MSVMpred / 117 7.3.1 Base Classifiers / 117 7.3.2 Ensemble Methods / 118 7.3.3 Convex Combination / 119 7.4 Postprocessing with A Generative Model / 119 7.5 Dedication to Protein Secondary Structure Prediction / 120 7.5.1 Biological Problem / 121 7.5.2 MSVMpred2 / 121 7.5.3 Hidden Semi-Markov Model / 122 7.5.4 Experimental Results / 122 7.6 Conclusions and Ongoing Research / 125 Acknowledgments / 126 References / 126 8 STRUCTURAL MOTIF IDENTIFICATION AND RETRIEVAL: A GEOMETRICAL APPROACH 129Virginio Cantoni, Marco Ferretti, Mirto Musci, and Nahumi Nugrahaningsih 8.1 Introduction / 129 8.2 A Few Basic Concepts / 130 8.2.1 Hierarchy of Protein Structures / 130 8.2.2 Secondary Structure Elements / 131 8.2.3 Structural Motifs / 132 8.2.4 Available Sources for Protein Data / 134 8.3 State of the Art / 135 8.3.1 Protein Structure Motif Search / 135 8.3.2 Promotif / 136 8.3.3 Secondary-Structure Matching / 137 8.3.4 Multiple Structural Alignment by Secondary Structures / 138 8.4 A Novel Geometrical Approach to Motif Retrieval / 138 8.4.1 Secondary Structures Cooccurrences / 138 8.4.2 Cross Motif Search / 143 8.4.3 Complete Cross Motif Search / 146 8.5 Implementation Notes / 149 8.5.1 Optimizations / 149 8.5.2 Parallel Approaches / 150 8.6 Conclusions and Future Work / 151 Acknowledgment / 152 References / 152 9 GENOME-WIDE SEARCH FOR PSEUDOKNOTTED NONCODING RNAs: A COMPARATIVE STUDY 155Meghana Vasavada, Kevin Byron, Yang Song, and Jason T.L. Wang 9.1 Introduction / 155 9.2 Background / 156 9.2.1 Noncoding RNAs and Their Secondary Structures / 156 9.2.2 Pseudoknotted ncRNA Search Tools / 157 9.3 Methodology / 157 9.4 Results and Interpretation / 161 9.5 Conclusion / 162 References / 163 III PATTERN RECOGNITION IN TERTIARY STRUCTURES 165 10 MOTIF DISCOVERY IN PROTEIN 3D-STRUCTURES USING GRAPH MINING TECHNIQUES 167Wajdi Dhifli and Engelbert Mephu Nguifo 10.1 Introduction / 167 10.2 From Protein 3D-Structures to Protein Graphs / 169 10.2.1 Parsing Protein 3D-Structures into Graphs / 169 10.3 Graph Mining / 172 10.4 Subgraph Mining / 173 10.5 Frequent Subgraph Discovery / 173 10.5.1 Problem Definition / 174 10.5.2 Candidates Generation / 176 10.5.3 Frequent Subgraph Discovery Approaches / 177 10.5.4 Variants of Frequent Subgraph Mining: Closed and Maximal Subgraphs / 178 10.6 Feature Selection / 179 10.6.1 Relevance of a Feature / 179 10.7 Feature Selection for Subgraphs / 180 10.7.1 Problem Statement / 180 10.7.2 Mining Top-k Subgraphs / 180 10.7.3 Clustering-Based Subgraph Selection / 181 10.7.4 Sampling-Based Approaches / 181 10.7.5 Approximate Subgraph Mining / 181 10.7.6 Discriminative Subgraph Selection / 182 10.7.7 Other Significant Subgraph Selection Approaches / 182 10.8 Discussion / 183 10.9 Conclusion / 185 Acknowledgments / 185 References / 186 11 FUZZY AND UNCERTAIN LEARNING TECHNIQUES FOR THE ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION OF PROTEIN TERTIARY STRUCTURES 190Chinua Umoja, Xiaxia Yu, and Robert Harrison 11.1 Introduction / 190 11.2 Genetic Algorithms / 192 11.2.1 GA Model Selection in Protein Structure Prediction / 196 11.2.2 Common Methodology / 198 11.3 Supervised Machine Learning Algorithm / 201 11.3.1 Artificial Neural Networks / 201 11.3.2 ANNs in Protein Structure Prediction / 202 11.3.3 Support Vector Machines / 203 11.4 Fuzzy Application / 204 11.4.1 Fuzzy Logic / 204 11.4.2 Fuzzy SVMs / 204 11.4.3 Adaptive-Network-Based Fuzzy Inference Systems / 205 11.4.4 Fuzzy Decision Trees / 206 11.5 Conclusion / 207 References / 208 12 PROTEIN INTER-DOMAIN LINKER PREDICTION 212Maad Shatnawi, Paul D. Yoo, and Sami Muhaidat 12.1 Introduction / 212 12.2 Protein Structure Overview / 213 12.3 Technical Challenges and Open Issues / 214 12.4 Prediction Assessment / 215 12.5 Current Approaches / 216 12.5.1 DomCut / 216 12.5.2 Scooby-Domain / 217 12.5.3 FIEFDom / 218 12.5.4 Chatterjee et al. (2009) / 219 12.5.5 Drop / 219 12.6 Domain Boundary Prediction Using Enhanced General Regression Network / 220 12.6.1 Multi-Domain Benchmark Data Set / 220 12.6.2 Compact Domain Profile / 221 12.6.3 The Enhanced Semi-Parametric Model / 222 12.6.4 Training, Testing, and Validation / 225 12.6.5 Experimental Results / 226 12.7 Inter-Domain Linkers Prediction Using Compositional Index and Simulated Annealing / 227 12.7.1 Compositional Index / 228 12.7.2 Detecting the Optimal Set of Threshold Values Using Simulated Annealing / 229 12.7.3 Experimental Results / 230 12.8 Conclusion / 232 References / 233 13 PREDICTION OF PROLINE CIS–TRANS ISOMERIZATION 236Paul D. Yoo, Maad Shatnawi, Sami Muhaidat, Kamal Taha, and Albert Y. Zomaya 13.1 Introduction / 236 13.2 Methods / 238 13.2.1 Evolutionary Data Set Construction / 238 13.2.2 Protein Secondary Structure Information / 239 13.2.3 Method I: Intelligent Voting / 239 13.2.4 Method II: Randomized Meta-Learning / 241 13.2.5 Model Validation and Testing / 242 13.2.6 Parameter Tuning / 242 13.3 Model Evaluation and Analysis / 243 13.4 Conclusion / 245 References / 245 IV PATTERN RECOGNITION IN QUATERNARY STRUCTURES 249 14 PREDICTION OF PROTEIN QUATERNARY STRUCTURES 251Akbar Vaseghi, Maryam Faridounnia, Soheila Shokrollahzade, Samad Jahandideh, and Kuo-Chen Chou 14.1 Introduction / 251 14.2 Protein Structure Prediction / 255 14.2.1 Secondary Structure Prediction / 255 14.2.2 Modeling of Tertiary Structure / 256 14.3 Template-Based Predictions / 257 14.3.1 Homology Modeling / 257 14.3.2 Threading Methods / 257 14.3.3 Ab initio Modeling / 257 14.4 Critical Assessment of Protein Structure Prediction / 258 14.5 Quaternary Structure Prediction / 258 14.6 Conclusion / 261 Acknowledgments / 261 References / 261 15 COMPARISON OF PROTEIN QUATERNARY STRUCTURES BY GRAPH APPROACHES 266Sheng-Lung Peng and Yu-Wei Tsay 15.1 Introduction / 266 15.2 Similarity in the Graph Model / 268 15.2.1 Graph Model for Proteins / 270 15.3 Measuring Structural Similarity VIA MCES / 272 15.3.1 Problem Formulation / 273 15.3.2 Constructing P-Graphs / 274 15.3.3 Constructing Line Graphs / 276 15.3.4 Constructing Modular Graphs / 276 15.3.5 Maximum Clique Detection / 277 15.3.6 Experimental Results / 277 15.4 Protein Comparison VIA Graph Spectra / 279 15.4.1 Graph Spectra / 279 15.4.2 Matrix Selection / 281 15.4.3 Graph Cospectrality and Similarity / 283 15.4.4 Cospectral Comparison / 283 15.4.5 Experimental Results / 284 15.5 Conclusion / 287 References / 287 16 STRUCTURAL DOMAINS IN PREDICTION OF BIOLOGICAL PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTIONS 291Mina Maleki, Michael Hall, and Luis Rueda 16.1 Introduction / 291 16.2 Structural Domains / 293 16.3 The Prediction Framework / 293 16.4 Feature Extraction and Prediction Properties / 294 16.4.1 Physicochemical Properties / 296 16.4.2 Domain-Based Properties / 298 16.5 Feature Selection / 299 16.5.1 Filter Methods / 299 16.5.2 Wrapper Methods / 301 16.6 Classification / 301 16.6.1 Linear Dimensionality Reduction / 301 16.6.2 Support Vector Machines / 303 16.6.3 k-Nearest Neighbor / 303 16.6.4 Naive Bayes / 304 16.7 Evaluation and Analysis / 304 16.8 Results and Discussion / 304 16.8.1 Analysis of the Prediction Properties / 304 16.8.2 Analysis of Structural DDIs / 307 16.9 Conclusion / 309 References / 310 V PATTERN RECOGNITION IN MICROARRAYS 315 17 CONTENT-BASED RETRIEVAL OF MICROARRAY EXPERIMENTS 317Hasan O¢gul 17.1 Introduction / 317 17.2 Information Retrieval: Terminology and Background / 318 17.3 Content-Based Retrieval / 320 17.4 Microarray Data and Databases / 322 17.5 Methods for Retrieving Microarray Experiments / 324 17.6 Similarity Metrics / 327 17.7 Evaluating Retrieval Performance / 329 17.8 Software Tools / 330 17.9 Conclusion and Future Directions / 331 Acknowledgment / 332 References / 332 18 EXTRACTION OF DIFFERENTIALLY EXPRESSED GENES IN MICROARRAY DATA 335Tiratha Raj Singh, Brigitte Vannier, and Ahmed Moussa 18.1 Introduction / 335 18.2 From Microarray Image to Signal / 336 18.2.1 Signal from Oligo DNA Array Image / 336 18.2.2 Signal from Two-Color cDNA Array / 337 18.3 Microarray Signal Analysis / 337 18.3.1 Absolute Analysis and Replicates in Microarrays / 338 18.3.2 Microarray Normalization / 339 18.4 Algorithms for De Gene Selection / 339 18.4.1 Within–Between DE Gene (WB-DEG) Selection Algorithm / 340 18.4.2 Comparison of the WB-DEGs with Two Classical DE Gene Selection Methods on Latin Square Data / 341 18.5 Gene Ontology Enrichment and Gene Set Enrichment Analysis / 343 18.6 Conclusion / 345 References / 345 19 CLUSTERING AND CLASSIFICATION TECHNIQUES FOR GENE EXPRESSION PROFILE PATTERN ANALYSIS 347Emanuel Weitschek, Giulia Fiscon, Valentina Fustaino, Giovanni Felici, and Paola Bertolazzi 19.1 Introduction / 347 19.2 Transcriptome Analysis / 348 19.3 Microarrays / 349 19.3.1 Applications / 349 19.3.2 Microarray Technology / 350 19.3.3 Microarray Workflow / 350 19.4 RNA-Seq / 351 19.5 Benefits and Drawbacks of RNA-Seq and Microarray Technologies / 353 19.6 Gene Expression Profile Analysis / 356 19.6.1 Data Definition / 356 19.6.2 Data Analysis / 357 19.6.3 Normalization and Background Correction / 357 19.6.4 Genes Clustering / 359 19.6.5 Experiment Classification / 361 19.6.6 Software Tools for Gene Expression Profile Analysis / 362 19.7 Real Case Studies / 364 19.8 Conclusions / 367 References / 368 20 MINING INFORMATIVE PATTERNS IN MICROARRAY DATA 371Li Teng 20.1 Introduction / 371 20.2 Patterns with Similarity / 373 20.2.1 Similarity Measurement / 374 20.2.2 Clustering / 376 20.2.3 Biclustering / 379 20.2.4 Types of Biclusters / 380 20.2.5 Measurement of the Homogeneity / 383 20.2.6 Biclustering Algorithms with Different Searching Schemes / 387 20.3 Conclusion / 391 References / 391 21 ARROW PLOT AND CORRESPONDENCE ANALYSIS MAPS FOR VISUALIZING THE EFFECTS OF BACKGROUND CORRECTION AND NORMALIZATION METHODS ON MICROARRAY DATA 394Carina Silva, Adelaide Freitas, Sara Roque, and Lisete Sousa 21.1 Overview / 394 21.1.1 Background Correction Methods / 395 21.1.2 Normalization Methods / 396 21.1.3 Literature Review / 397 21.2 Arrow Plot / 399 21.2.1 DE Genes Versus Special Genes / 399 21.2.2 Definition and Properties of the ROC Curve / 400 21.2.3 AUC and Degenerate ROC Curves / 401 21.2.4 Overlapping Coefficient / 402 21.2.5 Arrow Plot Construction / 403 21.3 Significance Analysis of Microarrays / 404 21.4 Correspondence Analysis / 405 21.4.1 Basic Principles / 405 21.4.2 Interpretation of CA Maps / 406 21.5 Impact of the Preprocessing Methods / 407 21.5.1 Class Prediction Context / 408 21.5.2 Class Comparison Context / 408 21.6 Conclusions / 412 Acknowledgments / 413 References / 413 VI PATTERN RECOGNITION IN PHYLOGENETIC TREES 417 22 PATTERN RECOGNITION IN PHYLOGENETICS: TREES AND NETWORKS 419David A. Morrison 22.1 Introduction / 419 22.2 Networks and Trees / 420 22.3 Patterns and Their Processes / 424 22.4 The Types of Patterns / 427 22.5 Fingerprints / 431 22.6 Constructing Networks / 433 22.7 Multi-Labeled Trees / 435 22.8 Conclusion / 436 References / 437 23 DIVERSE CONSIDERATIONS FOR SUCCESSFUL PHYLOGENETIC TREE RECONSTRUCTION: IMPACTS FROM MODEL MISSPECIFICATION, RECOMBINATION, HOMOPLASY, AND PATTERN RECOGNITION 439Diego Mallo, Agustín Sánchez-Cobos, and Miguel Arenas 23.1 Introduction / 440 23.2 Overview on Methods and Frameworks for Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction / 440 23.2.1 Inferring Gene Trees / 441 23.2.2 Inferring Species Trees / 442 23.3 Influence of Substitution Model Misspecification on Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction / 445 23.4 Influence of Recombination on Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction / 446 23.5 Influence of Diverse Evolutionary Processes on Species Tree Reconstruction / 447 23.6 Influence of Homoplasy on Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction: The Goals of Pattern Recognition / 449 23.7 Concluding Remarks / 449 Acknowledgments / 450 References / 450 24 AUTOMATED PLAUSIBILITY ANALYSIS OF LARGE PHYLOGENIES 457David Dao, Tomáš Flouri, and Alexandros Stamatakis 24.1 Introduction / 457 24.2 Preliminaries / 459 24.3 A Naïve Approach / 462 24.4 Toward a Faster Method / 463 24.5 Improved Algorithm / 467 24.5.1 Preprocessing / 467 24.5.2 Computing Lowest Common Ancestors / 468 24.5.3 Constructing the Induced Tree / 468 24.5.4 Final Remarks / 471 24.6 Implementation / 473 24.6.1 Preprocessing / 473 24.6.2 Reconstruction / 473 24.6.3 Extracting Bipartitions / 474 24.7 Evaluation / 474 24.7.1 Test Data Sets / 474 24.7.2 Experimental Results / 475 24.8 Conclusion / 479 Acknowledgment / 481 References / 481 25 A NEW FAST METHOD FOR DETECTING AND VALIDATING HORIZONTAL GENE TRANSFER EVENTS USING PHYLOGENETIC TREES AND AGGREGATION FUNCTIONS 483Dunarel Badescu, Nadia Tahiri, and Vladimir Makarenkov 25.1 Introduction / 483 25.2 Methods / 485 25.2.1 Clustering Using Variability Functions / 485 25.2.2 Other Variants of Clustering Functions Implemented in the Algorithm / 487 25.2.3 Description of the New Algorithm / 488 25.2.4 Time Complexity / 491 25.3 Experimental Study / 491 25.3.1 Implementation / 491 25.3.2 Synthetic Data / 491 25.3.3 Real Prokaryotic (Genomic) Data / 495 25.4 Results and Discussion / 501 25.4.1 Analysis of Synthetic Data / 501 25.4.2 Analysis of Prokaryotic Data / 502 25.5 Conclusion / 502 References / 503 VII PATTERN RECOGNITION IN BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS 505 26 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS FOR MODELING BIOLOGICAL INTERACTION NETWORKS 507Christos Makris and Evangelos Theodoridis 26.1 Introduction / 507 26.2 Measures/Metrics / 508 26.3 Models of Biological Networks / 511 26.4 Reconstructing and Partitioning Biological Networks / 511 26.5 PPI Networks / 513 26.6 Mining PPI Networks—Interaction Prediction / 517 26.7 Conclusions / 519 References / 519 27 BIOLOGICAL NETWORK INFERENCE AT MULTIPLE SCALES: FROM GENE REGULATION TO SPECIES INTERACTIONS 525Andrej Aderhold, V Anne Smith, and Dirk Husmeier 27.1 Introduction / 525 27.2 Molecular Systems / 528 27.3 Ecological Systems / 528 27.4 Models and Evaluation / 529 27.4.1 Notations / 529 27.4.2 Sparse Regression and the LASSO / 530 27.4.3 Bayesian Regression / 530 27.4.4 Evaluation Metric / 531 27.5 Learning Gene Regulation Networks / 532 27.5.1 Nonhomogeneous Bayesian Regression / 533 27.5.2 Gradient Estimation / 534 27.5.3 Simulated Bio-PEPA Data / 534 27.5.4 Real mRNA Expression Profile Data / 535 27.5.5 Method Evaluation and Learned Networks / 536 27.6 Learning Species Interaction Networks / 540 27.6.1 Regression Model of Species interactions / 540 27.6.2 Multiple Global Change-Points / 541 27.6.3 Mondrian Process Change-Points / 542 27.6.4 Synthetic Data / 544 27.6.5 Simulated Population Dynamics / 544 27.6.6 Real World Plant Data / 546 27.6.7 Method Evaluation and Learned Networks / 546 27.7 Conclusion / 550 References / 550 28 DISCOVERING CAUSAL PATTERNS WITH STRUCTURAL EQUATION MODELING: APPLICATION TO TOLL-LIKE RECEPTOR SIGNALING PATHWAY IN CHRONIC LYMPHOCYTIC LEUKEMIA 555Athina Tsanousa, Stavroula Ntoufa, Nikos Papakonstantinou, Kostas Stamatopoulos, and Lefteris Angelis 28.1 Introduction / 555 28.2 Toll-Like Receptors / 557 28.2.1 Basics / 557 28.2.2 Structure and Signaling of TLRs / 558 28.2.3 TLR Signaling in Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia / 559 28.3 Structural Equation Modeling / 560 28.3.1 Methodology of SEM Modeling / 560 28.3.2 Assumptions / 561 28.3.3 Estimation Methods / 562 28.3.4 Missing Data / 562 28.3.5 Goodness-of-Fit Indices / 563 28.3.6 Other Indications of a Misspecified Model / 565 28.4 Application / 566 28.5 Conclusion / 580 References / 581 29 ANNOTATING PROTEINS WITH INCOMPLETE LABEL INFORMATION 585Guoxian Yu, Huzefa Rangwala, and Carlotta Domeniconi 29.1 Introduction / 585 29.2 Related Work / 587 29.3 Problem Formulation / 589 29.3.1 The Algorithm / 591 29.4 Experimental Setup / 592 29.4.1 Data sets / 592 29.4.2 Comparative Methods / 593 29.4.3 Experimental Protocol / 594 29.4.4 Evaluation Criteria / 594 29.5 Experimental Analysis / 596 29.5.1 Replenishing Missing Functions / 596 29.5.2 Predicting Unlabeled Proteins / 600 29.5.3 Component Analysis / 604 29.5.4 Run Time Analysis / 604 29.6 Conclusions / 605 Acknowledgments / 606 References / 606 INDEX 609

Read more less

Book SynopsisDetails the paradigms of opportunistic spectrum sharing and white space access as effective means to satisfy increasing demand for high-speed wireless communication and for novel wireless communication applications This book addresses opportunistic spectrum sharing and white space access, being particularly mindful of practical considerations and solutions. In Part I, spectrum sharing implementation issues are considered in terms of hardware platforms and software architectures for realization of flexible and spectrally agile transceivers. Part II addresses practical mechanisms supporting spectrum sharing, including spectrum sensing for opportunistic spectrum access, machine learning and decision making capabilities, aggregation of spectrum opportunities, and spectrally-agile radio waveforms. Part III presents the ongoing work on policy and regulation for efficient and reliable spectrum sharing, including major recent steps forward in TV White Space (TTable of ContentsLIST OF CONTRIBUTORS xi INTRODUCTION xvOliver Holland, Hanna Bogucka, and Arturas Medeisis ACRONYMS xxiii PART I FLEXIBLE RADIO HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PLATFORMS SUPPORTING SPECTRUM SHARING 1 1 The Universal Software Radio Peripheral (USRP) Family of Low-Cost SDRs 3Matt Ettus and Martin Braun 2 On the GNU Radio Ecosystem 25Thomas W. Rondeau 3 Wireless Open-Access Research Platform (WARP) for Flexible Radio 49Junaid Ansari and Petri Mähönen 4 A Dynamically Reconfigurable Software Radio Framework: Iris 81Paul Sutton 5 OpenAirInterface and ExpressMIMO2 for Spectrally Agile Communication 99Bassem Zayen, Florian Kaltenberger, and Raymond Knopp 6 CORAL Cognitive WiFi Networking System: Case Studies of Rural Applications in India 123John Sydor PART II PRACTICAL MECHANISMS SUPPORTING SPECTRUM SHARING 141 7 Cooperative Sensing of Spectrum Opportunities 143Giuseppe Caso, Luca De Nardis, Ragnar Thobaben, and Maria-Gabriella Di Benedetto 8 A Machine-Learning Approach Based on Bio-Inspired Intelligence 167Dimitrios Karvounas, Aimilia Bantouna, Andreas Georgakopoulos, Kostas Tsagkaris, Vera Stavroulaki, and Panagiotis Demestichas 9 Spectrally Agile Waveforms 191Alexander M. Wyglinski, Adrian Kliks, Pawel Kryszkiewicz, Amit P. Sail, and Hanna Bogucka 10 Aggregation of Spectrum Opportunities 221Florian Kaltenberger, Theodoros A. Tsiftsis, Fotis Foukalas, Shuyu Ping, and Oliver Holland 11 Policies for Efficient Spectrum Sharing 239Liljana Gavrilovska, Vladimir Atanasovski, and Gianmarco Baldini PARTIII REGULATORY SOLUTIONS FOR SPECTRUM SHARING 257 12 International Regulatory Framework for Spectrum and Spectrum Sharing 259Peter Anker 13 Regulations for Spectrum Sharing in the USA 277Lee Pucker 14 UK Framework for Access to TV White Spaces 313Hamid Reza Karimi 15 Spectrum Sharing Using Geo-Location Databases 339Jeffrey C. Schmidt and Peter Stanforth 16 Novel Licensing Schemes 369Oliver Holland, Arturo Basaure, and Wataru Yamada PARTIV SPECTRUM SHARING BUSINESS SCENARIOS AND ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS 391 17 Economic and Game Theoretic Models for Spectrum Sharing 393Hamed Ahmadi, Irene Macaluso, Zaheer Khan, Hanna Bogucka, and Luiz A. DaSilva 18 Business Benefits of Licensed Shared Access (LSA) for Key Stakeholders 407Marja Matinmikko, Hanna Okkonen, Seppo Yrjölä, Petri Ahokangas, Miia Mustonen, Marko Palola, Vânia Gonçalves, Anri Kivimäki, Esko Luttinen, and Jukka Kemppainen 19 Initial Standardization of Disruptive Innovations in Radiocommunication Technology in Consortia 425Dirk-Oliver von der Emden 20 Spectrum as a Platform: a Critical Assessment of the Value Promise of Spectrum Sharing Solutions 453Olivier Rits, Simon Delaere, and Pieter Ballon PART V SPECTRUM SHARING DEPLOYMENT SCENARIOS IN PRACTICE 479 21 TV White Spaces with Geo-Location Database Access: Practical Considerations and Trials in Europe 481Rogério Dionísio, José Ribeiro, Jorge Ribeiro, Paulo Marques, and Jonathan Rodriguez 22 Developments and Practical Field Trials of TVWS Technologies 513Kentaro Ishizu, Keiichi Mizutani, Takeshi Matsumura, Ha-Nguyen Tran, Stanislav Filin, Hirokazu Sawada, and Hiroshi Harada 23 Cognitive Wireless Regional Area Network Standard 551Apurva Mody, Gerald Chouinard, Stephen J. Shellhammer, Monisha Ghosh, and Dave Cavalcanti 24 ETSI Opportunistic Spectrum Sharing Technology for (TV) White Spaces 605Markus Dominik Mueck, Naotaka Sato, Chen Sun, Martino Freda, Pekka Ojanen, Dong Zhou, Junfeng Xiao, Rogério Pais Dionisio, and Paulo Marques 25 The IEEE Dynamic Spectrum Access Networks Standards Committee (DySPAN-SC) and IEEE 1900 Working Groups 631Oliver Holland, Hiroshi Harada, Ha-Nguyen Tran, Bernd Bochow, Masayuki Ariyoshi, Matthew Sherman, Michael Gundlach, Stanislav Filin, and Adrian Kliks 26 Spectrum to Unlash Machine-to-Machine Uptake 649Mischa Dohler and Yue Gao CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE WORK 679Oliver Holland, Hanna Bogucka, and Arturas Medeisis INDEX 689

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers all the key areas of wind resource assessment technologies from an engineer's perspective Focuses on wind analysis for wind plant siting, design and analysis Addresses all aspects from atmospheric boundary layer characteristics, to wind resource measurement systems, uncertainties in measurements, computations and analyses, to plant performance Covers the basics of atmospheric science through to turbine siting, turbine responses, and to environmental impacts Contents can be used for research purposes as well as a go-to reference guide, written from the perspective of a hands-on engineer Topic is of ongoing major international interest for its economic and environmental benefits Table of ContentsPreface xiii Introduction xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Author xix List of Symbols xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Wind Resource Assessment as a Discipline 2 1.2 Micro-siting Briefing 2 1.3 Cascade of Wind Regime 3 1.3.1 Global Scale Wind Regime 3 1.3.2 Synoptic Scale Wind Regime 5 1.3.3 Meso-scale Wind Regime 5 1.3.4 Local Scale Wind Regime 6 1.4 Uncertainty of Wind Resource 7 1.5 Scope of the Book 9 References 9 2 Concepts and Analytical Tools 11 2.1 Surface Roughness and Wind Profile 11 2.1.1 Roughness Length 11 2.1.2 Vertical Wind Profile 14 2.1.3 Internal Boundary Layer 15 2.1.4 Roughness Change Model 16 2.1.5 Displacement Height 17 2.1.6 Wind Shear 18 2.2 Speed-up Effect of Terrain 20 2.2.1 Horizontal Speed-up Profile 20 2.2.2 Vertical Speed-up on Hill Top 22 2.2.3 Orographic Categorisation of Terrain 24 2.2.4 Ruggedness Index 27 2.3 Shelter Effect of Obstacles 28 2.3.1 Reduced Wind Speed 29 2.3.2 Increased Turbulence Intensity 31 2.4 Summary 32 References 33 3 Numerical Wind Flow Modelling 35 3.1 Modelling Concept Review 36 3.1.1 Wind Flow Concepts 36 3.1.2 Governing Equations 37 3.1.3 Meshing the Computational Domain 41 3.2 Linearised Numerical Flow Models 42 3.2.1 Jackson–Hunt Model 42 3.2.2 WAsP Model: The Principle 43 3.2.3 WAsP Model: Limitations 46 3.2.4 WAsP Model: Improving the Results 48 3.3 Mass-Consistent Models 50 3.4 CFD Models 50 3.4.1 Meteodyn WT and WindSim 51 3.4.2 Validation of CFD models 52 3.5 Meso Scale NWP Models 53 3.6 Inherent Uncertainties in Wind Flow Modelling 55 3.7 Summary 56 References 56 4 Wind Park Physics and Micro-siting 61 4.1 Wind Power Density 61 4.2 Wind Power Conversion 63 4.2.1 Betz’s Limit 63 4.2.2 Power Coefficient 65 4.2.3 Thrust Coefficient 65 4.2.4 Wind Turbine Power Curve 66 4.2.5 Power Curve Adjustment 67 4.3 Wind Turbine Wake Effects 68 4.3.1 Analytical Structure of Wake 68 4.3.2 Reduced Velocity Wake Models 70 4.3.3 Added Turbulence Wake Models 73 4.3.4 Deep Array Wake Models 75 4.3.5 Wake Effects in Complex Terrain 77 4.4 Wind Turbine Micro-siting 78 4.4.1 Park Efficiency 79 4.4.2 Capacity Factor 80 4.4.3 Site-Specific Wind Conditions 80 4.4.4 Wind Turbine Selection 82 4.4.5 Site Survey 83 4.4.6 Wind Sector Management 86 4.5 Summary 87 References 87 5 Wind Statistics 91 5.1 Statistics Concepts Review 91 5.1.1 Random Variables 91 5.1.2 Sample Mean and Standard Deviation 92 5.1.3 Probability Density Distribution 92 5.2 Wind Data Time Series 93 5.2.1 Mean Wind Speed 94 5.2.2 Turbulence Intensity 95 5.2.3 Wind Direction 97 5.3 Mean Wind Speed of the Whole Time Series 99 5.4 Weibull Distribution 100 5.4.1 Weibull Probability Density Function 100 5.4.2 Weibull Cumulative Distribution Function 101 5.4.3 Rayleigh Distribution 103 5.5 Estimating Weibull Parameters 104 5.5.1 Linear Regression Method 104 5.5.2 Mean-Standard Deviation Method 105 5.5.3 Maximum Likelihood Estimate Method 105 5.5.4 Medians Method 106 5.5.5 Power Density Method 107 5.5.6 Quality of the Weibull Fit 108 5.6 Extreme Wind Statistics 110 5.6.1 Independent Extreme Wind Events 110 5.6.2 Gumbel Method 111 5.6.3 Peaks-Over-Threshold Method 116 5.6.4 Extreme Wind Gusts 117 5.7 Summary 118 References 118 6 Measure–Correlate–Predict 121 6.1 Wind Data Correlation 122 6.1.1 Correlation Coefficient 122 6.1.2 Physical Interpretations of the Correlation 122 6.1.3 The Impact of Averaging Interval 123 6.2 Wind Data Regression and Prediction 125 6.2.1 Regression Equation and Residual 125 6.2.2 Data Validation 127 6.2.3 Data Resampling 128 6.3 MCP Methodology for Wind Energy 129 6.3.1 Linear Regression 129 6.3.2 Variance Ratio Method 130 6.3.3 Weibull Scale Method 131 6.3.4 Mortimer Method 132 6.3.5 WindPRO Matrix Method 132 6.3.6 Artificial Neural Networks 134 6.4 MCP Uncertainty 135 6.4.1 Reducing MCP Uncertainty 135 6.4.2 Estimating MCP Uncertainty 135 6.4.3 Overlapping Period 136 6.5 Sources of Reference Data 137 6.5.1 Meteorological Stations 137 6.5.2 Reanalysis Data 138 6.6 Summary 139 References 140 7 Wind Park Production Estimate 143 7.1 Gross and Net AEP 143 7.1.1 Wake Losses 144 7.1.2 Availability Losses 145 7.1.3 Power Curve Performance 145 7.1.4 Environmental Losses 146 7.1.5 Electrical Losses 147 7.1.6 Curtailments 147 7.2 AEP Uncertainty Analysis 148 7.2.1 Defining Uncertainty 148 7.2.2 Combining Uncertainties 150 7.2.3 From Wind Speed Uncertainty to AEP Uncertainty 151 7.2.4 P90, P75 and P50 AEP 151 7.3 Natural Variability of Wind 153 7.3.1 Inter-Annual Wind Speed Variability 153 7.3.2 Long-Term Stability of Windiness 154 7.4 Uncertainty in Wind Measurement 155 7.5 Uncertainty in Wind Flow Modelling 156 7.5.1 Vertical Extrapolation 156 7.5.2 Horizontal Extrapolation 158 7.5.3 Wind Resource Similarity 159 7.5.4 Deploying Multiple Masts 160 7.6 A Case Study 162 7.7 Wind Resource Assessment Report 163 7.8 Summary 165 References 166 8 Measuring theWind 169 8.1 Representativeness of the Met Mast 169 8.1.1 Similar Wind Climate 170 8.1.2 Similar Topography 172 8.1.3 Similar Shelter Effect 172 8.2 Cup Anemometer Physics 173 8.2.1 Horizontal Wind Speed 174 8.2.2 Vertical Sensitivity 174 8.2.3 Dynamic Response in Turbulent Winds 175 8.2.4 Nonlinearity and Mechanical Friction 177 8.2.5 Sheared Flow Effect 178 8.2.6 Cup Anemometer Design 178 8.3 Met Mast Installation 179 8.3.1 Tower Shadow 179 8.3.2 Boom and Ancillary Effect 181 8.3.3 Wind Direction Vane 181 8.3.4 Air Temperature and Other Parameters 183 8.3.5 Good Practice 183 8.4 Met Mast Operation and Maintenance 185 8.4.1 Documentation 185 8.4.2 On-Site Inspection 188 8.4.3 Monitoring 189 8.5 Data Validation 190 8.5.1 Test Criteria 190 8.5.2 Graphical Review 191 8.5.3 Combining the Data 191 8.5.4 Data Recovery Rate 192 8.6 Alternative Wind Sensors 192 8.6.1 Propeller Anemometer 192 8.6.2 Sonic Anemometer 193 8.6.3 Sodar 195 8.6.4 Lidar 196 8.6.5 Deploying Sodar and Lidar 197 8.7 Summary 199 References 200 9 Atmospheric Circulation and Wind Systems 201 9.1 General Concepts 201 9.1.1 Vertical Structure of the Atmosphere 201 9.1.2 Standard Atmosphere 203 9.1.3 Geopotential Height and Sigma Height 203 9.1.4 Cascade of Scales 204 9.2 Laws and Driving Forces 206 9.2.1 Equation of State 206 9.2.2 Hydrostatic Equation 206 9.2.3 Air Density 207 9.2.4 Forces and Winds 208 9.3 General Atmospheric Circulations 210 9.3.1 Geostrophic Winds 210 9.3.2 Baroclinic Atmosphere and Thermal Winds 211 9.3.3 Three Cell Circulation 212 9.4 Synoptic Scale Wind Systems 214 9.4.1 Mid-latitude Cyclones and Anticyclones 214 9.4.2 Weather Fronts 215 9.4.3 Tropical Storms 216 9.5 Meso-scale Wind Systems 217 9.5.1 Convection and Thunderstorms 218 9.5.2 Land and Sea Breezes 219 9.5.3 Mountain and Valley Winds 221 9.5.4 Katabatic Winds 222 9.6 Micro-scale Winds 222 9.6.1 Turbulence Kinetic Energy 223 9.6.2 Turbulent Flux 224 9.6.3 Turbulence Spectra 225 9.7 Summary 226 References 227 10 Boundary Layer Winds 229 10.1 Atmospheric Stability 229 10.1.1 Neutral Stratification 230 10.1.2 Unstable Stratification 230 10.1.3 Stable Stratification 231 10.1.4 Stability Parameter 231 10.1.5 Modification on a Vertical Wind Profile 232 10.1.6 Influence on Turbulence 233 10.2 Orographic Effects 234 10.2.1 Channelling of Wind 234 10.2.2 Wind Speed-up and the Froude Number 235 10.3 Onshore Boundary Layer Winds 238 10.3.1 Surface Layer 238 10.3.2 Ekman Layer 239 10.3.3 Diurnal Variations 240 10.3.4 Low-Level Jets 241 10.3.5 Internal Boundary Layer 243 10.4 Offshore Boundary Layer Winds 243 10.4.1 Sea Surface Roughness and Wave Influence 244 10.4.2 Marine Atmospheric Stability 245 10.4.3 Annual and Diurnal Variations 245 10.4.4 Offshore Turbulence Intensity 246 10.4.5 Offshore Vertical Wind Profile 246 10.4.6 Offshore Turbine Layout Optimisation 247 10.5 Summary 248 References 248 11 Environmental Impact Assessment 251 11.1 Biological Impacts 251 11.1.1 Birds and Bats 252 11.1.2 Terrestrial Animals 253 11.1.3 Marine Animals 253 11.1.4 Vegetation 254 11.2 Visual Impacts 254 11.2.1 Shadow Flicker 254 11.2.2 Scenery and Aesthetics 256 11.3 Noise Impacts 257 11.3.1 Wind Turbine Noise Curve 257 11.3.2 Sound Propagation 259 11.3.3 Combining Sound Levels 259 11.3.4 Evaluating Noise Levels 261 11.4 Weather and Climate Change 262 11.5 Public Health and Safety 264 11.6 Summary 264 References 265 Appendix I Frequently Used Equations 267 Appendix II IEC Classification of Wind Turbines 269 Appendix III Climate Condition Survey for aWind Farm 271 Appendix IV Useful Websites and Database 275 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes the concept of a Software Defined Mobile Network (SDMN), which will impact the network architecture of current LTE (3GPP) networks. SDN will also open up new opportunities for traffic, resource and mobility management, as well as impose new challenges on network security. Therefore, the book addresses the main affected areas such as traffic, resource and mobility management, virtualized traffics transportation, network management, network security and techno economic concepts. Moreover, a complete introduction to SDN and SDMN concepts. Furthermore, the reader will be introduced to cutting-edge knowledge in areas such as network virtualization, as well as SDN concepts relevant to next generation mobile networks. Finally, by the end of the book the reader will be familiar with the feasibility and opportunities of SDMN concepts, and will be able to evaluate the limits of performance and scalability of these new technologies while applying them to mobile broadb and netwTable of ContentsEditors xv Contributors xvii Foreword xxvii Ulf Ewaldsson Foreword xxix Lauri Oksanen Preface xxxi Acknowledgments xxxvii Abbreviations xxxix Part I Introduction 1 Overview 3Madhusanka Liyanage, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 1.1 Present Mobile Networks and Their Limitations 4 1.2 Software Defined Mobile Network 5 1.3 Key Benefits of SDMN 7 1.4 Conclusion 9 References 9 2 Mobile Network History 11Brian Brown, Rob Gonzalez, and Brian Stanford 2.1 Overview 11 2.2 The Evolution of the Mobile Network 12 2.2.1 Sharing Resources 13 2.2.2 Orchestration 14 2.2.3 Scalability 15 2.3 Limitations and Challenges in Current Mobile Networks 15 2.4 Requirement in Future Mobile Networks 18 Reference 19 3 Software Defined Networking Concepts 21Xenofon Foukas, Mahesh K. Marina, and Kimon Kontovasilis 3.1 Introduction 21 3.2 SDN History and Evolution 23 3.2.1 Early History of Programmable Networks 23 3.2.2 Evolution of Programmable Networks to SDN 25 3.3 SDN Paradigm and Applications 28 3.3.1 Overview of SDN Building Blocks 28 3.3.2 SDN Switches 30 3.3.3 SDN Controllers 31 3.3.4 SDN Programming Interfaces 34 3.3.5 SDN Application Domains 37 3.3.6 Relation of SDN to Network Virtualization and Network Function Virtualization 38 3.4 Impact of SDN to Research and Industry 39 3.4.1 Overview of Standardization Activities and SDN Summits 40 3.4.2 SDN in the Industry 41 3.4.3 Future of SDN 41 References 42 4 Wireless Software Defined Networking 45Claude Chaudet and Yoram Haddad 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 SDN for Wireless 47 4.2.1 Implementations: OpenRoads and OpenRadio 49 4.2.2 SDR versus SDN 50 4.3 Related Works 50 4.4 Wireless SDN Opportunities 51 4.4.1 Multinetwork Planning 51 4.4.2 Handovers and Off]Loading 53 4.4.3 Dead Zone Coverage 55 4.4.4 Security 55 4.4.5 CDN and Caching 56 4.5 Wireless SDN Challenges 56 4.5.1 Slice Isolation 56 4.5.2 Topology Discovery and Topology]Related Problems 56 4.5.3 Resource Evaluation and Reporting 57 4.5.4 User and Operator Preferences 57 4.5.5 Nontechnical Aspects (Governance, Regulation, Etc.) 58 4.6 Conclusion 59 References 59 5 Leveraging SDN for the 5G Networks: Trends, Prospects, and Challenges 61Akram Hakiri and Pascal Berthou 5.1 Introduction 61 5.2 Evolution of the Wireless Communication toward the 5G 62 5.2.1 Evolution of the Wireless World 62 5.3 Software Defined Networks 64 5.4 NFV 65 5.5 Information]Centric Networking 67 5.6 Mobile and Wireless Networks 68 5.6.1 Mobility Management 68 5.6.2 Ubiquitous Connectivity 69 5.6.3 Mobile Clouds 70 5.7 Cooperative Cellular Networks 71 5.8 Unification of the Control Plane 73 5.8.1 Bringing Fixed–Mobile Networking Together 73 5.8.2 Creating a Concerted Convergence of Packet–Optical Networks 74 5.9 Supporting Automatic QoS Provisioning 75 5.10 Cognitive Network Management and Operation 76 5.11 Role of Satellites in the 5G Networks 77 5.12 Conclusion 79 References 79 Part II SDMN Architectures and Network Implementation 6 LTE Architecture Integration with SDN 83Jose Costa]Requena, Raimo Kantola, Jesús Llorente Santos, Vicent Ferrer Guasch, Maël Kimmerlin, Antti Mikola and Jukka Manner 6.1 Overview 83 6.2 Restructuring Mobile Networks to SDN 84 6.2.1 LTE Network: A Starting Point 84 6.2.2 Options for Location of the SDMN Controller 86 6.2.3 Vision of SDN in LTE Networks 88 6.3 Mobile Backhaul Scaling 91 6.4 Security and Distributed FW 95 6.4.1 Customer Edge Switching 97 6.4.2 RG 97 6.5 SDN and LTE Integration Benefits 98 6.6 SDN and LTE Integration Benefits for End Users 100 6.7 Related Work and Research Questions 103 6.7.1 Research Problems 104 6.7.2 Impact 104 6.8 Conclusions 104 References 105 7 EPC in the Cloud 107James Kempf and Kumar Balachandran 7.1 Introduction 107 7.1.1 Origins and Evolution of SDN 108 7.1.2 NFV and Its Application 109 7.1.3 SDN and Cross]Domain Service Development 112 7.2 EPC in the Cloud Version 1.0 115 7.3 EPC in the Cloud Version 2.0? 117 7.3.1 UE Multihoming 117 7.3.2 The EPC on SDN: OpenFlow Example 119 7.4 Incorporating Mobile Services into Cross]Domain Orchestration with SP]SDN 123 7.5 Summary and Conclusions 125 References 126 8 The Controller Placement Problem in Software Defined Mobile Networks (SDMN) 129Hakan Selvi, Selcan Güner, Gürkan Gür, and Fatih Alagöz 8.1 Introduction 129 8.2 SDN and Mobile Networks 130 8.3 Performance Objectives for SDMN Controller Placement 132 8.3.1 Scalability 133 8.3.2 Reliability 133 8.3.3 Latency 134 8.3.4 Resilience 135 8.4 CPP 136 8.4.1 Placement of Controllers 137 8.4.2 Number of Required Controllers 143 8.4.3 CPP and Mobile Networks 145 8.5 Conclusion 146 References 147 9 Technology Evolution in Mobile Networks 149Antti Tolonen and Sakari Luukkainen 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Generic Technology Evolution 150 9.3 Study Framework 152 9.4 Overview on Cloud Computing 153 9.5 Example Platform: OpenStack 154 9.5.1 OpenStack Design and Architecture 155 9.5.2 OpenStack Community 156 9.6 Case Analysis 156 9.6.1 Openness 157 9.6.2 Added Value 157 9.6.3 Experimentation 158 9.6.4 Complementary Technologies 158 9.6.5 Incumbent Role 159 9.6.6 Existing Market Leverage 160 9.6.7 Competence Change 160 9.6.8 Competing Technologies 160 9.6.9 System Architecture Evolution 161 9.6.10 Regulation 161 9.7 Discussion 162 9.8 Summary 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 Part III Traffic Transport and Network Management 10 Mobile Network Function and Service Delivery Virtualization and Orchestration 169Peter Bosch, Alessandro Duminuco, Jeff Napper, Louis (Sam) Samuel, and Paul Polakos 10.1 Introduction 169 10.2 NFV 170 10.2.1 The Functionality of the Architecture 170 10.2.2 Operation of the ETSI NFV System 174 10.2.3 Potential Migration and Deployment Paths 177 10.2.4 NFV Summary 182 10.3 SDN 182 10.4 The Mobility Use Case 183 10.5 Virtual Networking in Data Centers 185 10.6 Summary 186 References 186 11 Survey of Traffic Management in Software Defined Mobile Networks 189Zoltán Faigl and László Bokor 11.1 Overview 189 11.2 Traffic Management in Mobile Networks 190 11.3 QoS Enforcement and Policy Control in 3G/4G Networks 191 11.3.1 QoS for EPS Bearers 193 11.3.2 QoS for Non]3GPP Access 195 11.3.3 QoS Enforcement in EPS 195 11.3.4 Policy and Charging Control in 3GPP 195 11.3.5 Policy Control Architecture 196 11.4 Traffic Management in SDMNs 198 11.4.1 Open Networking Foundation 198 11.4.2 The OF Protocol 199 11.4.3 Traffic Management and Offloading in Mobile Networks 200 11.5 ALTO in SDMNs 201 11.5.1 The ALTO Protocol 202 11.5.2 ALTO–SDN Use Case 202 11.5.3 The ALTO–SDN Architecture 204 11.5.4 Dynamic Network Information Provision 205 11.6 Conclusions 206 References 206 12 Software Defined Networks for Mobile Application Services 209Ram Gopal Lakshmi Narayanan 12.1 Overview 209 12.2 Overview of 3GPP Network Architecture 210 12.3 Wireless Network Architecture Evolution toward NFV and SDN 212 12.3.1 NFV in Packet Core 212 12.3.2 SDN in Packet Core 213 12.4 NFV/SDN Service Chaining 215 12.4.1 Service Chaining at Packet Core 215 12.4.2 Traffic Optimization inside Mobile Networks 217 12.4.3 Metadata Export from RAN to Packet CN 221 12.5 Open Research and Further Study 222 References 223 13 Load Balancing in Software Defined Mobile Networks 225Ijaz Ahmad, Suneth Namal Karunarathna, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 13.1 Introduction 225 13.1.1 Load Balancing in Wireless Networks 226 13.1.2 Mobility Load Balancing 227 13.1.3 Traffic Steering 227 13.1.4 Load Balancing in Heterogeneous Networks 227 13.1.5 Shortcomings in Current Load Balancing Technologies 227 13.2 Load Balancing in SDMN 229 13.2.1 The Need of Load Balancing in SDMN 230 13.2.2 SDN]Enabled Load Balancing 233 13.3 Future Directions and Challenges for Load Balancing Technologies 244 References 244 Part IV Res ource and Mobility Management 14 QoE Management Framework for Internet Services in SDN]Enabled Mobile Networks 249Marcus Eckert and Thomas Martin Knoll 14.1 Overview 249 14.2 Introduction 250 14.3 State of the Art 251 14.4 QoE Framework Architecture 252 14.5 Quality Monitoring 254 14.5.1 Flow Detection and Classification 254 14.5.2 Video Quality Measurement 255 14.5.3 Video Quality Rating 255 14.5.4 Method of Validation 257 14.5.5 Location]Aware Monitoring 259 14.6 Quality Rules 259 14.7 QoE Enforcement (QEN) 260 14.8 Demonstrator 261 14.9 Summary 263 References 264 15 Software Defined Mobility Management for Mobile Internet 265Jun Bi and You Wang 15.1 Chapter Overview 265 15.1.1 Mobility Management in the Internet 265 15.1.2 Integrating Internet Mobility Management and SDN 267 15.1.3 Chapter Organization 267 15.2 Internet Mobility and Problem Statement 268 15.2.1 Internet Mobility Overview 268 15.2.2 Problem Statement 271 15.2.3 Mobility Management Based on SDN 273 15.3 Software Defined Internet Mobility Management 274 15.3.1 Architecture Overview 274 15.3.2 An OpenFlow]Based Instantiation 275 15.3.3 Binding Cache Placement Algorithm 277 15.3.4 System Design 281 15.4 Conclusion 285 References 285 16 Mobile Virtual Network Operators: A Software Defined Mobile Network Perspective 289M. Bala Krishna 16.1 Introduction 289 16.1.1 Features of MVNO 291 16.1.2 Functional Aspects of MVNO 292 16.1.3 Challenges of MVNO 293 16.2 Architecture of MVNO: An SDMN Perspective 294 16.2.1 Types of MVNOs 294 16.2.2 Hierarchical MVNOs 294 16.3 MNO, MVNE, and MVNA Interactions with MVNO 296 16.3.1 Potential Business Strategies between MNOs, MVNEs, and MVNOs 299 16.3.2 Performance Gain with SDN Approach 300 16.3.3 Cooperation between MNOs and MVNOs 300 16.3.4 Flexible Business Models for Heterogeneous Environments 301 16.4 MVNO Developments in 3G, 4G, and LTE 303 16.4.1 MVNO User]Centric Strategies for Mobility Support 303 16.4.2 Management Schemes for Multiple Interfaces 304 16.4.3 Enhancing Business Strategies Using SDN Approach 304 16.5 Cognitive MVNO 305 16.5.1 Cognitive Radio Management in MVNOs 305 16.5.2 Cognitive and SDN]Based Spectral Allocation Strategies in MVNO 306 16.6 MVNO Business Strategies 307 16.6.1 Services and Pricing of MVNO 308 16.6.2 Resource Negotiation and Pricing 309 16.6.3 Pushover Cellular and Service Adoption Strategy 309 16.6.4 Business Relations between the MNO and MVNO 310 16.7 Conclusions 310 16.8 Future Directions 311 References 311 Part V Security and Economic Aspects 17 Software Defined Mobile Network Security 317Ahmed Bux Abro 17.1 Introduction 317 17.2 Evolving Threat Landscape for Mobile Networks 318 17.3 Traditional Ways to Cope with Security Threats in Mobile Networks 318 17.3.1 Introducing New Controls 318 17.3.2 Securing Perimeter 319 17.3.3 Building Complex Security Systems 320 17.3.4 Throwing More Bandwidth 320 17.4 Principles of Adequate Security for Mobile Network 320 17.4.1 Confidentiality 321 17.4.2 Integrity 321 17.4.3 Availability 321 17.4.4 Centralized Policy 321 17.4.5 Visibility 322 17.5 Typical Security Architecture for Mobile Networks 322 17.5.1 Pros 323 17.5.2 Cons 325 17.6 Enhanced Security for SDMN 325 17.6.1 Securing SDN Controller 325 17.6.2 Securing Infrastructure/Data Center 325 17.6.3 Application Security 326 17.6.4 Securing Management and Orchestration 326 17.6.5 Securing API and Communication 326 17.6.6 Security Technologies 326 17.7 SDMN Security Applications 327 17.7.1 Encryption: eNB to Network 327 17.7.2 Segmentation 327 17.7.3 Network Telemetry 329 References 329 18 Security Aspects of SDMN 331Edgardo Montes de Oca and Wissam Mallouli 18.1 Overview 331 18.2 State of the Art and Security Challenges in SDMN Architectures 331 18.2.1 Basics 332 18.2.2 LTE]EPC Security State of the Art 332 18.2.3 SDN Security in LTE]EPC State of the Art 334 18.2.4 Related Work 339 18.3 Monitoring Techniques 344 18.3.1 DPI 347 18.3.2 NIDS 348 18.3.3 Software Defined Monitoring 349 18.4 Other Important Aspects 351 18.4.1 Reaction and Mitigation Techniques 351 18.4.2 Economically Viable Security Techniques for Mobile Networks 352 18.4.3 Secure Mobile Network Services and Security Management 353 18.5 Conclusion 354 References 355 19 SDMN: Industry Architecture Evolution Paths 357Nan Zhang, Tapio Levä, and Heikki Hämmäinen 19.1 Introduction 357 19.2 From Current Mobile Networks to SDMN 358 19.2.1 Current Mobile Network Architecture 358 19.2.2 Evolutionary SDMN Architecture 359 19.2.3 Revolutionary SDMN Architecture 361 19.3 Business Roles of SDMN 362 19.4 Industry Architectures of Evolutionary SDMN 364 19.4.1 Monolithic MNO 364 19.4.2 Outsourced Subscriber Management 366 19.4.3 Outsourced Connectivity 368 19.5 Industry Architectures of Revolutionary SDMN 369 19.5.1 MVNO 369 19.5.2 Outsourced Interconnection 370 19.5.3 Outsourced Mobility Management 372 19.6 Discussion 372 References 374 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisA pedagogical approach to the principles and architecture of knowledge management in organizations This textbook is based on a graduate course taught at Stevens Institute of Technology. It focuses on the design and management of today''s complex K organizations. A K organization is any company that generates and applies knowledge. The text takes existing ideas from organizational design and knowledge management to enhance and elevate each through harmonization with concepts from other disciplines. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldconcentrate on both micro- and macro design and their interrelationships at individual, group, work, and organizational levels. A key feature of the textbook is an incisive discussion of the cultural, practice, and social aspects of knowledge management. The text explores the processes, tools, and infrastructures by which an organization can continuously improve, maintain, and exploit all elements of its knowledge base that are mostTable of ContentsAcknowledgments ix Introduction to Knowledge Systems 1 I. 1 Machine Versus Art Metaphor 1 I. 2 Design and the Ordering of Ideas 2 I. 3 Organization of the Book 3 I. 4 How to Read This Book 6 I. 5 A Journey Through KS 7 References 7 1 Understanding Knowledge 9 Chapter Preview 9 1.1 The New Pangaea 10 1.2 Characterizing the Knowledge Economy 11 1.3 A Glimpse into the Knowledge Society 12 1.4 Industrial Revolutions 13 1.5 The Social Challenge of the Knowledge Economy 13 1.6 A Macro Perspective of Knowledge Management 14 1.7 Architecture of the Organization 16 1.8 Data, Information, and Knowledge 17 1.9 Distinctions in the Information Continuum 20 1.10 Revisiting the Information Continuum 21 1.11 Knowledge As Such 22 1.12 A Brief Comparative Perspective and the Knowledge Triangle 37 1.13 Conceptions of Knowledge in Practice 38 1.14 The Relationship among Different Perspectives 45 1.15 Intangible Assets and Organizational Response 46 1.16 Valuation, Intangibles, and Intellectual Capital 47 1.17 Closing Remarks 51 1.18 Class Exercises 57 References 58 2 Designing Knowledge Systems 61 Chapter Preview 61 2.1 Perspectives of Knowledge 62 2.2 Knowledge Worlds 65 2.3 Inquiry Systems and the Search for True Knowledge 70 2.4 The Basics of Design in the Knowledge Era 74 2.5 New Directions in Knowledge Design 92 2.6 Closing Remarks 120 2.7 Class Exercises 121 References 123 3 Organizations and Systems 125 Chapter Preview 125 3.1 Organizations 126 3.2 Organizational Design 129 3.3 Systems Theory 141 3.4 HT and Design 146 3.5 Organization Molecules 152 3.6 Symmetrical Structures, Discourse, and Conversation 154 3.7 Closing Remarks 155 3.8 Class Exercises 158 References 159 4 Knowledge Work and Technology 161 Chapter Preview 161 4.1 What Is Knowledge Work? 163 4.2 Classifying Knowledge Workers 169 4.3 Tacit Aspect of Knowledge Work 174 4.4 Characterizing Thick Knowledge Work 176 4.5 Architectural Perspective of Knowledge Work 178 4.6 Process and Thin Work 180 4.7 Practice and Thick Work 181 4.8 Knowledge Work and Supporting Technology 195 4.9 KM Tools and Technologies 209 4.10 Robot Economy 210 4.11 Closing Remarks 213 4.12 Class Exercises 216 References 217 5 Organizations and Knowledge 221 Chapter Preview 221 5.1 Organizations and KM 222 5.2 Knowledge Revisited 231 5.3 Organizational Knowledge Cycles and Models 239 5.4 Application of Concepts: Case Study on the PC 252 5.5 Knowledge Formation 257 5.6 Knowledge Exchange and Transfer 259 5.7 Knowledge Base 266 5.8 Organizational Design Representations 269 5.9 Architecture of the Learning Organization 281 5.10 Closing Remarks 287 5.11 Class Exercises 290 References 291 6 Social Aspects of Knowledge Management 295 Chapter Preview 295 6.1 Social Networks 298 6.2 Knowledge Network Design in Organizations 305 6.3 Culture in the Knowledge Organization 308 6.4 Industry Example of Culture: Toyota 316 6.5 Trust 320 6.6 Illustrative Example: Interorganizational K Exchange and Creation—Effects of Ties and Culture 323 6.7 Collaboration 324 6.8 Collaborating with Creatives 331 6.9 Office Design 332 6.10 Promoting Conversations and Dialogue 339 6.11 Closing Remarks 344 6.12 Class Exercises 349 References 351 7 Strategy and Leadership for Knowledge Management 355 Chapter Preview 355 7.1 What Is Strategy? 357 7.2 Strategy Continuum and the Knowledge Organization 366 7.3 Setting the Stage: Intangibles and a Knowledge Strategy 369 7.4 Leadership and KM 371 7.5 Getting Started 374 7.6 Strategies for the Knowledge Organization—Tacit Bundle 377 7.7 Culture Change 378 7.8 Chief Knowledge Office 382 7.9 People Value Stream 386 7.10 Closing Remarks 396 7.11 Class Exercises 401 References 403 8 Knowledge Horizons 405 8.1 Knowledge Arises 405 8.2 Digital Economy 409 8.3 End of Course Questions for Discussion and Research 411 References 413 Appendix 415 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive resource that explores electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) for aerospace systems Handbook of Aerospace Electromagnetic Compatibility is a groundbreaking book on EMC for aerospace systems that addresses both aircraft and space vehicles. With contributions from an international panel of aerospace EMC experts, this important text deals with the testing of spacecraft components and subsystems,analysis of crosstalk and field coupling, aircraft communication systems, and much more. The text also includes information on lightning effects and testing, as well as guidance on design principles and techniques for lightning protection. The book offers an introduction to E3 models and techniques in aerospace systems and explores EMP effects on and technology for aerospace systems. Filled with the most up-to-date information, illustrative examples, descriptive figures, and helpful scenarios, Handbook of Aerospace Electromagnetic Compatibility is designed to be a practical informatTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xii List of Contributors xiii In Memoriam xiv 1 Introduction to E3 Models and Techniques in Aerospace Systems 1Ira Kohlberg 1.1 Introduction and Topics of Interest 1 1.2 Autonomous Systems 8 1.3 Coupled Air and Space Survivable Systems 30 1.4 EMC Considerations of Chaos 41 1.5 EMC Effects on and Technology for Aerospace Systems 52 References 73 2 Deterministic and Statistical EMC Models for Field-to-Wire Coupling and Crosstalk in Wire Harness 79Sergio Pignari 2.1 Introduction 79 2.2 DeterministicModeling 79 2.3 StatisticalModeling 99 References 115 3 HEMP Protection and Verification 121William D. Prather 3.1 Introduction 121 3.2 High-Altitude Electromagnetic Pulse 122 3.3 HEMP Coupling to Aircraft 129 3.4 Shielding and Shielding Topology 133 3.5 EM Protection Technology 135 3.6 System-Level Specifications and Measurements 137 3.7 Hardening Component Specifications and Measurements 169 3.8 Hardness Maintenance/Hardness Surveillance 180 3.9 Conclusion 182 References 183 4 HIRF and Lightning Effects and Testing 187Martin Gabrisak 4.1 Introduction 187 4.2 Coupling Analysis 190 4.3 HIRF Electromagnetic Environment and Its Effects 249 4.4 Electromagnetic Effects of Lightning 280 4.5 Precipitation Static (P-Static) 321 4.6 Lightning Effects and Protection in Aerospace 330 References 340 5 Techniques to Design Robust Lightning Protection Circuits for Avionics Equipment 347Dr. ClayMcCreary 5.1 Introduction 347 5.2 Clean Sheet Design 347 5.3 Evaluating and Hardening Existing Protection 368 5.4 Design Examples 372 5.5 Conclusion 378 References 378 6 Pyrotechnic Systems in Aerospace Applications 381Karen Burnham 6.1 Introduction 381 6.2 Component-Level Concerns 383 6.3 Vehicle-Level Concerns 390 6.4 Conclusion 404 References 404 7 Assembly-Level EMC Testing of Space Components/Subsystems 407Leslie R.Warboys 7.1 Preliminary Steps 407 7.2 Basic Testing Concepts 408 7.3 Commonly Performed Tests 409 7.4 Test Plan 410 7.5 Testing Sequence 414 References 444 8 System-Level Testing of Spacecraft 445JohannesWolf 8.1 Classification of System-Level Testing 445 8.2 System-Level Requirements Definition 452 8.3 Test Execution at the System Level 461 References 479 9 Subsystem EMC for Aircraft 483Paul Kay 9.1 Introduction: The Aim of Subsystem-Level Testing 483 9.2 Motivations for Testing: Safety of Flight and Success of Mission 486 9.3 Emissions Tests 492 9.4 Immunity Tests 511 9.5 Test Plans for Avionics Subsystems 524 Further Reading 535 10 EMI Effects in Flight Control Systems and Their Mitigations 537IrfanMajid 10.1 Introduction 538 10.2 Nature of EMI Experienced by Aerospace Vehicles 540 10.3 Reported Catastrophic EMI Occurrences in FCS 545 10.4 Anatomy of FBWFCS 548 10.5 Flight Management System 554 10.6 EMC Test Standards 556 10.7 EMC Test Methodologies of FCS 566 10.8 How EMI Couples to FCS 580 10.9 Modeling and Simulation 586 10.10 FCS of UAVs 590 10.11 Some Special Considerations for EMI Mitigation 593 References 598 11 EMC Considerations for Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 603Paul Kay 11.1 Introduction 603 11.2 Small UAVs 605 11.3 Payloads 610 11.4 Small UAV Navigation and Control Systems 616 11.5 Electromagnetic Environment for Small UAVs 617 12 DC Magnetic Cleanliness Description for Spaceflight Programs 621Pablo S. Narvaez 12.1 Magnetic Cleanliness Introduction 621 12.2 Magnetic Cleanliness and Control Philosophy 622 12.3 Magnetics Cleanliness Program Description 623 12.4 Early Magnetic Cleanliness Involvement 626 12.5 Design Requirements and Practices 629 12.6 Magnetic Assessment and Control 632 12.7 Magnetic Control Design Practices 639 12.8 Test FacilitiesMeasurement and Methods 653 12.9 Analytical Determination of Magnetic Fields 671 13 Spacecraft Charging 673Robert C. Scully 13.1 Introduction 673 13.2 Historical Background 676 13.3 General Description of the Near-Earth Electromagnetic Environment 677 13.4 Introduction to Spacecraft Charging 689 13.5 Types of Spacecraft Charging 695 13.6 Potential Damage 697 13.7 Ways and Means of Protection/Mitigation 699 13.8 Concluding Material 701 References 701 Bibliography 703 14 Analysis and Simulations of Space Radiation-Induced Single-Event Effects and Transients 705Reinaldo J. Perez 14.1 Introduction 705 14.2 The Space Radiation Environment 706 14.3 Single-Event Effects 706 14.4 Single-Event Transient 708 14.5 Generation and Modeling a SET 710 14.6 Use of Upset Rates for Analyzing Vulnerabilities of Designs to SEE 713 14.7 Circuit Modeling of SETs 716 14.8 SETs in Digital Devices 718 14.9 SET-Induced Clock Jitter and False Clock Pulse 722 14.10 Designing Digital Circuits for SET Survivability 723 14.11 Crosstalk Noise from SET Events and Delay Effects 726 14.12 SET in Voltage Regulators 729 14.13 SET Propagation through Multiple Circuits 731 14.14 SET Hardening of Interconnects 733 14.15 Modeling Subsystem- and System-Level Effects from SET 733 14.16 Analyses and Protection for SET for Electronic Devices 737 14.17 SEE Testing of Spacecraft Hardware Electronics 741 14.18 Conclusions 743 References 744 Index 749

Read more less

Book SynopsisLTE network capabilities are enhanced with small cell deployment, with optimization and with new 3GPP features. LTE networks are getting high loaded which calls for more advanced optimization. Small cells have been discussed in the communications industry for many years, but their true deployment is happening now. New 3GPP features in Release 12 and 13 further push LTE network performance. This timely book addresses R&D and standardization activities on LTE small cells and network optimization, focusing on 3GPP evolution to Release 13. It covers LTE small cells from specification to products and field results; Latest 3GPP evolution to Release 13; and LTE optimization and learnings from the field.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv List of Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1Harri Holma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 LTE Global Deployments and Devices 2 1.3 Mobile Data Traffic Growth 3 1.4 LTE Technology Evolution 4 1.5 LTE Spectrum 5 1.6 Small Cell Deployments 6 1.7 Network Optimization 7 1.8 LTE Evolution Beyond Release 13 8 1.9 Summary 9 References 9 2 LTE and LTE Advanced in Releases 8–11 11Antti Toskala 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Releases 8 and 9 LTE 11 2.2.1 Releases 8 and 9 Physical Layer 12 2.2.2 LTE Architecture 17 2.2.3 LTE Radio Protocols 17 2.3 LTE Advanced in Releases 10 and 11 19 2.3.1 Carrier Aggregation 19 2.3.2 Multiple Input Multiple Output Enhancements 23 2.3.3 HetNet Enhanced Inter-cell Interference Coordination 23 2.3.4 Coordinated Multipoint Transmission 25 2.4 UE Capability in Releases 8–11 26 2.5 Conclusions 28 References 28 3 LTE-Advanced Evolution in Releases 12–13 29Antti Toskala 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Machine-Type Communications 29 3.3 Enhanced CoMP 34 3.4 FDD–TDD Carrier Aggregation 35 3.5 WLAN-Radio Interworking 37 3.6 Device-to-Device Communication with LTE 39 3.7 Single Cell Point to Multipoint Transmission 41 3.8 Release 12 UE Capabilities 42 3.9 Conclusions 42 References 43 4 Small Cell Enhancements in Release 12/13 45Antti Toskala, Timo Lunttila, Tero Henttonen and Jari Lindholm 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 Small Cell and Dual Connectivity Principles 45 4.3 Dual Connectivity Architecture Principle 46 4.4 Dual Connectivity Protocol Impacts 47 4.5 Dual Connectivity Physical Layer Impacts and Radio Link Monitoring 49 4.6 Other Small Cell Physical Layer Enhancement 53 4.6.1 256QAM for LTE Downlink 53 4.6.2 Small Cell ON/OFF Switching and Enhanced Discovery 53 4.6.3 Power Saving with Small Cell ON/OFF 56 4.6.4 Over the Air Synchronization Between eNodeBs 56 4.7 Release 13 Enhancements 56 4.8 Conclusions 57 References 57 5 Small Cell Deployment Options 59Harri Holma and Benny Vejlgaard 5.1 Introduction 59 5.2 Small Cell Motivation 60 5.3 Network Architecture Options 60 5.4 Frequency Usage 64 5.5 Selection of Small Cell Location 65 5.6 Indoor Small Cells 67 5.6.1 Distributed Antenna Systems 67 5.6.2 Wi-Fi and Femto Cells 68 5.6.3 Femto Cell Architecture 70 5.6.4 Recommendations 72 5.7 Cost Aspects 72 5.7.1 Macro Network Extension 73 5.7.2 Outdoor Small Cells 73 5.7.3 Outdoor Pico Cluster 73 5.7.4 Indoor Offloading 74 5.8 Summary 74 References 75 6 Small Cell Products 77Harri Holma and Mikko Simanainen 6.1 Introduction 77 6.2 3GPP Base Station Categories 78 6.3 Micro Base Stations 78 6.4 Pico Base Stations 80 6.5 Femtocells 83 6.6 Low-Power Remote Radio Heads 84 6.6.1 Alternative Remote Radio Head Designs for Indoor Use 86 6.7 Distributed Antenna Systems 87 6.8 Wi-Fi Integration 87 6.9 Wireless Backhaul Products 89 6.10 Summary 90 Reference 90 7 Small Cell Interference Management 91Rajeev Agrawal, Anand Bedekar, Harri Holma, Suresh Kalyanasundaram, Klaus Pedersen and Beatriz Soret 7.1 Introduction 91 7.2 Packet Scheduling Solutions 93 7.3 Enhanced Inter-cell Interference Coordination 97 7.3.1 Concept Description 97 7.3.2 Performance and Algorithms 101 7.4 Enhanced Coordinated Multipoint (eCoMP) 110 7.5 Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) 114 7.6 Summary 119 References 120 8 Small Cell Optimization 121Harri Holma, Klaus Pedersen, Claudio Rosa, Anand Bedekar and Hua Wang 8.1 Introduction 121 8.2 HetNet Mobility Optimization 122 8.3 Inter-site Carrier Aggregation with Dual Connectivity 126 8.3.1 User Data Rates with Inter-site Carrier Aggregation 126 8.3.2 Mobility with Dual Connectivity 131 8.4 Ultra Dense Network Interference Management 135 8.4.1 Ultra Dense Network Characteristics 135 8.4.2 Proactive Time-Domain Inter-cell Interference Coordination 136 8.4.3 Reactive Carrier-Based Inter-cell Interference Coordination 138 8.5 Power Saving with Small Cell On/Off 139 8.6 Multivendor Macro Cell and Small Cells 141 8.7 Summary 143 References 143 9 Learnings from Small Cell Deployments 145Brian Olsen and Harri Holma 9.1 Introduction 145 9.2 Small Cell Motivations by Mobile Operators 145 9.3 Small Cell Challenges and Solutions 146 9.4 Summary of Learnings from Small Cell Deployments 147 9.5 Installation Considerations 151 9.6 Example Small Cell Case Study 152 9.6.1 Site Solution and Backhaul 152 9.6.2 Coverage and User Data Rates 153 9.6.3 Macro Cell Offloading and Capacity 154 9.6.4 KPIs in Network Statistics 155 9.6.5 Mobility Performance 156 9.6.6 Parameter and RF Optimization 157 9.7 Summary 158 10 LTE Unlicensed 159Antti Toskala and Harri Holma 10.1 Introduction 159 10.2 Unlicensed Spectrum 160 10.3 Operation Environment 161 10.4 Motivation for the Use of Unlicensed Spectrum with LTE 162 10.5 Key Requirements for 5 GHz Band Coexistence 162 10.6 LTE Principle on Unlicensed Band 164 10.7 LTE Performance on the Unlicensed Band 165 10.8 Coexistence Performance 166 10.9 Coverage with LTE in 5 GHz Band 170 10.10 Standardization 172 10.11 Conclusions 172 References 173 11 LTE Macro Cell Evolution 175Mihai Enescu, Amitava Ghosh, Bishwarup Mondal and Antti Toskala 11.1 Introduction 175 11.2 Network-Assisted Interference Cancellation 176 11.3 Evolution of Antenna Array Technology 181 11.4 Deployment Scenarios for Antenna Arrays 182 11.5 Massive-MIMO Supported by LTE 187 11.5.1 Sectorization (Vertical)-Based Approaches 187 11.5.2 Reciprocity-Based Approaches 188 11.6 Further LTE Multi-antenna Standardization 189 11.7 Release 13 Advanced Receiver Enhancements 192 11.8 Conclusions 192 References 193 12 LTE Key Performance Indicator Optimization 195Jussi Reunanen, Jari Salo and Riku Luostari 12.1 Introduction 195 12.2 Key Performance Indicators 196 12.3 Physical Layer Optimization 197 12.4 Call Setup 200 12.4.1 Random Access Setup 202 12.4.2 RRC Connection Setup 208 12.4.3 E-RAB Setup 215 12.5 E-RAB Drop 218 12.5.1 Handover Performance 218 12.5.2 UE-Triggered RRC Connection Re-establishments 222 12.5.3 eNodeB-triggered RRC Connection Re-establishments 226 12.6 Handover and Mobility Optimization 228 12.7 Throughput Optimization 232 12.7.1 MIMO Multi-stream Usage Optimization 234 12.8 High-Speed Train Optimization 243 12.9 Network Density Benchmarking 246 12.10 Summary 247 References 248 13 Capacity Optimization 249Jussi Reunanen, Riku Luostari and Harri Holma 13.1 Introduction 249 13.2 Traffic Profiles in Mass Events 251 13.3 Uplink Interference Management 255 13.3.1 PUSCH 257 13.3.2 PUCCH 265 13.3.3 RACH and RRC Setup Success Rate 265 13.3.4 Centralized RAN 269 13.4 Downlink Interference Management 270 13.4.1 PDSCH 271 13.4.2 Physical Downlink Control Channel 276 13.5 Signalling Load and Number of Connected Users Dimensioning 279 13.5.1 Signalling Load 280 13.5.2 RRC-Connected Users 280 13.6 Load Balancing 284 13.7 Capacity Bottleneck Analysis 286 13.8 Summary 291 References 292 14 VoLTE Optimization 293Riku Luostari, Jari Salo, Jussi Reunanen and Harri Holma 14.1 Introduction 293 14.2 Voice Options for LTE Smartphones 293 14.3 Circuit Switched Fallback 294 14.3.1 Basic Concepts 294 14.3.2 CSFB Call Setup Time, Transition to Target RAT 296 14.3.3 CSFB Call Setup Success Rate 302 14.3.4 Return to LTE after CSFB Call 302 14.4 Voice over LTE 307 14.4.1 Setup Success Rate and Drop Rate 307 14.4.2 TTI Bundling and RLC Segmentation 310 14.4.3 Semi-persistent Scheduling 312 14.4.4 Packet Bundling 314 14.4.5 Re-establishment with Radio Preparations 315 14.4.6 Voice Quality on VoLTE 315 14.5 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity 322 14.5.1 Signalling Flows 322 14.5.2 Performance 326 14.6 Summary 331 References 331 15 Inter-layer Mobility Optimization 333Jari Salo and Jussi Reunanen 15.1 Introduction 333 15.2 Inter-layer Idle Mode Mobility and Measurements 334 15.2.1 Initial Cell Selection and Minimum Criteria for UE to Camp on a Cell 334 15.2.2 Summary of Cell Reselection Rules 336 15.2.3 Idle Mode Measurements 338 15.3 Inter-layer Connected Mode Measurements 344 15.4 Inter-layer Mobility for Coverage-Limited Network 350 15.4.1 Basic Concepts 350 15.4.2 Mapping Throughput Target to SINR, RSRQ and RSRP 353 15.4.3 Inter-layer Mobility Example #1 (Non-equal Priority Non-equal Bandwidth LTE Layers) 361 15.4.4 Inter-layer Mobility Example #2 (Equal Priority Equal Bandwidth LTE Layers) 368 15.5 Inter-layer Mobility for Capacity-Limited Networks 370 15.5.1 Static Load Balancing via Mobility Thresholds 371 15.5.2 Dynamic Load Balancing via eNodeB Algorithms 375 15.6 Summary 377 References 377 16 Smartphone Optimization 379Rafael Sanchez-Mejias, Laurent No¨el and Harri Holma 16.1 Introduction 379 16.2 Smartphone Traffic Analysis in LTE Networks 380 16.2.1 Data Volumes and Asymmetry 380 16.2.2 Traffic-Related Signalling 381 16.2.3 Mobility-Related Signalling 382 16.2.4 User Connectivity 382 16.3 Smartphone Power Consumption Optimization 384 16.3.1 Impact of Downlink Carrier Aggregation 384 16.3.2 Impact of Discontinuous Reception 385 16.4 Smartphone Operating Systems 391 16.5 Messaging Applications 391 16.6 Streaming Applications 393 16.7 Voice over LTE 394 16.7.1 VoLTE System Architecture 395 16.7.2 VoLTE Performance Analysis 396 16.7.3 Standby Performance 404 16.7.4 Impact of Network Loading and Radio Quality 405 16.8 Smartphone Battery, Baseband and RF Design Aspects 406 16.8.1 Trends in Battery Capacity 406 16.8.2 Trends in Cellular Chipset Power Consumption 409 16.8.3 Impact of Small Cells on Smartphone Power Consumption 412 16.9 Summary 421 References 421 17 Further Outlook for LTE Evolution and 5G 423Antti Toskala and Karri Ranta-aho 17.1 Introduction 423 17.2 Further LTE-Advanced Beyond Release 13 423 17.3 Towards 5G 426 17.4 5G Spectrum 427 17.5 Key 5G Radio Technologies 428 17.6 Expected 5G Schedule 430 17.7 Conclusions 432 References 432 Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisMost practitioners within wind energy have only a very basic knowledge about meteorology, leading to a lack of understanding of one of the most fundamental subjects in wind energy. This book will therefore provide an easy-to-understand introduction to the subject of meteorology, as seen from the viewpoint of wind energy. Catering for a range of academic backgrounds, the book is mathematically rigorous with accessible explanations for non-mathematically oriented readers. Through exercises in the text and at the end of each chapter the reader will be challenged to think, seek further information and practice the knowledge obtained from reading the book. This practical yet comprehensive reference will enable readers to fully understand the theoretical background of meteorology with wind energy in mind and will include topics such as: measurements; wind profiles; wakes; modelling; turbulence and the fundamentals of atmospheric flow on all scales including the local scale.<Table of ContentsDedication iii Foreword ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii List of Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 2 Meteorological Basics 5 2.1 Why does the wind blow? 5 2.2 The vertical structure of the atmosphere 9 2.3 Atmospheric variables and forces 13 2.3.1 Atmospheric Variables 13 2.3.2 Atmospheric Forces 13 2.3.3 Force Balances and the Geostrophic Wind 16 2.4 Length and time scales of atmospheric flow 20 2.5 Larger-scale systems (aka Weather) 22 2.5.1 Mid-latitudinal cyclone (low-pressure system) 22 2.5.2 Anticyclones (high-pressure systems) 23 2.5.3 Hurricanes 27 2.5.4 Monsoons 27 2.5.5 Climatological circulations 28 2.6 Summary 33 2.7 Exercises 34 3 Measurements 37 3.1 Philosophy: what does it mean to measure? 37 3.2 What do we measure? 40 3.3 Measurement theory 42 3.3.1 Are we good to go? 48 3.4 Practice 49 3.4.1 Measuring 49 3.4.2 Cup anemometer 52 3.4.3 Wind Vane 54 3.4.4 Sonic Anemometer 55 3.4.5 Hot wire 57 3.4.6 Pitot tube 57 3.4.7 Thermometer 58 3.4.8 Barometer 59 3.4.9 Remote sensing 60 3.4.10 Ceilometer 67 3.4.11 Weather balloon or the Radiosonde 67 3.4.12 Satellite-borne instruments 68 3.5 Summary 71 3.6 Exercises 72 4 The Wind Profile 73 4.1 A hand-waving way of deriving the simple log profile 73 4.2 Working with the log profile 75 4.3 The power law 77 4.4 Averaging times and other dependencies 79 4.5 Two famous profiles 80 4.6 Zero-plane displacement 82 4.7 Internal Boundary Layers (IBL) 83 4.8 Stability 86 4.9 Monin-Obukhov Theory 90 4.10 Deviations with height 94 4.11 Connection with geostrophic drag law 95 4.12 Effect of orography, obstacles and thermal flows on the profile 96 4.13 Direction profile 96 4.14 Summary 97 4.15 Excercises 97 5 Local Flow 99 5.1 Local effects 100 5.2 Orographic forcing 100 5.2.1 Analytical models 101 5.2.2 Attached flow: Flow in simple terrain 104 5.2.3 Detached flow: Flow in complex terrain 107 5.2.4 More advanced models for flow in complex terrain 109 5.3 Roughness 111 5.4 Obstacles 113 5.5 Thermally-driven flows 116 5.5.1 Sea/land breezes 116 5.5.2 Ana-/katabatic winds 118 5.6 Effect of stability 120 5.7 Summary 120 5.8 Exercises 120 6 Turbulence 123 6.1 What generates turbulence? 125 6.2 Reynolds Decomposition and Averaging 125 6.3 Spectra 126 6.3.1 Understanding Fourier analysis and spectra, a poor man/woman’s approach 127 6.3.2 Standard types of spectra 131 6.4 Measuring Turbulence 135 6.5 Turbulent Loads 135 6.6 Extreme winds 137 6.7 Summary 137 6.8 Exercises 138 7 Wakes 139 7.1 Turbine-to-turbine wakes 140 7.1.1 The NO Jensen model 142 7.1.2 The Ainslie model 145 7.1.3 Similarity theory 147 7.1.4 Effect on power 149 7.1.5 Wake models, summary 152 7.2 Several wind turbines, i.e. a wind farm 153 7.3 Advanced topics 153 7.3.1 Measuring the wakes 153 7.3.2 Onshore/offshore wakes 155 7.3.3 Very large wind farms, state of the art 156 7.3.4 Wind farm to wind farm interaction 156 7.4 Summary 156 7.5 Exercises 157 8 Modelling 159 8.1 Modelling and what it means 159 8.2 Input 159 8.3 Modelling 160 8.3.1 NWP (Numerical Weather Prediction) models 163 8.3.2 Sub-grid processes 166 8.4 Output 167 8.5 Errors 168 8.6 So, what is a good model? 169 8.7 Chaos 170 8.7.1 Ensemble prediction 171 8.8 Summary 171 8.9 Exercises 173 9 Conclusion 175 References 177 A Cheat sheet 181 B Answers to Exercises 185 C Sample wind speed and direction data 203 Index 205

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a simplified visionary approach about the future direction of IoT, addressing its wide-scale adoption in many markets, its interception with advanced technology, the explosive growth in data, and the emergence of data analytics. IoT business applications span multiple vertical markets. The objective is to inspire creative thinking and collaboration among startups and entrepreneurs which will breed innovation and deliver IoT solutions that will positively impact us by making business processes more efficient, and improving our quality of life. With increasing proliferation of smart-phones and social media, data generated by user wearable/mobile devices continue to be key sources of information about us and the markets around us. Better insights will be gained through cognitive computation coupled with business intelligence and visual analytics that are GIS-based.Table of ContentsForeword xi About the Authors xv Preface xix 1 Introductions and Motivation 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Book 1 1.2.1 Objectives 1 1.2.2 Benefits 2 1.2.3 Organization 3 1.2.4 Book Cover 4 1.2.5 Impact of C-IoT 6 1.2.6 Summary 8 1.3 C-IoT Terms of References 9 1.3.1 Introduction 10 1.3.2 Need for IoT Framework 12 1.3.3 C-IoT Domains and Business Applications Model 13 1.3.4 Roadmap of IoT 20 1.3.5 C-IoT Platform/Developer Community 22 1.3.6 C-IoT Opportunities for Applications, Solutions, and Systems 23 1.4 The Future 26 1.4.1 General Trends 26 1.4.2 Point Solutions 27 1.4.3 Collaborative Internet of Things 29 1.4.4 C-IoT and RFID 36 1.4.5 C-IoT and Nanotechnology 38 1.4.6 Cyber-Collaborative IoT (C2-IoT) 39 1.4.7 C2-IoT and Ebola Case 40 1.4.8 Summary 43 References 46 2 Application Requirements 47 2.1 C-IoT Landscape 47 2.1.1 C-IoT Model and Architecture Layers 47 2.1.2 C-IoT Model and Enabling Technologies 48 2.1.3 Definition of Key Elements 50 2.1.4 Requirement Considerations 64 2.1.5 C-IoT System Solution – Requirement Considerations 67 2.2 Application Requirements – Use Cases 75 2.3 Health and Fitness System for Individual/Industry/Infrastructure (Lead Example) 76 2.3.1 Landscape 76 2.3.2 Health & Fitness Sensing Requirements 79 2.3.3 Health & Fitness Gateway Requirements 80 2.3.4 Health & Fitness Service Requirements 80 2.3.5 Health & Fitness and Solution Considerations 83 2.3.6 Health & Fitness and System Considerations 84 2.3.7 Health & Fitness and Hospitals 84 2.4 Video Surveillance, Drone, and Machine Vision 84 2.4.1 Landscape 84 2.4.2 Video Surveillance – across Home, Industry, and Infrastructure 86 2.4.3 Video Surveillance Sensing Requirements 88 2.4.4 Video Surveillance Gateway Requirements 89 2.4.5 Video Surveillance Services 90 2.4.6 Example: Red-Light Camera – Photo Enforcement Camera 93 2.4.7 Conclusion 94 2.5 Smart Home and Building 95 2.5.1 Landscape 95 2.5.2 Requirements 97 2.5.3 Smart Home & Building Sensing Requirements 99 2.5.4 Smart Home & Building Gateway Requirements 99 2.5.5 Smart Home & Building Services 100 2.6 Smart Energy 101 2.6.1 Landscape 101 2.6.2 Requirements 102 2.6.3 Smart Energy and Sensing Requirements 103 2.6.4 Smart Energy and Gateway Requirements 103 2.6.5 Smart Energy – Services 103 2.6.6 The Smart Energy App 104 2.6.7 Smart Energy and Network Security 105 2.7 Track and Monitor 106 2.7.1 Landscape 106 2.7.2 Track and Monitor – Sensing Requirements 106 2.7.3 Track and Monitor – Services 107 2.7.4 Track and Monitor – Solution Considerations 108 2.7.5 Track and Monitor Examples 108 2.8 Smart Factory 109 2.8.1 Factory Automation – Robot 109 2.8.2 Industrial 110 2.8.3 Service Robot 112 2.9 Others (Smart Car, Smart Truck, Drone, Machine Vision, and Smart City) 113 2.9.1 Smart Car 113 2.9.2 Smart Roadside 119 2.9.3 Drone 121 2.9.4 Machine Vision 123 2.9.5 Smart City 124 References 128 3 C-IoT Applications and Services 131 3.1 Smart IoT Application Use Cases 132 3.1.1 Health Monitoring – Individual Level (Fitness/Health-Tracking Wearables) 134 3.1.2 Health Monitoring at Business Level (e.g., Clinic and Homes for the Elderly) 137 3.1.3 Home and Building Automation – Individual Level (Smart Home) 146 3.1.4 Smart Energy and Smart Grid 158 3.1.5 Smart Energy Gateways 172 3.1.6 Industrial and Factory Automation 182 3.1.7 Smart Transportation and Fleet Logistics (Connected Cars – V2X: V2V, V2I) 185 3.1.8 Smart City 189 3.2 Smart IoT Platform 190 3.2.1 Smart IoT Software Gateway Platform 191 3.2.2 Smart Sensor Fusion Software Platform 195 3.3 Secured C-IoT Software Platform 196 3.3.1 Overview 197 3.3.2 C-IoT Security – Example of Smart Energy 197 3.3.3 Securing NAN (Metrology-to-Concentrator) 199 3.3.4 Securing Home Area Network (HAN) 201 3.3.5 Securing WAN (Concentrator-to-Substation/Utility Servers) 203 3.3.6 Platform Solution for Concentrator 203 3.3.7 Platform Solution for Substation/Utility Servers 204 3.3.8 Network Topology and IP Addressing: WAN 204 3.3.9 Security on the Concentrator and Utility Servers 204 3.3.10 Summary on C-IoT Security 205 References 207 4 IoT Reference Design Kit 209 4.1 Hardware Equipment List for the Demonstration 210 4.2 Software Required for Demonstration 210 4.3 Safely Power Off the Reference Platform 214 4.4 ZigBee Home and Building Automation 215 4.4.1 Troubleshooting ZigBee Home and Building Automation 217 4.5 Network Video Recorder (NVR) for Video Surveillance 217 4.5.1 Troubleshooting NVR 219 4.6 Internet 3G Broadband Gateway 219 4.7 UPNP 220 4.8 Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) Media Server 221 4.8.1 Set Up Reference Platform as DLNA Server 221 4.8.2 Set Up DLNA Clients 222 References 223 5 C-IoT Cloud-Based Services and C-IoT User Device Diversity 225 5.1 C-IoT Cloud-Based Services 225 5.1.1 Introduction and Drivers to C-IoT Service Platform 225 5.1.2 Classes of C-IoT Cloud Computing 227 5.1.3 C-IoT Innovative and Collaborative Services 228 5.1.4 The Emerging Data Center LAN 229 5.2 C-IoT User Device Diversity 231 5.2.1 Introduction 231 5.2.2 C-IoT Developers/Platform 232 5.2.3 Wearable Devices – Individual 234 5.2.4 Harvesting (Self-Powered Nodes) – Infrastructure Applications 235 5.2.5 Embedded Devices and Servers 235 5.2.6 Performing Sentiment Analysis Using Big Data 236 5.2.7 IBM Watson for Cognitive Innovations 237 5.2.8 Far-Reaching Consequences 237 5.2.9 C-IoT (Collaborative IoT) 238 References 238 6 Impact of C-IoT and Tips 239 6.1 Impact on Business Process Productivity and Smart of Digital Life 239 6.1.1 Individual 239 6.1.2 Industry 240 6.1.3 Infrastructure 241 6.2 Considerations of Developing Differentiated C-IoT Solutions 242 6.2.1 Software Processes and Platform 242 6.2.2 Standardization 242 6.2.3 Sensors and C-IoT 243 6.2.4 Advertising Ecosystem Value Exchange 244 6.2.5 Opportunity with Industry Supply Chain for Material Handling 244 6.3 Practical Tips on Maintaining Digital Lifestyle 247 6.3.1 Mobile and Wearable Computing 247 6.3.2 Robotics and Automation 248 6.3.3 Sensors and C-IoT 249 6.3.4 Big Data and Predictive Analysis 250 6.3.5 The Changing Workforce 250 6.3.6 Sustainability 251 References 251 7 Conclusion 253 7.1 Simple C-IoT Domains and Model 253 7.2 Disruptive Business Applications of C-IoT 254 7.2.1 Individual 254 7.2.2 Industry 254 7.3 A New Digital Lifestyle 255 7.4 Development Platform 255 7.4.1 Influencers for Smart Connected Homes 256 7.4.2 Influencers for Industrial Internet 256 7.5 C-IoT Emerging Standards, Consortiums, and Other Initiatives 256 7.5.1 C-IoT Emerging Standards 257 7.5.2 C-IoT Emerging Consortiums 259 7.5.3 Forums, Workshops, and Other Initiatives 260 7.5.4 C-IoT and Radio Communications 260 7.5.5 C-IoT and Nanotechnology 261 7.5.6 C-IoT and Security 261 7.6 Final Note 262 References 262 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an overview of vehicular networks, fromtraffic engineering to human factors. The book addresses theunique design requirements for security and privacy preservationfor vehicular communications to increase road safety.Table of ContentsList of Figures xi List of Tables xv Acronyms xvii Preface xix 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 DSRC AND VANET 2 1.2.1 DSRC 2 1.2.2 VANET 3 1.2.3 Characteristics of VANET 6 1.3 Security and Privacy Threats 7 1.4 Security and Privacy Requirements 8 1.5 Challenges and Prospects 9 1.5.1 Conditional Privacy Preservation in VANETs 9 1.5.2 Authentication with Efficient Revocation in VANETs 10 1.6 Standardization and Related Activities 11 1.7 Security Primitives 13 1.8 Outline of the Book 17 References 17 2 GSIS: GROUP SIGNATURE AND ID-BASED SIGNATURE-BASED SECURE AND PRIVACY-PRESERVING PROTOCOL 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Preliminaries and Background 23 2.2.1 Group Signature 23 2.2.2 Bilinear Pairing and ID-Based Cryptography 23 2.2.3 Threat Model 23 2.2.4 Desired Requirements 24 2.3 Proposed Secure and Privacy-Preserving Protocol 25 2.3.1 Problem Formulation 25 2.3.2 System Setup 27 2.3.3 Security Protocol between OBUs 29 2.3.4 Security Protocol between RSUs and OBUs 38 2.4 Performance Evaluation 41 2.4.1 Impact of Traffic Load 43 2.4.2 Impact of Cryptographic Signature Verification Delay 43 2.4.3 Membership Revocation and Tracing Efficiency 45 2.5 Concluding Remarks 47 References 47 3 ECPP: EFFICIENT CONDITIONAL PRIVACY PRESERVATION PROTOCOL 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 System Model and Problem Formulation 52 3.2.1 System Model 52 3.2.2 Design Objectives 54 3.3 Proposed ECPP Protocol 55 3.3.1 System Initialization 55 3.3.2 OBU Short-Time Anonymous Key Generation 56 3.3.3 OBU Safety Message Sending 62 3.3.4 OBU Fast Tracking Algorithm 63 3.4 Analysis on Conditional Privacy Preservation 64 3.5 Performance Analysis 66 3.5.1 OBU Storage Overhead 66 3.5.2 OBU Computation Overhead on Verification 66 3.5.3 TA Computation Complexity on OBU Tracking 68 3.6 Concluding Remarks 69 References 69 4 PSEUDONYM-CHANGING STRATEGY FOR LOCATION PRIVACY 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Problem Definition 73 4.2.1 Network Model 73 4.2.2 Threat Model 74 4.2.3 Location Privacy Requirements 75 4.3 Proposed PCS Strategy for Location Privacy 75 4.3.1 KPSD Model for PCS Strategy 75 4.3.2 Anonymity Set Analysis for Achieved Location Privacy 79 4.3.3 Feasibility Analysis of PCS Strategy 85 4.4 Performance Evaluation 86 4.5 Concluding Remarks 89 References 89 5 RSU-AIDED MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION 91 5.1 Introduction 91 5.2 System Model and Preliminaries 93 5.2.1 System Model 93 5.2.2 Assumption 93 5.2.3 Problem Statement 94 5.2.4 Security Objectives 95 5.3 Proposed RSU-Aided Message Authentication Scheme 96 5.3.1 Overview 96 5.3.2 Mutual Authentication and Key Agreement between RSUs and Vehicles 96 5.3.3 Hash Aggregation 98 5.3.4 Verification 99 5.3.5 Privacy Enhancement 100 5.4 Performance Evaluation 101 5.4.1 Message Loss Ratio 102 5.4.2 Message Delay 102 5.4.3 Communication Overhead 104 5.5 Security Analysis 105 5.6 Concluding Remarks 106 References 107 6 TESLA-BASED BROADCAST AUTHENTICATION 109 6.1 Introduction 109 6.2 Timed Efficient and Secure Vehicular Communication Scheme 110 6.2.1 Preliminaries 110 6.2.2 System Formulation 112 6.2.3 Proposed TSVC Scheme 113 6.2.4 Enhanced TSVC with Nonrepudiation 118 6.2.5 Discussion 123 6.3 Security Analysis 129 6.4 Performance Evaluation 129 6.4.1 Impact of Vehicle Moving Speed 131 6.4.2 Impact of Vehicle Density 132 6.5 Concluding Remarks 134 References 134 7 DISTRIBUTED COOPERATIVE MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION 137 7.1 Introduction 137 7.2 Problem Formulation 138 7.2.1 Network Model 138 7.2.2 Security Model 139 7.3 Basic Cooperative Authentication Scheme 140 7.4 Secure Cooperative Authentication Scheme 141 7.4.1 Evidence and Token for Fairness 142 7.4.2 Authentication Proof 145 7.4.3 Flows of Proposed Scheme 146 7.5 Security Analysis 147 7.5.1 Linkability Attack 147 7.5.2 Free-Riding Attack without Authentication Efforts 147 7.5.3 Free-Riding Attack with Fake Authentication Efforts 148 7.6 Performance Evaluation 148 7.6.1 Simulation Settings 148 7.6.2 Simulation Results 149 7.7 Concluding Remarks 150 References 151 8 CONTEXT-AWARE COOPERATIVE AUTHENTICATION 153 8.1 Introduction 153 8.2 Message Trustworthiness in VANETs 156 8.3 System Model and Design Goal 159 8.3.1 Network Model 159 8.3.2 Attack Model 159 8.3.3 Design Goals 160 8.4 Preliminaries 160 8.4.1 Pairing Technique 160 8.4.2 Aggregate Signature and Batch Verification 160 8.5 Proposed AEMAT Scheme 161 8.5.1 System Setup 161 8.5.2 Registration 162 8.5.3 SER Generation and Broadcasting 162 8.5.4 SER Opportunistic Forwarding 162 8.5.5 SER Aggregated Authentication 163 8.5.6 SER Aggregated Trustworthiness 165 8.6 Security Discussion 168 8.6.1 Collusion Attacks 168 8.6.2 Privacy Protection of Witnesses 168 8.7 Performance Evaluation 169 8.7.1 Transmission Cost 169 8.7.2 Computational Cost 169 8.8 Concluding Remarks 170 References 170 9 FAST HANDOVER AUTHENTICATION BASED ON MOBILITY PREDICTION 173 9.1 Introduction 173 9.2 Vehicular Network Architecture 175 9.3 Proposed Fast Handover Authentication Scheme Based on Mobility Prediction 176 9.3.1 Multilayer Perceptron Classifier 176 9.3.2 Proposed Authentication Scheme 178 9.4 Security Analysis 183 9.4.1 Replay Attack 183 9.4.2 Forward Secrecy 183 9.5 Performance Evaluation 184 9.6 Concluding Remarks 185 References 186 Index 187

Read more less

Book SynopsisA computational perspective on partial order and lattice theory, focusing on algorithms and their applications This book provides a uniform treatment of the theory and applications of lattice theory.Trade Review"This nice book on lattices and their applications in computer science is written from the perspective of a computer scientist rather than a mathematician...Given its emphasis on algorithms and their complexity, it seems to be mainly intended for students of computer science and engineering. The author's approach is based on the premise that a student needs to learn the heuristics that guide the proofs, besides the proofs themselves, and to learn ways to extend and analyze theorems...One of the most important and valuable features of the book is its focus on applications of lattice theory. The author intends to treat applications on par with the theory." Altogether a "lovely book". (Mathematical Reviews/MathSciNet April 2017)Table of ContentsList of Figures xiii Nomenclature xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Relations 2 1.3 Partial Orders 3 1.4 Join and Meet Operations 5 1.5 Operations on Posets 7 1.6 Ideals and Filters 8 1.7 Special Elements in Posets 9 1.8 Irreducible Elements 10 1.9 Dissector Elements 11 1.10 Applications: Distributed Computations 11 1.11 Applications: Combinatorics 12 1.12 Notation and Proof Format 13 1.13 Problems 15 1.14 Bibliographic Remarks 15 2 Representing Posets 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Labeling Elements of The Poset 17 2.3 Adjacency List Representation 18 2.4 Vector Clock Representation 20 2.5 Matrix Representation 22 2.6 Dimension-Based Representation 22 2.7 Algorithms to Compute Irreducibles 23 2.8 Infinite Posets 24 2.9 Problems 26 2.10 Bibliographic Remarks 27 3 Dilworth’s Theorem 29 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Dilworth’s Theorem 29 3.3 Appreciation of Dilworth’s Theorem 30 3.4 Dual of Dilworth’s Theorem 32 3.5 Generalizations of Dilworth’s Theorem 32 3.6 Algorithmic Perspective of Dilworth’s Theorem 32 3.7 Application: Hall’s Marriage Theorem 33 3.8 Application: Bipartite Matching 34 3.9 Online Decomposition of Posets 35 3.10 A Lower Bound on Online Chain Partition 37 3.11 Problems 38 3.12 Bibliographic Remarks 39 4 Merging Algorithms 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Algorithm to Merge Chains in Vector Clock Representation 41 4.3 An Upper Bound for Detecting an Antichain of Size K 47 4.4 A Lower Bound for Detecting an Antichain of Size K 48 4.5 An Incremental Algorithm for Optimal Chain Decomposition 50 4.6 Problems 50 4.7 Bibliographic Remarks 51 5 Lattices 53 5.1 Introduction 53 5.2 Sublattices 54 5.3 Lattices as Algebraic Structures 55 5.4 Bounding The Size of The Cover Relation of a Lattice 56 5.5 Join-Irreducible Elements Revisited 57 5.6 Problems 59 5.7 Bibliographic Remarks 60 6 Lattice Completion 61 6.1 Introduction 61 6.2 Complete Lattices 61 6.3 Closure Operators 62 6.4 Topped ∩-Structures 63 6.5 Dedekind–Macneille Completion 64 6.6 Structure of Dedekind--Macneille Completion of a Poset 67 6.7 An Incremental Algorithm for Lattice Completion 69 6.8 Breadth First Search Enumeration of Normal Cuts 71 6.9 Depth First Search Enumeration of Normal Cuts 73 6.10 Application: Finding the Meet and Join of Events 75 6.11 Application: Detecting Global Predicates in Distributed Systems 76 6.12 Application: Data Mining 77 6.13 Problems 78 6.14 Bibliographic Remarks 78 7 Morphisms 79 7.1 Introduction 79 7.2 Lattice Homomorphism 79 7.3 Lattice Isomorphism 80 7.4 Lattice Congruences 82 7.5 Quotient Lattice 83 7.6 Lattice Homomorphism and Congruence 83 7.7 Properties of Lattice Congruence Blocks 84 7.8 Application: Model Checking on Reduced Lattices 85 7.9 Problems 89 7.10 Bibliographic Remarks 90 8 Modular Lattices 91 8.1 Introduction 91 8.2 Modular Lattice 91 8.3 Characterization of Modular Lattices 92 8.4 Problems 98 8.5 Bibliographic Remarks 98 9 Distributive Lattices 99 9.1 Introduction 99 9.2 Forbidden Sublattices 99 9.3 Join-Prime Elements 100 9.4 Birkhoff’s Representation Theorem 101 9.5 Finitary Distributive Lattices 104 9.6 Problems 104 9.7 Bibliographic Remarks 105 10 Slicing 107 10.1 Introduction 107 10.2 Representing Finite Distributive Lattices 107 10.3 Predicates on Ideals 110 10.4 Application: Slicing Distributed Computations 116 10.5 Problems 117 10.6 Bibliographic Remarks 118 11 Applications of Slicing to Combinatorics 119 11.1 Introduction 119 11.2 Counting Ideals 120 11.3 Boolean Algebra and Set Families 121 11.4 Set Families of Size k 122 11.5 Integer Partitions 123 11.6 Permutations 127 11.7 Problems 129 11.8 Bibliographic Remarks 129 12 Interval Orders 131 12.1 Introduction 131 12.2 Weak Order 131 12.3 Semiorder 133 12.4 Interval Order 134 12.5 Problems 136 12.6 Bibliographic Remarks 137 13 Tractable Posets 139 13.1 Introduction 139 13.2 Series–Parallel Posets 139 13.3 Two-Dimensional Posets 142 13.4 Counting Ideals of a Two-Dimensional Poset 145 13.5 Problems 146 13.6 Bibliographic Remarks 147 14 Enumeration Algorithms 149 14.1 Introduction 149 14.2 BFS Traversal 150 14.3 DFS Traversal 154 14.4 LEX Traversal 154 14.5 Uniflow Partition of Posets 160 14.6 Enumerating Tuples of Product Spaces 163 14.7 Enumerating All Subsets 163 14.8 Enumerating All Subsets of Size k 165 14.9 Enumerating Young’s Lattice 166 14.10 Enumerating Permutations 167 14.11 Lexical Enumeration of All Order Ideals of a Given Rank 168 14.12 Problems 172 14.13 Bibliographic Remarks 173 15 Lattice of Maximal Antichains 159 15.1 Introduction 159 15.2 Maximal Antichain Lattice 161 15.3 An Incremental Algorithm Based on Union Closure 163 15.4 An Incremental Algorithm Based on BFS 165 15.5 Traversal of the Lattice of Maximal Antichains 166 15.6 Application: Detecting Antichain-Consistent Predicates 168 15.7 Construction and Enumeration of Width Antichain Lattice 169 15.8 Lexical Enumeration of Closed Sets 171 15.9 Construction of Lattices Based on Union Closure 174 15.10 Problems 174 15.11 Bibliographic Remarks 175 16 Dimension Theory 177 16.1 Introduction 177 16.2 Chain Realizers 178 16.3 Standard Examples of Dimension Theory 179 16.4 Relationship Between the Dimension and the Width of a Poset 180 16.5 Removal Theorems for Dimension 181 16.6 Critical Pairs in the Poset 182 16.7 String Realizers 184 16.8 Rectangle Realizers 193 16.9 Order Decomposition Method and Its Applications 194 16.10 Problems 196 16.11 Bibliographic Remarks 197 17 Fixed Point Theory 215 17.1 Complete Partial Orders 215 17.2 Knaster–Tarski Theorem 216 17.3 Application: Defining Recursion Using Fixed Points 218 17.4 Problems 226 17.5 Bibliographic Remarks 227 Bibliography 229 Index 235

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes a full range of contemporary techniques for the design of transmitters and receivers for communications systems operating in the range from 1 through to 300 GHz. In this frequency range there is a wide range of technologies that need to be employed, with silicon ICs at the core but, compared with other electronics systems, a much greater use of more specialist devices and components for high performance for example, high Q-factor/low loss and good power efficiency. Many text books do, of course, cover these topics but what makes thisbook timely is the rapid adoption of millimetre-waves (frequencies from 30 to 300 GHz) for a wide range of consumer applications such as wireless high definition TV, ''5G'' Gigabit mobile internet systems and automotive radars. It has taken many years to develop low-cost technologies for suitable transmitters and receivers, so previously these frequencies have been employed only in expensive military and space applications. The book Table of ContentsPreface 1 Introduction 2 Transmitters and Receivers 3 Scattering Parameters 4 Lumped Element Filters 5 Transmission Line Theory 6 Transmission Line Components 7 Transmission-Line Filters 8 Semiconductor Devices 9 Impedance Matching 10 Amplifiers 11 Oscillators 12 Mixers and Modulators 13 RF MEMS 14 Antennas and Propagation 15 Digital Signal Processing for Transceivers 16 Packaging and Assembly 17 Electronic Design Automation 18 Measurement Techniques Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaster programming Arduino with this hands-on guide Arduino Sketches is a practical guide to programming the increasingly popular microcontroller that brings gadgets to life. Accessible to tech-lovers at any level, this book provides expert instruction on Arduino programming and hands-on practice to test your skills. You''ll find coverage of the various Arduino boards, detailed explanations of each standard library, and guidance on creating libraries from scratch plus practical examples that demonstrate the everyday use of the skills you''re learning. Work on increasingly advanced programming projects, and gain more control as you learn about hardware-specific libraries and how to build your own. Take full advantage of the Arduino API, and learn the tips and tricks that will broaden your skillset. The Arduino development board comes with an embedded processor and sockets that allow you to quickly attach peripherals without tools or solders. It''s easy to buildTable of ContentsIntroduction xxix Part I Introduction to Arduino 1 Chapter 1 Introduction to Arduino 3 Atmel AVR 5 The Arduino Project 7 The ATmega Series 8 The ATmega Series 8 The ATtiny Series 8 Other Series 9 The Different Arduinos 9 Arduino Uno 10 Arduino Leonardo 10 Arduino Ethernet 11 Arduino Mega 2560 11 Arduino Mini 13 Arduino Micro 13 Arduino Due 13 LilyPad Arduino 14 Arduino Pro 16 Arduino Robot 16 Arduino Esplora 18 Arduino Yún 18 Arduino Tre 19 Arduino Zero 19 Your Own Arduino? 20 Shields 20 What Is a Shield? 20 The Different Shields 21 Arduino Motor Shield 21 Arduino Wireless SD Shield 21 Arduino Ethernet Shield 21 Arduino WiFi Shield 22 Arduino GSM Shield 22 Your Own Shield 22 What Can You Do with an Arduino? 22 What You Will Need for This Book 23 Summary 24 Chapter 2 Programming for the Arduino 25 Installing Your Environment 26 Downloading the Software 27 Running the Software 28 Using Your Own IDE 29 Your First Program 29 Understanding Your First Sketch 33 Programming Basics 36 Variables and Data Types 36 Control Structures 38 if Statement 38 switch Case 39 while Loop 40 for Loop 41 Functions 42 Libraries 42 Summary 42 Chapter 3 Electronics Basics 45 Electronics 101 46 Voltage, Amperage, and Resistance 46 Voltage 47 Amperage 48 Resistance 48 Ohm’s Law 49 The Basic Components 49 Resistors 50 Different Resistor Values 50 Identifying Resistor Values 50 Using Resistors 52 Capacitors 53 Using Capacitors 54 Diodes 54 Different Types of Diodes 54 Using Diodes 55 Light-Emitting Diodes 55 Using LEDs 55 Transistors 56 Using Transistors 56 Breadboards 56 Inputs and Outputs 57 Connecting a Light-Emitting Diode 58 Calculation 58 Software 59 Hardware 60 What Now? 61 Summary 61 Part II Standard Libraries 63 Chapter 4 The Arduino Language 65 I/O Functions 65 Digital I/O 65 pinMode() 66 digitalRead() 66 digitalWrite() 67 Analog I/O 67 analogRead() 68 analogWrite() 68 Generating Audio Tones 69 tone() 69 noTone() 69 Reading Pulses 69 pulseIn() 70 Time Functions 70 delay() 70 delayMicroseconds() 71 millis() 71 micros() 71 Mathematical Functions 72 min() 72 max() 72 constrain() 73 abs() 73 map() 73 pow() 74 sqrt() 74 random() 74 Trigonometry 75 sin() 76 cos() 76 tan() 76 Constants 76 Interrupts 76 attachInterrupt() 77 detachInterrupt() 78 noInterrupts() 78 interrupts() 78 Summary 79 Chapter 5 Serial Communication 81 Introducing Serial Communication 82 UART Communications 84 Baud Rate 84 Data Bits 85 Parity 85 Stop Bits 86 Debugging and Output 86 Starting a Serial Connection 87 Writing Data 88 Sending Text 88 Sending Data 90 Reading Data 91 Starting Communications 91 Is Data Waiting? 91 Reading a Byte 92 Reading Multiple Bytes 92 Taking a Peek 93 Parsing Data 93 Cleaning Up 94 Example Program 95 SoftwareSerial 98 Summary 99 Chapter 6 EEPROM 101 Introducing EEPROM 101 The Different Memories on Arduino 103 The EEPROM Library 104 Reading and Writing Bytes 104 Reading and Writing Bits 105 Reading and Writing Strings 107 Reading and Writing Other Values 108 Example Program 110 Preparing EEPROM Storage 113 Adding Nonvolatile Memory 114 Summary 115 Chapter 7 SPI 117 Introducting SPI 118 SPI Bus 118 Comparison to RS-232 119 Confi guration 119 Communications 120 Arduino SPI 120 SPI Library 121 SPI on the Arduino Due 123 Example Program 125 Hardware 126 Sketch 128 Exercises 131 Summary 132 Chapter 8 Wire 133 Introducing Wire 134 Connecting I2C 135 I2C Protocol 135 Address 136 Communication 137 Communicating 138 Master Communications 139 Sending Information 139 Requesting Information 140 Slave Communications 141 Receiving Information 141 Sending Information 142 Example Program 142 Exercises 146 Traps and Pitfalls 147 Voltage Difference 147 Bus Speed 147 Shields with I2C 148 Summary 148 Chapter 9 Ethernet 149 Introduction 149 Ethernet 150 Ethernet Cables 151 Switches and Hubs 151 PoE 152 TCP/IP 152 MAC Address 153 IP Address 153 DNS 153 Port 153 Ethernet on Arduino 154 Importing the Ethernet Library 154 Starting Ethernet 155 Arduino as a Client 157 Sending and Receiving Data 158 Connecting to a Web Server 159 Example Program 161 Arduino as a Server 163 Serving Web Pages 164 Example Program 165 Sketch 165 Summary 167 Chapter 10 WiFi 169 Introduction 170 The WiFi Protocol 171 Topology 171 Network Parameters 172 Channels 172 Encryption 172 SSID 173 RSSI 173 Arduino WiFi 173 Importing the Library 174 Initialization 174 Status 175 Scanning Networks 176 Connecting and Configuring 177 Wireless Client 178 Wireless Server 179 Example Application 179 Hardware 181 Sketch 182 Exercises 189 Summary 190 Chapter 11 LiquidCrystal 191 Introduction 192 LiquidCrystal Library 194 Writing Text 195 Cursor Commands 196 Text Orientation 197 Scrolling 197 Custom Text 198 Example Program 199 Hardware 200 Software 201 Exercises 205 Summary 205 Chapter 12 SD 207 Introduction 208 SD Cards 211 Capacity 212 Speed 213 Using SD Cards with Arduino 213 Accepted SD Cards 214 Limitations 214 The SD Library 215 Importing the Library 215 Connecting a Card 215 Opening and Closing Files 216 Reading and Writing Files 217 Reading Files 217 Writing Files 218 Folder Operations 218 Card Operations 219 Advanced Usage 220 Example Program and Sketch 220 Summary 224 Chapter 13 TFT 225 Introduction 226 Technologies 227 TFT Library 228 Initialization 228 Screen Preparation 229 Text Operations 230 Basic Graphics 231 Coloring 232 Graphic Images 232 Example Application 233 Hardware 234 Sketch 234 Exercises 239 Summary 239 Chapter 14 Servo 241 Introduction to Servo Motors 242 Controlling Servo Motors 243 Connecting a Servo Motor 243 Moving Servo Motors 244 Disconnecting 245 Precision and Safety 246 Example Application 246 Schematic 248 Sketch 249 Exercises 250 Summary 251 Chapter 15 Stepper 253 Introducing Motors 254 Controlling a Stepper Motor 254 Hardware 255 Unipolar Versus Bipolar Stepper Motors 255 The Stepper Library 256 Example Project 257 Hardware 257 Sketch 258 Summary 260 Chapter 16 Firmata 261 Introducing Firmata 262 Firmata Library 262 Sending Messages 263 Receiving Messages 263 Callbacks 264 SysEx 266 Example Program 268 Summary 269 Chapter 17 GSM 271 Introducing GSM 272 Mobile Data Network 272 GSM 273 GPRS 274 EDGE 274 3 G 274 4 G and the Future 275 Modems 275 Arduino and GSM 276 Arduino GSM Library 276 GSM Class 278 SMS Class 279 VoiceCall Class 281 GPRS 282 Modem 284 Example Application 285 Summary 288 Part III Device-Specific Libraries 289 Chapter 18 Audio 291 Introducing Audio 292 Digital Sound Files 292 Music on the Arduino 294 Arduino Due 294 Digital to Analog Converters 295 Digital Audio to Analog 295 Creating Digital Audio 296 Storing Digital Audio 296 Playing Digital Audio 296 Example Program 298 Hardware 298 Sketch 300 Exercise 303 Summary 304 Chapter 19 Scheduler 305 Introducing Scheduling 306 Arduino Multitasking 307 Scheduler 308 Cooperative Multitasking 309 Noncooperative Functions 311 Example Program 313 Hardware 314 Sketch 316 Exercises 319 Summary 319 Chapter 20 USBHost 321 Introducing USBHost 322 USB Protocol 323 USB Devices 324 Keyboards 324 Mice 325 Hubs 325 Arduino Due 325 USBHost Library 327 Keyboards 327 Mice 329 Example Program 330 Hardware 331 Source Code 332 Summary 334 Chapter 21 Esplora 335 Introducing Esplora 336 The Arduino Esplora Library 337 RGB LED 337 Sensors 338 Buttons 339 Buzzer 340 TinkerKit 341 LCD Module 342 Example Program and Exercises 342 Summary 344 Chapter 22 Robot 345 Introducing Robot Library 346 Arduino Robot 348 Robot Library 349 Control Board 350 Robotic Controls 350 Sensor Reading 351 Personalizing Your Robot 353 LCD Screen 354 Music 356 Motor Board 357 Example Program and Exercises 358 Summary 360 Chapter 23 Bridge 361 Introducing Bridge Library 362 Bridge 363 Process 364 FileIO 366 YunServer 367 YunClient 368 Example Application 369 Hardware 369 Sketch 370 Exercises 373 Summary 373 Part IV User Libraries and Shields 375 Chapter 24 Importing Third-Party Libraries 377 Libraries 378 Finding Libraries 378 Importing a Library 379 Using an External Library 381 Example Application 384 Exercises 389 Summary 389 Chapter 25 Creating Your Own Shield 391 Creating a Shield 391 The Idea 392 The Required Hardware 392 The Required Software 393 Your First Shield 394 Step 1: The Breadboard 395 Step 2: The Schematic 398 Step 3: The PCB 402 Summary 404 Chapter 26 Creating Your Own Library 405 Libraries 405 Library Basics 406 Simple Libraries 406 Advanced Libraries 410 Adding Comments 413 Adding Examples 415 Read Me 415 Coding Style 416 Use CamelCase 416 Use English Words 416 Don’t Use External Libraries 417 Use Standard Names 417 Distributing Your Library 417 Closed Source Libraries 417 Example Library 418 The Library 418 Examples 424 README 427 Finishing Touches 428 Summary 428 Index 429

Read more less

Book SynopsisDISTRIBUTED MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL FOR PLANT-WIDE SYSTEMS In this book, experienced researchers gave a thorough explanation of distributed model predictive control (DMPC): its basic concepts, technologies, and implementation in plant-wide systems. Known for its error tolerance, high flexibility, and good dynamic performance, DMPC is a popular topic in the control field and is widely applied in many industries. To efficiently design DMPC systems, readers will be introduced to several categories of coordinated DMPCs, which are suitable for different control requirements, such as network connectivity, error tolerance, performance of entire closed-loop systems, and calculation of speed. Various real-life industrial applications, theoretical results, and algorithms are provided to illustrate key concepts and methods, as well as to provide solutions to optimize the global performance of plant-wide systems. Features system partition methods, coordinationTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Authors xv Acknowledgement xvii List of Figures xix List of Tables xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Plant-Wide System 1 1.2 Control System Structure of the Plant-Wide System 3 1.2.1 Centralized Control 4 1.2.2 Decentralized Control and Hierarchical Coordinated Decentralized Control 5 1.2.3 Distributed Control 6 1.3 Predictive Control 8 1.3.1 What is Predictive Control 8 1.3.2 Advantage of Predictive Control 9 1.4 Distributed Predictive Control 9 1.4.1 Why Distributed Predictive Control 9 1.4.2 What is Distributed Predictive Control 10 1.4.3 Advantage of Distributed Predictive Control 10 1.4.4 Classification of DMPC 11 1.5 About this Book 13 Part I FOUNDATION 2 Model Predictive Control 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Dynamic Matrix Control 20 2.2.1 Step Response Model 20 2.2.2 Prediction 21 2.2.3 Optimization 22 2.2.4 Feedback Correction 23 2.2.5 DMC with Constraint 24 2.3 Predictive Control with the State Space Model 26 2.3.1 System Model 27 2.3.2 Performance Index 28 2.3.3 Prediction 28 2.3.4 Closed-Loop Solution 30 2.3.5 State Space MPC with Constraint 31 2.4 Dual Mode Predictive Control 33 2.4.1 Invariant Region 33 2.4.2 MPC Formulation 34 2.4.3 Algorithms 35 2.4.4 Feasibility and Stability 36 2.5 Conclusion 37 3 Control Structure of Distributed MPC 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Centralized MPC 40 3.3 Single-Layer Distributed MPC 41 3.4 Hierarchical Distributed MPC 42 3.5 Example of the Hierarchical DMPC Structure 43 3.6 Conclusion 45 4 Structure Model and System Decomposition 47 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 System Mathematic Model 48 4.3 Structure Model and Structure Controllability 50 4.3.1 Structure Model 50 4.3.2 Function of the Structure Model in System Decomposition 51 4.3.3 Input–Output Accessibility 53 4.3.4 General Rank of the Structure Matrix 56 4.3.5 Structure Controllability 56 4.4 Related Gain Array Decomposition 58 4.4.1 RGA Definition 59 4.4.2 RGA Interpretation 60 4.4.3 Pairing Rules 61 4.5 Conclusion 63 Part II UNCONSTRAINED DISTRIBUTED PREDICTIVE CONTROL 5 Local Cost Optimization-based Distributed Model Predictive Control 67 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Local Cost Optimization-based Distributed Predictive Control 68 5.2.1 Problem Description 68 5.2.2 DMPC Formulation 69 5.2.3 Closed-loop Solution 72 5.2.4 Stability Analysis 79 5.2.5 Simulation Results 79 5.3 Distributed MPC Strategy Based on Nash Optimality 82 5.3.1 Formulation 83 5.3.2 Algorithm 86 5.3.3 Computational Convergence for Linear Systems 86 5.3.4 Nominal Stability of Distributed Model Predictive Control System 88 5.3.5 Performance Analysis with Single-step Horizon Control Under Communication Failure 89 5.3.6 Simulation Results 94 5.4 Conclusion 99 Appendix 99 Appendix A. QP problem transformation 99 Appendix B. Proof of Theorem 5.1 100 6 Cooperative Distributed Predictive Control 103 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Noniterative Cooperative DMPC 104 6.2.1 System Description 104 6.2.2 Formulation 104 6.2.3 Closed-Form Solution 107 6.2.4 Stability and Performance Analysis 109 6.2.5 Example 113 6.3 Distributed Predictive Control based on Pareto Optimality 114 6.3.1 Formulation 118 6.3.2 Algorithm 119 6.3.3 The DMPC Algorithm Based on Plant-Wide Optimality 119 6.3.4 The Convergence Analysis of the Algorithm 121 6.4 Simulation 121 6.5 Conclusions 123 7 Networked Distributed Predictive Control with Information Structure Constraints 125 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Noniterative Networked DMPC 126 7.2.1 Problem Description 126 7.2.2 DMPC Formulation 127 7.2.3 Closed-Form Solution 132 7.2.4 Stability Analysis 135 7.2.5 Analysis of Performance 135 7.2.6 Numerical Validation 137 7.3 Networked DMPC with Iterative Algorithm 144 7.3.1 Problem Description 144 7.3.2 DMPC Formulation 145 7.3.3 Networked MPC Algorithm 147 7.3.4 Convergence and Optimality Analysis for Networked 150 7.3.5 Nominal Stability Analysis for Distributed Control Systems 152 7.3.6 Simulation Study 153 7.4 Conclusion 159 Appendix 159 Appendix A. Proof of Lemma 7.1 159 Appendix B. Proof of Lemma 7.2 160 Appendix C. Proof of Lemma 7.3 160 Appendix D. Proof of Theorem 7.1 161 Appendix E. Proof of Theorem 7.2 161 Appendix F. Derivation of the QP problem (7.52) 164 Part III CONSTRAINT DISTRIBUTED PREDICTIVE CONTROL 8 Local Cost Optimization Based Distributed Predictive Control with Constraints 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Problem Description 170 8.3 Stabilizing Dual Mode Noncooperative DMPC with Input Constraints 171 8.3.1 Formulation 171 8.3.2 Algorithm Design for Resolving Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 176 8.4 Analysis 177 8.4.1 Recursive Feasibility of Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 177 8.4.2 Stability Analysis of Entire Closed-loop System 183 8.5 Example 184 8.5.1 The System 184 8.5.2 Performance Comparison with the Centralized MPC 185 8.6 Conclusion 187 9 Cooperative Distributed Predictive Control with Constraints 189 9.1 Introduction 189 9.2 System Description 190 9.3 Stabilizing Cooperative DMPC with Input Constraints 191 9.3.1 Formulation 191 9.3.2 Constraint C-DMPC Algorithm 193 9.4 Analysis 194 9.4.1 Feasibility 194 9.4.2 Stability 199 9.5 Simulation 201 9.6 Conclusion 208 10 Networked Distributed Predictive Control with Inputs and Information Structure Constraints 209 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Problem Description 210 10.3 Constrained N-DMPC 212 10.3.1 Formulation 212 10.3.2 Algorithm Design for Resolving Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 218 10.4 Analysis 219 10.4.1 Feasibility 219 10.4.2 Stability 225 10.5 Formulations Under Other Coordination Strategies 227 10.5.1 Local Cost Optimization Based DMPC 227 10.5.2 Cooperative DMPC 228 10.6 Simulation Results 229 10.6.1 The System 229 10.6.2 Performance of Closed-loop System under the N-DMPC 230 10.6.3 Performance Comparison with the Centralized MPC and the Local Cost Optimization based MPC 231 10.7 Conclusions 236 Part IV APPLICATION 11 Hot-Rolled Strip Laminar Cooling Process with Distributed Predictive Control 239 11.1 Introduction 239 11.2 Laminar Cooling of Hot-rolled Strip 240 11.2.1 Description 240 11.2.2 Thermodynamic Model 241 11.2.3 Problem Statement 242 11.3 Control Strategy of HSLC 244 11.3.1 State Space Model of Subsystems 244 11.3.2 Design of Extended Kalman Filter 247 11.3.3 Predictor 247 11.3.4 Local MPC Formulation 248 11.3.5 Iterative Algorithm 249 11.4 Numerical Experiment 251 11.4.1 Validation of Designed Model 251 11.4.2 Convergence of EKF 252 11.4.3 Performance of DMPC Comparing with Centralized MPC 252 11.4.4 Advantages of the Proposed DMPC Framework Comparing with the Existing Method 253 11.5 Experimental Results 256 11.6 Conclusion 258 12 High-Speed Train Control with Distributed Predictive Control 263 12.1 Introduction 263 12.2 System Description 264 12.3 N-DMPC for High-Speed Trains 264 12.3.1 Three Types of Force 264 12.3.2 The Force Analysis of EMUs 266 12.3.3 Model of CRH2 267 12.3.4 Performance Index 271 12.3.5 Optimization Problem 272 12.4 Simulation Results 272 12.4.1 Parameters of CRH2 273 12.4.2 Simulation Matrix 273 12.4.3 Results and Some Comments 274 12.5 Conclusion 278 13 Operation Optimization of Multitype Cooling Source System Based on DMPC 279 13.1 Introduction 279 13.2 Structure of Joint Cooling System 279 13.3 Control Strategy of Joint Cooling System 280 13.3.1 Economic Optimization Strategy 281 13.3.2 Design of Distributed Model Predictive Control in Multitype Cold Source System 283 13.4 Results and Analysis of Simulation 286 13.5 Conclusion 292 References 293 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaintaining a stable level of power quality in the distribution network is a growing challenge due to increased use of power electronics converters in domestic, commercial and industrial sectors. Power quality deterioration is manifested in increased losses; poor utilization of distribution systems; mal-operation of sensitive equipment and disturbances to nearby consumers, protective devices, and communication systems. However, as the energy-saving benefits will result in increased AC power processed through power electronics converters, there is a compelling need for improved understanding of mitigation techniques for power quality problems. This timely book comprehensively identifies, classifies, analyses and quantifies all associated power quality problems, including the direct integration of renewable energy sources in the distribution system, and systematically delivers mitigation techniques to overcome these problems. Key features: Emphasis on in-depth leTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xiv 1 Power Quality: An Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 State of the Art on Power Quality 2 1.3 Classification of Power Quality Problems 3 1.4 Causes of Power Quality Problems 4 1.5 Effects of Power Quality Problems on Users 4 1.6 Classification of Mitigation Techniques for Power Quality Problems 6 1.7 Literature and Resource Material on Power Quality 6 1.8 Summary 7 1.9 Review Questions 8 References 8 2 Power Quality Standards and Monitoring 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 State of the Art on Power Quality Standards and Monitoring 11 2.3 Power Quality Terminologies 12 2.4 Power Quality Definitions 15 2.5 Power Quality Standards 16 2.6 Power Quality Monitoring 18 2.7 Numerical Examples 20 2.8 Summary 39 2.9 Review Questions 39 2.10 Numerical Problems 40 2.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 43 References 46 3 Passive Shunt and Series Compensation 48 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 State of the Art on Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 48 3.3 Classification of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 49 3.4 Principle of Operation of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 51 3.5 Analysis and Design of Passive Shunt Compensators 51 3.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 62 3.7 Numerical Examples 63 3.8 Summary 85 3.9 Review Questions 85 3.10 Numerical Problems 87 3.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 89 References 93 4 Active Shunt Compensation 96 4.1 Introduction 96 4.2 State of the Art on DSTATCOMs 96 4.3 Classification of DSTATCOMs 97 4.4 Principle of Operation and Control of DSTATCOMs 108 4.5 Analysis and Design of DSTATCOMs 133 4.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of DSTATCOMs 136 4.7 Numerical Examples 141 4.8 Summary 158 4.9 Review Questions 158 4.10 Numerical Problems 159 4.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 162 References 167 5 Active Series Compensation 170 5.1 Introduction 170 5.2 State of the Art on Active Series Compensators 171 5.3 Classification of Active Series Compensators 171 5.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Active Series Compensators 178 5.5 Analysis and Design of Active Series Compensators 183 5.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Active Series Compensators 185 5.7 Numerical Examples 190 5.8 Summary 216 5.9 Review Questions 217 5.10 Numerical Problems 218 5.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 220 References 226 6 Unified Power Quality Compensators 229 6.1 Introduction 229 6.2 State of the Art on Unified Power Quality Compensators 230 6.3 Classification of Unified Power Quality Compensators 231 6.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Unified Power Quality Compensators 237 6.5 Analysis and Design of Unified Power Quality Compensators 246 6.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of UPQCs 249 6.7 Numerical Examples 252 6.8 Summary 292 6.9 Review Questions 292 6.10 Numerical Problems 293 6.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 297 References 303 7 Loads That Cause Power Quality Problems 306 7.1 Introduction 306 7.2 State of the Art on Nonlinear Loads 307 7.3 Classification of Nonlinear Loads 308 7.4 Power Quality Problems Caused by Nonlinear Loads 313 7.5 Analysis of Nonlinear Loads 314 7.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Nonlinear Loads 314 7.7 Numerical Examples 314 7.8 Summary 327 7.9 Review Questions 328 7.10 Numerical Problems 329 7.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 330 References 334 8 Passive Power Filters 337 8.1 Introduction 337 8.2 State of the Art on Passive Power Filters 338 8.3 Classification of Passive Filters 338 8.4 Principle of Operation of Passive Power Filters 344 8.5 Analysis and Design of Passive Power Filters 349 8.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Passive Power Filters 350 8.7 Limitations of Passive Filters 353 8.8 Parallel Resonance of Passive Filters with the Supply System and Its Mitigation 355 8.9 Numerical Examples 360 8.10 Summary 387 8.11 Review Questions 387 8.12 Numerical Problems 388 8.13 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 391 References 395 9 Shunt Active Power Filters 397 9.1 Introduction 397 9.2 State of the Art on Shunt Active Power Filters 398 9.3 Classification of Shunt Active Power Filters 398 9.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Shunt Active Power Filters 405 9.5 Analysis and Design of Shunt Active Power Filters 413 9.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Shunt Active Power Filters 417 9.7 Numerical Examples 421 9.8 Summary 438 9.9 Review Questions 438 9.10 Numerical Problems 439 9.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 442 References 447 10 Series Active Power Filters 452 10.1 Introduction 452 10.2 State of the Art on Series Active Power Filters 453 10.3 Classification of Series Active Power Filters 453 10.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Series Active Power Filters 456 10.5 Analysis and Design of Series Active Power Filters 462 10.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Series Active Power Filters 465 10.7 Numerical Examples 467 10.8 Summary 492 10.9 Review Questions 492 10.10 Numerical Problems 493 10.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 496 References 501 11 Hybrid Power Filters 504 11.1 Introduction 504 11.2 State of the Art on Hybrid Power Filters 505 11.3 Classification of Hybrid Power Filters 506 11.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Hybrid Power Filters 519 11.5 Analysis and Design of Hybrid Power Filters 527 11.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Hybrid Power Filters 528 11.7 Numerical Examples 534 11.8 Summary 559 11.9 Review Questions 559 11.10 Numerical Problems 561 11.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 563 References 569 Index 579

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is intended as an advanced text for courses in antennas, with a focus on the mature but vital background field of aperture antennas. The book isaimed atfinal year, MSc, PhD and Post-Doctoral students, as well as readers who are moving from academia into industry, beginning careers as wireless engineers, system designers, in R&D, or for practising engineers. It assumes the reader has undertaken an earlier course of study on Maxwell''s equations, fields and waves. Some of these topics are summarised in the early few chapters in order to provide continuity and background for the remaining chapters. The aperture antennas covered include the main types of horns, reflectors and arrays as well as microstrip patches, reflectarrays and lenses. To provide more than a superficial treatment of arrays, the topic of mutual coupling is covered in greater detail than most similar books in the area. Also included is an introduction to arrays on non-planar surfaces, which is of impTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgement xv 1 Introduction 1 References 6 2 Background Theory 7 2.1 Maxwell’s Equations for Time-Harmonic Fields 7 2.1.1 Field Representation in Terms of Axial Field Components in Source-Free Regions 9 2.1.2 Boundary Conditions 10 2.1.3 Poynting’s Theorem 11 2.1.4 Reciprocity 11 2.1.5 Duality 13 2.1.6 Method of Images 13 2.1.7 Geometric Optics 13 2.2 Equivalent Sources 15 2.2.1 Aperture in a Ground Plane 17 2.2.2 Conformal Surfaces 17 2.3 Radiation 18 2.3.1 Near-Field 21 2.3.2 Far-Field 21 2.3.3 Mutual Coupling Between Infinitesimal Current Elements 23 2.4 Problems 26 References 27 3 Fields Radiated by an Aperture 29 3.1 Radiation Equations 29 3.2 Near-Field Region 32 3.3 Fresnel Zone 32 3.4 Far-Field Region 33 3.4.1 Example of a Uniformly Illuminated Rectangular Aperture 38 3.5 Radiation Characteristics 40 3.5.1 Radiation Pattern 41 3.5.2 Half-Power Beamwidth 42 3.5.3 Front-to-Back Ratio 42 3.5.4 Polarization 42 3.5.5 Phase Centre 44 3.5.6 Antenna Gain and Directivity 44 3.5.7 Effective Aperture 46 3.5.8 Radiation Resistance 47 3.5.9 Input Impedance 47 3.5.10 Antenna as a Receiver 48 3.6 Aberrations 48 3.7 Power Coupling Theorem 50 3.8 Field Analysis by High-Frequency Methods 52 3.8.1 Asymptotic Physical Optics 53 3.8.1.1 Example: Scattering Radiation from Large Conducting Wire Loop 55 3.8.1.2 Special Case: APO in Two Dimensions 57 3.8.2 Geometrical Theory of Diffraction 61 3.9 Problems 67 References 70 4 Waveguide and Horn Antennas 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Radiation from Rectangular Waveguide 72 4.3 Pyramidal Horn 74 4.3.1 Design of a Standard Gain Pyramidal Horn 79 4.3.2 Dielectric-Loaded Rectangular Horn 81 4.4 Circular Waveguides and Horns 85 4.4.1 Circular Waveguide 86 4.4.1.1 Matching at a Circular Aperture 90 4.4.2 Coaxial Waveguide 91 4.4.2.1 Matching of a Coaxial Aperture 95 4.4.2.2 Coaxial Apertures with an Extended Central Conductor 97 4.4.3 Conical Horn 101 4.4.4 Corrugated Radiators 105 4.4.5 Cross-Polarization 110 4.5 Advanced Horn Analysis Topics 114 4.5.1 Flange Effects 114 4.5.2 Mode Matching in Horns 115 4.5.3 Profiled Horns 123 4.5.3.1 Optimization 126 4.5.3.2 Parametric Profiles 126 4.6 Problems 131 References 133 5 Microstrip Patch Antenna 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Microstrip Patch Aperture Model 138 5.3 Microstrip Patch on a Cylinder 143 5.4 Problems 146 References 147 6 Reflector Antennas 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Radiation from a Paraboloidal Reflector 150 6.2.1 Geometric Optics Method for a Reflector 152 6.2.1.1 Dipole Feed 154 6.2.1.2 Circular Waveguides and Horn Feeds 157 6.2.2 Edge Taper and Edge Illumination 160 6.2.3 Induced Current Method 162 6.2.3.1 Radiation from Symmetrical Reflectors with General Profile 164 6.2.3.2 Spherical Reflector 167 6.2.4 Receive-Mode Method 168 6.3 Focal Region Fields of a Paraboloidal Reflector 172 6.3.1 Asymptotic Representation of the Scattered Field 176 6.4 Blockage 181 6.5 Reflector Antenna Efficiency 183 6.6 Reflector Surface Errors 188 6.7 Offset-fed Parabolic Reflector 189 6.8 Cassegrain Antenna 196 6.8.1 Classical Cassegrain 196 6.8.2 Offset Cassegrain Antenna 198 6.9 Shaped Reflectors 202 6.9.1 Reflector Synthesis by Geometric Optics 203 6.9.2 Reflector Synthesis by Numerical Optimization 209 6.10 Problems 213 References 217 7 Arrays of Aperture Antennas 219 7.1 Introduction 219 7.2 Two-Dimensional Planar Arrays 219 7.2.1 Rectangular Planar Array 221 7.2.2 Hexagonal Array 223 7.3 Mutual Coupling in Aperture Antennas 228 7.3.1 Infinite Periodic Arrays 230 7.3.2 Finite Arrays 235 7.3.3 Mutual Impedance and Scattering Matrix Representation 239 7.3.4 Analysis of Arrays of Aperture Antennas by Integral Equation Methods 242 7.3.4.1 Moment Method Approach 245 7.3.4.2 Mode Matching in Arrays 247 7.3.5 Mutual Coupling Analysis in Waveguide Apertures 249 7.3.5.1 Rectangular Waveguide Arrays 249 7.3.5.2 Self-Admittance of TE10 Mode 253 7.3.5.3 Arrays of Circular and Coaxial Waveguides 257 7.3.5.4 Self-Admittance of TE11 Mode in Circular Waveguide 262 7.3.5.5 Mutual Coupling in Other Geometries 266 7.3.5.6 Waveguide-Fed Slot Arrays 269 7.3.5.7 Arrays of Microstrip Patches 273 7.3.5.8 A Numerical Formulation of Coupling in Arbitrary Shaped Apertures 278 7.3.6 An Asymptotic Expression for Mutual Admittance 281 7.3.7 Radiation from Finite Arrays with Mutual Coupling 284 7.4 Techniques for Minimizing Effects of Mutual Coupling 286 7.4.1 Element Spacing 286 7.4.2 Aperture Field Taper 287 7.4.3 Electromagnetic Fences 287 7.4.4 Mutual Coupling Compensation 287 7.4.5 Power Pattern Synthesis Including the Effect of Mutual Coupling 289 7.5 Low-Sidelobe Arrays and Shaped Beams 289 7.6 Problems 300 References 302 8 Conformal Arrays of Aperture Antennas 307 8.1 Introduction 307 8.2 Radiation from a Conformal Aperture Array 308 8.2.1 Waveguide with E-Field Polarized in Circumferential Direction 308 8.2.2 Waveguide with E-Polarized in Axial Direction 315 8.2.3 Historical Overview of Asymptotic Solutions for Conformal Surfaces 317 8.3 Mutual Coupling in Conformal Arrays 319 8.3.1 Asymptotic Solution for Surface Dyadic 322 8.4 Coupling in a Concave Array: Periodic Solution 325 8.5 Problems 331 References 331 9 Reflectarrays and Other Aperture Antennas 335 9.1 Introduction 335 9.2 Basic Theory of Reflectarrays 337 9.3 Extensions to the Basic Theory 341 9.4 Other Aperture Antennas 344 9.4.1 Lenses 344 9.4.2 Fabry–Pérot Resonator Antennas 352 9.5 Problems 354 References 356 10 Aperture Antennas in Application 357 10.1 Fabrication 357 10.1.1 Machining 357 10.1.2 Printing 358 10.1.3 Mould Formation 358 10.1.4 Electroforming 358 10.1.5 Lightweight Construction 358 10.1.6 Pressing and Stretch Forming of Reflector Surfaces 359 10.1.7 Assembly and Alignment 360 10.2 Measurement and Testing 361 10.2.1 Far-Field Measurement 361 10.2.2 Near-Field Measurement 364 10.2.3 Intermediate-Field Measurement 369 10.3 Modern Aperture Antennas 371 10.3.1 Compact Low-Sidelobe Horns 371 10.3.2 Multibeam Earth Station 375 10.3.3 Radio Telescopes 379 10.4 Problems 387 References 388 Appendix A: Useful Identities 391 A.1 Vector Identities 391 A.2 Geometric Identities 392 A.3 Transverse Representation of the Electromagnetic Field 393 A.4 Useful Functions 394 References 394 Appendix B: Bessel Functions 395 B.1 Properties 395 B.2 Computation of Bessel Functions 400 References 401 Appendix C: Proof of Stationary Behaviour of Mutual Impedance 403 Appendix D: Free-Space Dyadic Magnetic Green’s Function 405 Reference 406 Appendix E: Complex Fresnel Integrals 407 References 409 Appendix F: Properties of Hankel Transform Functions 411 References 412 Appendix G: Properties of Fock Functions for Convex Surfaces 413 G.1 Surface Fock Functions 413 G.1.1 Soft Surface Functions (m > 0) 414 G.1.2 Hard Surface Fock Functions (m < 0) 415 G.2 Acoustic Fock Functions 417 G.2.1 Soft Acoustic Fock Function 418 G.2.2 Hard Acoustic Fock Function 419 References 421 Index 423

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe essential guide that combines power system fundamentals with the practical aspects of equipment design and operation in modern power systems Written by an experienced power engineer, AC Circuits and Power Systems in Practice offers a comprehensive guide that reviews power system fundamentals and network theorems while exploring the practical aspects of equipment design and application. The author covers a wide-range of topics including basic circuit theorems, phasor diagrams, per-unit quantities and symmetrical component theory, as well as active and reactive power and their effects on network stability, voltage support and voltage collapse. Magnetic circuits, reactor and transformer design are analyzed, as is the operation of step voltage regulators. In addition, detailed introductions are provided to earthing systems in LV and MV networks, the adverse effects of harmonics on power equipment and power system protection. Finally, European and American engineering standards are presTrade ReviewThis book combines the author�s rich experience in industry and teaching expertise in university. It covers the fundamental topics of AC circuits, and the application of those theories are discussed with numerous examples as well as the requirements of Engineering Standards. The writing style is logical and explicit, while illustrations and diagrams are with great accuracy, facilitating readers to have a systematic and in-depth understanding. Overall, I think this book can be an invaluable guide for recent graduate engineers working in power industry. -- Adrian Chen, Electrical Engineer, Moolarben Coal Operations Pty Ltd, Australia This is a refreshingly practical text which covers a wide range of topics relating to AC power systems. The book is divided into two parts with part one providing a broad overview of AC power systems and a review of fundamental AC circuit theory. Part two of the book covers specific areas of AC power systems in more detail with chapters on three phase transformers, voltage and current measurement, energy metering, harmonics and power system protection. One standout feature of this book is the writing style which I found to be very straight forward and easy to read. Additionally, excellent diagrams and illustrations work well to reinforce the subject material. The text is very well referenced with a list of sources provided at the conclusion of each chapter. The industry based examples in the text work well to link electrical engineering theory and practice and as such this book should find appeal with both undergraduate students studying a course of electrical engineering and recent graduates. - James Lamont, Electrical Engineering Technical Officer, Deakin University, Australia The genius of the text is that it presents sound theoretical concepts in a practical, easy to apply manner. The use of phasor diagrams and illustrated examples makes the application to real world problems easier, and gives the practitioner a �feel� for the solution – a valuable and necessary outcome in situations where not all the information is easily available and decisions must still be made. - David Gaskell, Nyrstar Hobart Smelter, AustraliaTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvii Part I 1 1 Power Systems: A General Overview 3 1.1 Three‐phase System of AC Voltages 3 1.2 Low Voltage Distribution 6 1.3 Examples of Distribution Transformers 8 1.4 Practical Magnitude Limits for LV Loads 10 1.5 Medium Voltage Network 11 1.6 Transmission and Sub‐Transmission Networks 24 1.7 Generation of Electrical Energy 32 1.8 Sources 41 Further Reading 41 2 Review of AC Circuit Theory and Application of Phasor Diagrams 43 2.1 Representation of AC Voltages and Currents 43 2.2 RMS Measurement of Time Varying AC Quantities 44 2.3 Phasor Notation (Phasor Diagram Analysis) 45 2.4 Passive Circuit Components: Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors 49 2.5 Review of Sign Conventions and Network Theorems 55 2.6 AC Circuit Analysis Examples 61 2.7 Resonance in AC Circuits 74 2.8 Problems 83 2.9 Practical Experiment 88 3 Active Power, Reactive Power and Power Factor 91 3.1 Single‐Phase AC Power 91 3.2 Active Power 92 3.3 Reactive Power 93 3.4 Apparent Power or the volt‐amp Product, S 96 3.5 Three‐Phase Power 97 3.6 Power Factor 99 3.7 Power Factor Correction 100 3.8 Typical Industrial Load Profiles 105 3.9 Directional Power Flows 107 3.10 Energy Retailing 110 3.11 Problems 111 4 Magnetic Circuits, Inductors and Transformers 115 4.1 Magnetic Circuits 115 4.2 Magnetic Circuit Model 116 4.3 Gapped Cores and Effective Permeability 119 4.4 Inductance Calculations 120 4.5 Core Materials 121 4.6 Magnetising Characteristics of GOSS 122 4.7 Energy Stored in the Air Gap 125 4.8 EMF Equation 126 4.9 Magnetic Circuit Topologies 127 4.10 Magnetising Losses 129 4.11 Two‐Winding Transformer Operation 131 4.12 Transformer VA Ratings and Efficiency 133 4.13 Two‐Winding Transformer Equivalent Circuit 134 4.14 The Per‐Unit System 137 4.15 Transformer Short‐Circuit and Open‐Circuit Tests 138 4.16 Transformer Phasor Diagram 140 4.17 Current Transformers 142 4.18 Problems 144 4.19 Sources 153 5 Symmetrical Components 155 5.1 Symmetrical Component Theory 156 5.2 Sequence Networks and Fault Analysis 160 5.3 Network Fault Connections 163 5.4 Measurement of Zero‐sequence Components (Residual Current and Voltage) 170 5.5 Phase‐to‐Ground Fault Currents Reflected from a Star to a Delta Connected Winding 171 5.6 Sequence Components Remote from a Fault 173 5.7 Problems 175 5.8 Sources 185 6 Power Flows in AC Networks 187 6.1 Power Flow Directions 188 6.2 Synchronous Condenser 188 6.3 Synchronous Motor 191 6.4 Generalised Power Flow Analysis 192 6.5 Low X/R Networks 197 6.6 Steady State Transmission Stability Limit 201 6.7 Voltage Collapse in Power Systems 202 6.8 Problems 207 6.9 Sources 209 Part II 211 7 Three‐Phase Transformers 213 7.1 Positive and Negative Sequence Impedance 213 7.2 Transformer Zero‐Sequence Impedance 219 7.3 Transformer Vector Groups 221 7.4 Transformer Voltage Regulation 222 7.5 Magnetising Current Harmonics 228 7.6 Tap‐changing Techniques 233 7.7 Parallel Connection of Transformers 245 7.8 Transformer Nameplate 249 7.9 Step Voltage Regulator 251 7.10 Problems 264 7.11 Sources 272 8 Voltage Transformers 273 8.1 Inductive and Capacitive Voltage Transformers 273 8.2 Voltage Transformer Errors 276 8.3 Voltage Transformer Equivalent Circuit 281 8.4 Voltage Transformer ‘Error Lines’ 284 8.5 Re‐rating Voltage Transformers 288 8.6 Accuracy Classes for Protective Voltage Transformers 289 8.7 Dual‐Wound Voltage Transformers 292 8.8 Earthing and Protection of Voltage Transformers 292 8.9 Non‐Conventional Voltage Transformers 297 8.10 Problems 299 8.11 Sources 301 9 Current Transformers 303 9.1 CT Secondary Currents and Ratios 304 9.2 Current Transformer Errors and Standards 306 9.3 IEEE C57.13 Metering Class Magnitude and Phase Errors 309 9.4 Current Transformer Equivalent Circuit 312 9.5 Magnetising Admittance Variation and CT Compensation Techniques 315 9.6 Composite Error 319 9.7 Instrument Security Factor for Metering CTs 322 9.8 Protection Current Transformers 324 9.9 Inter‐Turn Voltage Ratings 337 9.10 Non‐Conventional Current Transformers 338 9.11 Problems 341 9.12 Sources 349 10 Energy Metering 351 10.1 Metering Intervals 353 10.2 General Metering Analysis using Symmetrical Components 361 10.3 Metering Errors 367 10.4 Ratio Correction Factors 373 10.5 Reactive Power Measurement Error 378 10.6 Evaluation of the Overall Error for an Installation 379 10.7 Commissioning and Auditing of Metering Installations 381 10.8 Problems 383 10.9 Sources 388 11 Earthing Systems 391 11.1 Effects of Electricity on the Human Body 391 11.2 Residual Current Devices 399 11.3 LV Earthing Systems 402 11.4 LV Earthing Systems used Worldwide 413 11.5 Medium Voltage Earthing Systems 413 11.6 High Voltage Earthing 423 11.7 Exercise 423 11.8 Problems (Earthing Grid Design) 425 11.9 Sources 434 12 Introduction to Power System Protection 437 12.1 Fundamental Principles of Protection 437 12.2 Protection Relays 438 12.3 Primary and Backup Protection (Duplicate Protection) 439 12.4 Protection Zones 441 12.5 Overcurrent Protection 443 12.6 Differential Protection 451 12.7 Frame Leakage and Arc Flash Busbar Protection 462 12.8 Distance Protection (Impedance Protection) 464 12.9 Problems 469 12.10 Sources 475 13 Harmonics in Power Systems 477 13.1 Measures of Harmonic Distortion 479 13.2 Resolving a Non‐linear Current or Voltage into its Harmonic Components (Fourier Series) 480 13.3 Harmonic Phase Sequences 484 13.4 Triplen Harmonic Currents 487 13.5 Harmonic Losses in Transformers 487 13.6 Power Factor in the Presence of Harmonics 492 13.7 Management of Harmonics 495 13.8 Harmonic Standards 504 13.9 Measurement of Harmonics 514 13.10 Problems 515 13.11 Sources 519 14 Operational Aspects of Power Engineering 521 14.1 Device Numbers 521 14.2 One Line Diagram (OLD) 523 14.3 Switchgear Topologies 526 14.4 Switching Plans, Equipment Isolation and Permit to Work Procedures 537 14.5 Electrical Safety 542 14.6 Measurements with an Incorrectly Configured Multimeter 549 14.7 Sources 551 Index 553

Read more less